THE  GRAND  TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 


THE 


GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS 

AN   EXPOSITION   OP 

THE  L^WS  AND  PRINCIPLES  OF  CHESS 
STRATEGETICS 

THE   PRACTICAL  APPLICATION  OF  THESE   LAWS  AND  PRINCI- 
PLES TO  THE  MOVEMENT  OF  FORCES  :  MOBILIZATION 
DEVELOPMENT,  MANOEUVRE,  AND  OPERATION 


BY 

FRANKLIN   K.  YOUNG 

AUTHOR  OF   "  THE    MINOR   TACTICS   OF   CHESS 


BOSTON 
ROBERTS  BROTHERS 

1898 


Copyright,  1897, 
BY  FRANKLIN  K.  YOUNG. 


All  rights  reserved. 


SEntoersttg  Press: 
JOHN  WILSON  AND  SON,  CAMBRIDGE,  U.  S.  A. 


PREFACE. 


IN  this  volume  is  presented  a  complete  system  of 
chess-play. 

This  system  is  deduced  from  the  play  of  the  greater 
Masters  ;  and  those  processes  by  which  they  gained 
their  renown  are  herein  formulated  and  put  into  lan- 
guage for  the  first  time. 

The  principles  which  govern  these  processes  are  sim- 
ple and  clearly  stated.  These  comprehend  every  situa- 
tion possible  on  the  chess-board,  and,  given  the  points 
occupied  by  the  opposing  kings,  then  the  proper  posi- 
tions for  the  remaining  pieces  are  readily  depicted  by 
the  student  who  has  mastered  this  theory. 

The  chess-player  will  find  this  volume  a  compass, 
which  at  every  move  points  the  true  course.  The  the- 
orist will  find  it  a  touchstone  whereby  the  most  subtle 
sophistry  may  be  detected,  and  the  "  analyst "  may 
come  to  understand  from  its  pages  why  the  house  of 
cards  he  so  laboriously  constructs  is  invariably  and 
with  ease  demolished  by  the  "  player  across  the  board." 

BOSTON,  1897. 


4C97S4 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

INTRODUCTORY xiii 

CHESS  STRATEGETICS 3 

Basic  Law 3 

Strategy,  Definition  of 3 

Tactics,           "          " 4 

Minor  Tactics,  Definition  of 4 

Major  Tactics,          "         " 4 

Grand  Tactics,         "         " 4 

Logistics,  Definition  of 4 

Lesser  Logistics,  Definition  of  .     .     .  • 5 

Greater  Logistics,        "        " 5 

FUNDAMENTAL  PRINCIPLES 7 

Grand  Law  of  Strategy  ..." 7 

"          "        Tactics 7 

"          "       Minor  Tactics 7 

"          "       Major  Tactics 7 

"          "        Grand  Tactics 8 

"          "       Logistics 8 

"          "        Lesser  Logistics 8 

"          "       Greater  Logistics 8 

THE  STRATEGETIC  PLANE 9 

The  Topographical  Zone - 9 

The  Kindred  Hypothetical  Zone   .     .     .  fy 11 

The  Adverse            "               " 13 

The  Strategetic  Centre 13 

"  "  Rear 15 

"            "           Ri^ht  Flank                     17 


viii  CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

THE  STRATEGETIC  PLANE  (Continued). 

The  Strategetic  Left  Flank 18 

The  Logistic  Horizon 19 

The  Strategetic  Objective  (Single  Front)   .     .....  19 

"  «  "          (Double  Front) 21 

The  Prime  Strategetic  Point 23 

The  Objective  Plane 25 

STRATEGETIC  ENTIRETIES 27 

The  Kindred  Determinate  Force 27 

The  Adverse  "  "        29 

The  Kindred  Hypothetical  Force 31 

The  Adverse  "  " 32 

STRATEGETIC  WEAKNESSES 33 

Class       I.   (Schiffers  vs.  Tschigorin) 33 

"        II.   (Bird  vs.  Gunsberg) 35 

"       III.   (Pillsbury  vs.  Steinitz) 36 

"       IV.   (Gunsberg  vs.  Blackburne) .37 

«         V.  (Zukertort  vs.  Steinitz) 38 

"      VI.  (Zukertort  vs.  Steinitz) 39 

"    VII.  (Weiss  vs.  Baird) 40 

STRATEGETIC  LINES  OF  MOVEMENT 42 

Lines  of  Mobilization 42 

"      "  Development 48 

"      "  Manoeuvre     t 53 

"      "  Operation ' ....  57 

ILLUSTRATIVE  GAMES 61 

I.    De  la  Bourdonnais  vs.  M'Donnell 61 

II.    Anderssen  vs.  Dufresne 64 

III.  M'Donnell  vs.  Amateur 66 

IV.  Anderssen  vs.  Kieseritzski 68 

V.    Morphy  vs.  Bird 70 

VI.    Morphy  vs.  Barnes 72 

GRAND   TACTICS. 

•THE  PRIME  STRATEGETIC  POINT 77 

By  the  Right 78 

"      "   Left  79 


CONTENTS.  ix 

• 

PAGE 

THE  PRIME  STRATEGETIC  POINT  (Continued). 

By  the  Right  Refused 80 

"      "   Centre       .     .     . 81 

OBJECTIVE  PLANES 82 

Class  A 82 

«     B 84 

«     C 85 

«     D 86 

«     E 87 

«     F 88 

«     G 89 

«     H 90 

"I 91 

«     J 92 

STRATEGIC  FRONTS  OF  OPERATION 93 

Single  Front  by  the  Right 94 

"       Left 95 

Double  Front  by  the  Right 96 

«          «      Left 97 

Minor  Strategic  Front 98 

Major         «             " 99 

Grand         "             " 100 

SUPPLEMENTARY  FORMATIONS 101 

Minor  Crochet 101 

Major        "            .     .  102 

En  Appui 103 

Front  Aligned •     • 104. 

Double  Alignment 105 

Crochet  Aligned 107 

Enceinte 

EnPotence .     .  109 

Echelon 

"         Supported  En  Appui 

Fianchetto 112 

LINES  OF  MOBILIZATION 

By  the  Right 114 

«       Left 115 

"       Right  Refused 115 

"      Left          "               115 


X  CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

SYMBOLS  AND  ABBREVIATIONS 116 

MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE 117 

"        CENTRE  ENCEINTE 131 

"        LEFT  OBLIQUE 135 

«            "            «          REFUSED 148 

"        RIGHT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED 156 

LINES  OF  DEVELOPMENT 159 

MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE "...  160 

"        ENCEINTE 189 

"            "        OBLIQUE  REFUSED 194 

"        LEFT  OBLIQUE 198 

«            "            "          REFUSED 225 

"            "      ENCEINTE  REFUSED 236 

GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE 243 

"       LEFT  OBLIQUE 255 

"       RIGHT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED 267 

"       LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED 269 

LESSER  LOGISTICS. 

LOGISTICS  OF  THE  QRP 280 

"  "  Q  KT  P 283 

"  "  Q  B  P "...  286 

"  ."  Q  P 288 

««  *"  KP 290 

"  ««  K  B  P 291 

"  "  K  KT  P 292 

"  "  K  R  P 293 

"  KKT  (White) 294 

"  "  "  (Black) 296 

"  "  QKT  (White) 297 

«  "  "  (Black) 299 

«  "KB  (White) 300 

«  «  «  (Black) 302 

«  «  Q  B  (White) 303 

"  "  «  (Black) 305 

«  K  R  (White) 306 

"  "  "  (Black) 307 

"  "  Q  R  (White) 308 

"  "  "  (Black) 309 


CONTENTS.  xi 

PAGE 

LOGISTICS  OF  THE  Q  (White) 310 

"              "         «    (Black) 311 

LINES  OF  MAN(EUVRE 312 

Simple  (Young  vs.  Ware) 312 

Compound  (Young  vs.  Fiske) 314 

Complex  (Young  vs.  Fellnar) 316 

LINES  OF  OPERATION 318 

Strategic     . 318 

a    (Young  vs.  Kelsey) 319 

b    (      "      vs.  Panin) 320 

c    (      "      vs.  Hill)      . 321 

d   (      "      vs.  Kaufmann) 322 

e    (      "      vs.  Harlow) 323 

Tactical 324 

a    (Young  vs.  Ware) 325 

b    (      "      vs.  Stone  and  Saulsen) 326 

c    (      "      vs.  Ware) 327 

d   (      "      vs.  Harlow) 328 

e    (      "      vs.  Sargent) 329 

Logistic 330 

a    (Young  us.  Ware) 331 

b    (      "      vs.  Mackenzie) 332 

c    (      «      vs.  Orde) %  ...  334 

d   (      «      vs.  Ware) 335 

e    (     "      vs.  Saulsen) 337 

GREATER  LOGISTICS. 

LOGISTICS  OF  WHITE'S  FIRST  MOVE 341 

"          "     BLACK'S  FIRST  MOVE 347 

«          «     WHITE'S  SECOND  MOVE 351 

"          "    BLACK'S  SECOND  MOVE 354 

"           "     WHITE'S  THIRD  MOVE 357 

"          "     BLACK'S  THIRD  MOVE 359 

"          "     WHITE'S  FOURTH  MOVE 361 

"          "    THE  PRIME  STRATEGETIC  POINT     ....  362 

"          "     OBJECTIVE  PLANES 364 

"          "    STRATEGIC  FRONTS 367 

"          "    THE  STRATEGETIC  OBJECTIVE    ...          .370 


xii  CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

LOGISTICS  OF  SUPPLEMENTARY  FORMATIONS 372 

"          lt    OPEN  FILES,  OPEN  DIAGONALS,  AND  POINTS 

OFFENSIVE 374 

"          "    LINES  OF  MOVEMENT 377 

"          "    THE  STRATEGETIC  HORIZON 383 

THE  CHESS  PLAYER'S  EPITOME 387 

APPENDIX. 

ILLUSTRATIVE  GAMES 393 

1.  Young  vs.  Pillsbury 393 

2.  "       vs.  Ware  and  Stone 396 

3.  "       vs.  Lowe 398 

4.  "       vs.  Snow 400 

5.  "       and  Burille  vs.  Ware  and  Snow 402 

6.  "      vs.  Sanford 404 

7.  «       vs.  Snow 406 

8.  "      vs.  Richardson 408 

9.  "      vs.  Snow 410 

10.  "      vs.  Dore 412 

11.  "      vs.  Snow 414 

12.  "      vs.  Cummings 416 

13.  "      vs.  Burille 418 

14.  "      vs.  Michaelis 420 

15.  "•    vs.  Sawyer 422 

16.  "      vs.  Ware 424 

17.  "      i7«.  Burille 427 

18.  "      vs.  Richardson 430 

19.  "      vs.  Ware 432 

20.  "       and  Ware  vs.  Burille 434 

21.  "       and  Stone  vs.  Burille 436 

22.  "       vs.  Mackenzie 438 

28.        "       and  Ware  vs.  Zukertort 440 

24.  "       vs.  Steinitz 443 

25.  "       vs.  Ware 445 

26.  "       vs.  Pillsbury 447 

THE  MODEL   GAME. 

THE  MODEL  GAME  (C.  P.  Morphy  vs.  Judge  A.  B.  Meek)  .  451 


INTRODUCTORY. 


LONG  ago,  when  you  were  a  little  fellow  not  yet  in  your 
teens,  and  fonder  by  far  of  the  fields  and  the  daisies 
than  of  school-books  and  the  school-room,  little  did 
you  think,  in  your  rambles  by  hill  and  by  dale,  to 
search  for  the  spring  from  whence  flows  all  human 
knowledge. 

Still  less  did  it  occur  to  you,  during  your  infrequent 
and  oft-times  involuntary  attendance  at  the  local  em- 
porium of  learning,  to  make  such  inquiry  of  the-  village 
pedagogue. 

Had  you  done  so,  it  is  probable  that  he  would  have 
answered  your  query  in  some  such  way  as  this : 

!'  My  boy,  all  human  knowledge  is  derived  from  expe- 
rience—  either  from  your  own  or  from  that  of  others." 
Then,  with  a  severe  glance  and  a  reproving  inflection  in 
his  voice,  he  might  have  continued :  "  Personal  experi- 
ence is  a  hard  school,  but  fools  will  learn  in  no  other." 

This,  of  course,  is  impolite  on  his  part,  and,  as  he  is  a 
grown  man  and  you  are  but  a  small  boy,  the  ensuing 
situation  is,  for  you,  one  of  embarrassment. 

It  would  have  been  kinder  had  he  made  a  specific 
illustration  without,  by  implication,  including  your  mi- 
nute personality  in  the  demonstration. 

For  instance,  he  might  have  told  you  that  from  the 
experiences  of  past  generations  are  derived  those  facts 


XIV  INTRODUCTORY. 

upon  which  is  founded  all  human  knowledge,  and  that 
each  complete  series  of  such  facts,  properly  classified 
and  arranged,  constitute  what  is  termed  a  science. 

To  make  this  clear  to  you,  he  might  have  further  ex- 
plained that  Strategetics  is  the  name  given  to  the  science 
of  war,  to  distinguish  it  from  all  other  sciences;  that 
the  science  of  Strategetics  is  made  up  of  the  classifica- 
tion and  systematic  arrangement  of  facts  derived  from 
the  experiences  of  the  greater  military  commanders 
—  Cyrus,  Epaminondas,  Alexander,  Hannibal,  Caesar, 
Julian,  Belisarius,  Timour,  Gustavus  Adolphus,  Tu- 
renne,  Conde,  Eugene,  Frederick,  Washington,  Napo- 
leon and  Von  Moltke ;  and  that  the  knowledge  thus 
acquired  teaches  how,  in  any  situation,  one  or  more 
bodies  of  men  may  accomplish  the  overthrow  of  one  or 
more  opposing  bodies  of  men  by  means  of  the  occupa- 
tion of  specific  points,  by  specific  forces,  in  specific 
times. 

Now,  it  is  not  unreasonable  to  assume  that  the  ven- 
erable pedagogue  played  chess,  or  even  that  he  was 
a  player  of  skill,  and  possibly  of  renown.  In  such  a 
case  he  well  might  continue  a  little  further,  and  tell 
you,— 

When  the  forementioned  bodies  of  men  are  repre- 
sented by  bits  of  bone  or  by  wooden  automata  known  as 
chessmen,  when  the  surface  of  the  chess-board  takes 
the  place  of  a  map^  or  of  an  expanse  of  actual  country, 
when  the  calculation  contemplates  the  occupation  of 
specific  points  on  the  chess-board  by  specific  chess  forces 
in  specific  times,  and  when  the  term  chess-plaji_is  substi- 
tuted for  the  term  warfare,  then,  that  chess  knowledge 
derived  from  the  experiences  of  the  greater  chess  mas- 
ters —  and  whicfy  so  far  as  it  is  teachable,  is  contained  in 
a  systematic  classification  of  facts  logically  deduced  from 


INTRODUCTORY.  xv 

the  chess  games  of  Philidor,  Deschapelles,  De  la  Bour- 
donnais,  M'Donnell,  Cochrane,  Staunton,  Szen,  Anders- 
sen,  Petroff,  Boden,  Lowenthal,  Harwitz,  Jaenisch, 
Kling,  Stamma,  Greco,  Mayet,  Gullim  Kassim,  Hey- 
debrant,  Yon  Bilguer,  Paulsen,  Kolisch,  Zukertort  and 
Morphy,  and  upon  which  is  based  that  consideration 
of  numbers,  localities  and  distances  whereby,  in  a  given 
situation,  one  or  more  bodies  of  chessmen  may  accom- 
plish the  overthrow  of  one  or  more  opposing  bodies  of 
chessmen  —  is  termed  in  this  theory,  and  it  is  believed 
with  entire  propriety,  the  Science  of  Chess  Strategetics. 


THE  GBAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


THE 

GRAND  TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 


CHESS   STRATEGETICS. 

Strategetics  is  that  science  which  teaches 
how,  in  any  situation,  a  given  body  of  chessmen 
may  exert  its  maximum  power  for  offence  and  for 
defence. 

The  science  of  Chess  Strategetics  is  founded  upon  a 
self-evident  truth,  the  operation  of  which  at  all  times  is 
uniform  and  irresistible. 

Basic  Law  of  the  Science  of  Chess  Strategetics.  —  Given 
a  force  which  at  a  given  point  and  at  a  given  time  is 
the  greater  force,  then  the  given  force  at  the  given 
point  and  at  the  given  time  will  overcome  the  opposing 
force. 

The  science  of  Chess  Strategetics  comprehends  the 
harmonious  union  of  three  great  primary  elements :  — 

I.     STRATEGY. 
II.     TACTICS. 
III.    LOGISTICS. 

Strategy  is  that  branch  of  the  science  of  Chess  Strate- 
getics which  treats  of  the  relative  values  of  localities. 

It  specifies  those  points  which  in  any  given  situation 
should  and  should  not  be  occupied ;  depicts  the  objec- 


4  THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 

tive  of,  and  designates  the  proper  direction  to  be  given 
to  lines  of  Mobilization,  Development,  Manoeuvre,  and 
Operation. 

Tactics  is  that  branch  of  the  science  of  Chess 
Strategetics  which  treats  of  the  relative  values  of 
forces. 

It  defines  those  processes  whereby  a  given  integer  of 
force  may  properly  co-operate  with  or  be  opposed  to  any 
other  integer  of  force.  Tactics  is  divided  into  three 
primary  classes :  — 

I.    MINOR  TACTICS. 

II.     MAJOR  TACTICS. 

III.     GBAND  TACTICS. 

Minor  Tactics  treats  of  the  proper  construction  of 
Primary  Bases. 

Major  Tactics  treats  of  the  evolutions  appertaining  to 
any  given  integer  of  chess  force  when  acting  either 
alone  or  in  co-operation  with  a  kindred  integer  against 
any  given  adverse  integer  of  chess  force,  the  latter 
acting  alone,  or  in  combination  with  any  other  of  its 
kindred  integers. 

Grand  Tactics  treats  of  the  values  of  objective  planes ; 
of  the  construction  of  strategic  fronts,  of  the  locating  of 
the  Prime  Strategetic  Point,  and  of  the  exploitation 
of  lines  of  Mobilization,  Development,  Manoeuvre,  and 
Operation. 

Logistics  is  that  branch  of  the  science  of  Chess  Strate- 
getics which  treats  of  the  movement  of  forces  from  a 
given  point  to  any  other  point.  Logistics  is  divided 
into  two  primary  classes  :  — 

I.    LESSER  LOGISTICS. 
II.     GREATER  LOGISTICS. 


CHESS  STRATEGETICS.  5 

Lesser  Logistics  treats  of  those  movements  of  forces 
which  are  contained  in  lines  of  Mobilization  and  in  lines 
of  Development. 

Greater  Logistics  treats  of  those  movements  of  forces 
which  are  contained  in  lines  of  Manoeuvre  and  in  lines  of 
Operation. 


FUNDAMENTAL   PRINCIPLES 


OF    THE 


SCIENCE   OF    CHESS   STKATEGKETICS. 


Grand  Law  of  Strategy.  —  Always  oppose  a  force 
united,  and  thus  capable  of  putting  forth  its  maximum 
power  for  offence  and  for  defence,  to  an  adverse  force 
disunited,  and  thus  incapable  of  putting  forth  its  maxi- 
mum power  for  offence  and  for  defence. 

Grand  Law  of  Tactics.  —  The  f orce  exerted  by  a  given 
piece  against  a  given  point  is  equal  to  the  force  exerted 
by  any  other  piece  against  the  same  point;  but  the 
force  exerted  by  two  or  more  pieces  is  greatest  at  that 
point  where  their  radii  offensive  intersect. 

Grand  Law  of  Minor  Tactics.  —  Whenever,  in  the  de- 
ployment of  opposing  forces,  a  formation  is  adopted  by 
one  player  which  properly  belongs  to  the  other  player, 
the  incident  is  favorable  to  Black. 

Grand  Law  of  Major  Tactics.  —  The  offensive  force 
of  a  given  piece  is  valid  at  any  point  against  which  it  is 
directed ;  but  the  defensive  force  of  a  given  piece  is 
valid  for  the  support  of  only  one  point,  except  when  the 
points  required  to  be  defended  are  all  contained  in  the 
perimeter  of  that  geometric  figure  which  appertains  to 
the  supporting  piece. 


8  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 

Grand  Law  of  Grand  Tactics.  —  Always  act  on  a  line 
of  Operations  when  it  exists.  Otherwise,  always  act  on 
a  line  of  Manoeuvre. 

Grand  Law  of  Logistics.  —  All  the  pieces  move  in 
straight  lines  from  one  point  to  another  point  within 
the  Strategetic  Plane,  and  their  lines  of  movement 
take  the  form  of  verticals,  horizontals,  diagonals  and 
obliques. 

Grand  Law  of  Lesser  Logistics.  —  When  exploiting  a 
line  of  Mobilization  or  a  line  of  Development,  so  deploy 
or  develop  that  each  pawn  and  piece  may  reach  its 
proper  post  in  the  minimum  number  of  moves,  and 
without  obstructing  the  movement  of  any  other  kindred 
pawn  or  piece. 

Grand  Law  of  Greater  Logistics.  —  When  acting  on  a 
line  of  Operations  no  movement  should  be  considered 
whose  outcome  cannot  be  mathematically  demonstrated  ; 
and  when  acting  on  a  line  of  Manoeuvre,  that  movement 
always  is  to  be  selected  which  combines  with  the  ma- 
noeuvre either  a  deployment  or  a  development. 


THE   STRATEGETIC   PLANE. 


The  Strategetic  Plane  is  that  surface  within  whose 
limits  are  contained  all  the  forces,  and  upon  which  are 
executed  all  the  movements,  that  are  comprehended  in 
a  game  of  chess. 

Its  salient  characteristics  are  the  following :  — 

The  Topographical  Zone  is  that  part  of  the  theatre 
of  conflict  which  is  in  view  of  the  contestants,  and  is 
known  as  the  material  or  visible  chess  board. 

THE   TOPOGEAPHICAL  ZONE. 
FIG.  1. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 


CHESS  STRATEGETICS. 


11 


The  Kindred  Hypothetical  Zone  is  that  invisible  part 
of  the  theatre  of  conflict  which  appertains  to  a  given 
player,  and  within  which  is  contained  all  the  forces  and 
executed  all  the  movements  incident  to  the  materializa- 
tion of  the  Kindred  Hypothetical  Force. 


KINDRED   HYPOTHETICAL  ZONE. 

White. 
FIG.  3. 


12 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


KINDRED  HYPOTHETICAL  ZONE. 
Black. 
FIG.  4. 


CHESS  STRATEGETICS. 


13 


The  Adverse  Hypothetical  Zone  is  that  invisible  part 
of  the  theatre  of  conflict  which  appertains  to  the  oppo- 
nent, and  within  which  is  contained  all  the  forces  and 
executed  all  the  movements  incident  to  the  materializa- 
tion of  the  Adverse  Hypothetical  Force. 

The  Strategetie  Centre  of  a  given  position  is  that  cen- 
tral diagonal  which  extends  in  the  direction  of  the  objec- 
tive plane,  and  divides  the  topographical  zone  into  two 
equal  parts. 


THE   STRATEGETIC   CENTRE. 

By  the  Right. 
FIG.  5. 

(Black.) 


(White.') 


14 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


THE  STKATEGETIC   CENTRE. 
By  the  Left. 

FIG.  6. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


CHESS  STRATEGETICS.  15 

The  Strategetic  Rear  of  White  is  the  first  horizontal. 


THE   STKATEGETIC  REAR. 

White. 

FIG.  7. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


16  THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 

The  Strategetic  Rear  of  Black  is  the  eighth  horizontal. 


THE   STRATEGETIC  REAR. 
Black. 

FIG.  8. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


CHESS  STRATEGETICS. 


17 


The  Strategetic  Right  Flank  is  the  lateral  extremity 
of  the  King's  side. 


THE   STRATEGETIC  EIGHT  FLANK. 

FIG.  9. 
(Black.) 


( White.) 


18 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


The  Strategetic  Left  Flank  is  the  lateral  extremity  of 
the  Queen's  side. 


THE  STRATEGETIC  LEFT  FLANK. 

FIG.  10. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


CHESS  STRATEGETICS. 


19 


The  Logistic  Horizon  of  a  given  force  always  is  the 
strategetic  rear  of  the  opponent. 

The  Strategetic  Objective  in  a  single  front  of  opera- 
tions is  that  point  the  occupation  of  which  by  a  pawn 
or  by  a  piece  establishes  the  kindred  force  on  a  Grand 
Strategic  Front  of  Operations. 


THE  STEATEGETIC  OBJECTIVE. 
Single  Front  by  the  Eight. 

FIG.  11. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


THE   STKATEGETIC  OBJECTIVE. 

Single  Front  by  the  Left. 

FIG.  12. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 


CHESS  STRATEGETICS. 


21 


The  Strategetic  Objective  in  a  double  front  of  opera- 
tions is  that  point  which  is  situated  at  the  angle  formed 
by  the  union  of  the  major  crochet  with  the  right  or 
left  oblique. 

THE   STRATEGETIC   OBJECTIVE. 
Double  Front  by  the  Right. 

FIG.  13. 
(Black.} 


(White.) 


22 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


THE  STKATEGETIC  OBJECTIVE. 
Double  Front  by  the  Left. 
FIG.  14. 

(Black.) 


X 


(White.) 


CHESS  STRATEGETICS. 


23 


The  Prime  Strategetic  Point  is  that  point  in  the 
topographical  zone  which  at  a  given  time  is  occupied 
by  the  kindred  king. 

PKIME   STRATEGETIC  POINT. 
Normal  position  —  White. 

FIG.  15. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


PKIME   STRATEGETIC  POINT. 

Normal  position  —  Black. 

PIG.  16. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 


CHESS  STRATEGETICS. 


25 


The  Objective  Plane  is  composed  of  the  point  occu- 
pied by  the  adverse  king,  together  with  the  immedi- 
ately adjacent  points.  (Cf.  Minor  Tactics,  p.  44.) 


THE   OBJECTIVE   PLANE. 

Normal  position  —  White. 

FIG.  17. 

(Black.) 


( White.) 


26  THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


THE  OBJECTIVE  PLANE. 
Normal  position  —  Black. 

FIG.  18. 
(Slack.) 


(White.) 


CHESS  STRATEGETICS. 


27 


Strategetic  Entireties.  —  The  Kindred  Determinate 
Force  is  composed  of  those  pieces  belonging  to  a  given 
player  which  at  the  given  time  are  contained  within 
the  topographical  zone. 

KINDRED  DETERMINATE  FORCE. 
Normal  position  —  White. 

EIG.  19. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


28 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


KINDRED  DETERMINATE  FORCE. 

Normal  position  —  Black. 

FIG.  20. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


CHESS  STRATEGETICS. 


29 


The  Adverse  Determinate  Force  is  composed  of  those 
pieces  belonging  to  the  opponent  which  at  the  given 
time  are  contained  within  the  topographical  zone. 

ADVEKSE   DETERMINATE  FORCE. 
White. 
FIG.  21. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 


30 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


ADVERSE  DETERMINATE  FORCE. 
Black. 

FIG.  22. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


CHESS  STRATEGETICS. 


31 


The  Kindred  Hypothetical  Force  is  that  accession  of 
force  possible  to  a  given  player  through  the  promotion 
of  one  or  more  pawns,  which  at  the  given  time  are  con- 
tained within  the  topographical  zone. 

KINDRED  HYPOTHETICAL  FOKCE. 

White. 
FIG.  23. 


32 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


KINDRED   HYPOTHETICAL  FORCE. 
Black. 
FIG.  24. 

(Black.) 


Hypothetical  Force  is  that  accession  of 
force  possible  to  the  opponent  through  the  promotion 
of  one  or  more  pawns  which  at  the  given  time  are  con- 
tained within  the  topographical  zone. 


STKATEGETIC   WEAKNESSES. 

A  Strategetic  Weakness  exists  in  a  given  position, 
when  by  violation  of  the  principles  of  Major  Tactics  two 
or  more  portions  of  the  given  force  are  exposed  to  be 
simultaneously  attacked  at  a  time  when  they  cannot  be 
simultaneously  defended;  or  when  by  violation  of  the 
principles  of  Grand  Tactics  an  improper  strategic 
front  is  selected,  or  the  proper  strategic  front  is  im- 
properly constructed,  or  when  the  Prime  Strategetic 
Point  is  improperly  located  ;  or  when  the  King,  together 
with  one  or  more  portions  of  the  given  force,  or  one  or 
more  points  in  the  Logistic  Horizon,  are  exposed  to  be 
simultaneously  attacked  at  a  time  when  they  .cannot  be 
simultaneously  defended. 

Strategetic  weaknesses  are  divided  into  seven  classes : 

CLASS  I.  contains  those  Strategetic  weaknesses  pro- 
duced by  the  Prime  Strategetic  Point  being  open  and 
exposed  to  the  attack  of  hostile  pieces. 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


TSCHIGORIN. 


^  I 


SCHIFFERS. 

Black  to  play  and  win. 

This  position  occurred  in  a  match  game  played  in 
1890. 

Tschigorin,  having  to  move,  played  P  —  Q  Kt  3,  and 
ultimately  the  game  was  drawn. 

The  correct  play  is  as  follows  :  - 

'WHITE.  BLACK. 

1.  R-R8(ck). 

2.  KtxR.  2.  B-R7(ck). 

3.  KxB.  3.  R-KR1  (ck). 

4.  K-Kt3.  4.  Kt-B4(ck). 

5.  K  moves.  5.  R  —  R  o  (ck). 

Checkmate. 


CHESS  STRATEGETICS. 


35 


CLASS  II.  contains  those  strategetic  weaknesses  pro- 
duced by  the  Prime  Strategetic  Point  being  improperly 
posted,  covered,  supported,  or  sustained. 


GUNSBERG. 


BIRD. 

NA 

Black  to  move. 

This  position  occurred  at  the  Third  Annual  Congress 
of  the  British  Chess  Association,  1887. 

Gunsberg,  having  the  move,  played  Kt  —  Q  3,  overlook- 
ing the  resulting  situation  of  his  King.  Bird,  instead  of 
mating  in  two  moves  by  1  Q  x  P  (ck)  and  2  B  —  Q  B  3 
(ck)  and  mate,  played  B  X  P.  Gunsberg  then  won  by 
Kt  x  B. 


36 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


CLASS  III.  contains  those  strategetic  weaknesses  pro- 
duced by  the  exposure  of  the  Prime  Strategetic  Point 
and  one  or  more  parts  of  the  kindred  force,  to  be  simul- 
taneously attacked  at  a  time  when  they  cannot  be  simul- 
taneously defended. 

STEINITZ. 


Tr-r^  jJSu  '///////////, 

«•  i  •  i 


PlLLSBURY. 

White  to  play  and  win. 


This  position  occurred  in  the  St.  Petersburg  Master's 
Tournament,  1895. 

White,  having  to  move,  played  P  —  Q  5,  and  ultimately 
the  game  was  drawn. 

The  correct  play  is  as  follows :  — 


CHESS   STRATEGETICS. 


37 


1.  K-R1. 

2.  P  -  K  R  3  (best). 

3.  R  x  Kt. 


WHITE.  BLACK. 

1.  Kt-KBG(ck).  1.    K-Bl(best). 

2.  Kt  X  R  P  (ck)  and  wins. 
If  Black  plays, 

2.  Q  — KR5. 

3.  Kt  x  B. 

4.  Q  x  B  P  and  wins. 

If  2.  P  x  Kt, White  wins  by  3.  Q-R6,Kt-Kt3;  4.  R  x 
Kt  and  mates  next  move. 

CLASS  IV.  contains  those  strategetic  weaknesses  pro- 
duced by  the  exposure  of  the  Prime  Strategetic  Point 
and  one  or  more  points  on  the  Logistic  Horizon,  to  be 
simultaneously  attacked  at  a  time  when  they  cannot 
be  simultaneously  defended. 

BLACKBURNE. 


GTJNSBERG. 
Black  to  play. 


38 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


This  position  occurred  in  a  match  game  in  1887. 

Black,  having  to  play,  manoeuvred  to  combine  a  pawn 
advantage  on  the  Queen's  side  with  an  exposed  objec- 
tive plane,  and  moved  R  x  Q  R  P.  White  replied  R  x  R, 
and  Black  played  Q  x  Kt  P  (ck).  Gunsberg  now,  instead 
of  winning  by  Kt  —  Q  2,  moved  K  —  K  2,  and  ultimately 
the  game  was  drawn. 

After  Kt-  Q  2,  if  Q  x  R,  then  Q  x  R  (ck),  K  x  Q  ; 
Kt  -  R  5  (ck),  and  White  is  a  R  ahead. 

CLASS  V.  contains  those  strategetic  weaknesses  pro- 
duced by  the  exposure  of  the  Logistic  Horizon  and  one 
or  more  portions  of  the  kindred  force  to  simultaneous 
attack  at  a  time  when  they  cannot  be  simultaneously 
defended. 

STEINITZ. 


ZUKEKTORT. 

Black  to  move. 


CHESS  STRATEGETICS. 


39 


This  position  occurred  in  the  match  of  1886. 
Black,  having  the  move,  played  P  x  P,  and  ultimately 
White  won  the  game. 

The  correct  play  is  as  follows  :  — 

WHITE. 


2. 
3. 
4. 


PxP. 
PxB. 
PxP. 


BLACK. 

1.  B-QR4. 

2.  BxB. 
R(R1)  — QKtl. 
PxP. 
Q-KB4. 


3. 

4. 

5.  Q-Q1.  5. 

And  Black  wins  by  6  R  X  P,  or  6  R  -  Kt  7. 

CLASS  VI.  contains  those  strategetic  weaknesses  pro- 
duced by  the  exposure  of  two  or  more  portions  of  the 
kindred  force,  to  be  simultaneously  attacked  at  a  time 
when'  they  cannot  be  simultaneously  defended. 

STEINITZ. 


ZUKERTORT. 

White  to  play  and  win. 


40 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


This  position  occurred  in  a  match  game  played  in 
1886. 

Zukertort,  having  to  move,  played  Kt  (Q  4)  —  Kt  5, 
and  ultimately  the  game  was  drawn. 

The  correct  play  is  as  follows  :  - 

WHITE.  BLACK. 

1.  KtxB.  1.    RxR(ck). 

2.  Q  x  R.  2.    Q  x  Kt. 

3.  B  — QKt5c  3.    Q  —  Kt  3. 

4.  B  x  Kt.  4.    R  x  B. 

5.  Kt  —  Q  R  4  and  the  Black  Kt  at  Q  B  4  is  lost. 
CLASS  VII.  contains  those  strategetic  weaknesses  pro- 
duced by  the  exposure  of  two  or  more  points  on  the 
Logistic  Horizon,  to   be  simultaneously  attacked   at  a 
time  when  they  cannot  be  simultaneously  defende'd. 

BAIRD. 


WKISS. 
White  to  move. 


CHESS  STRATEGETICS.  41 

This  position  occurred  at  the  Sixth  American  Chess 
Congress,  1889. 

White,  having  to  move,  played  P  —  Q  Kt  7,  and  ulti- 
mately the  game  was  drawn. 

The  correct  play  is  as  follows  :  — 


WHITE. 

BLACK 

. 

1. 

Kt 

-QB4. 

1. 

K 

-K5 

(best). 

2. 

Kt 

-Q6 

(ck). 

2. 

K 

-B6. 

3. 

Kt 

XP. 

3. 

K 

-Kt7. 

4. 

P  -  Kt  4. 

4. 

K 

XP. 

5. 

P  -  Kt  5. 

5. 

K 

-Kt8. 

6. 

P  -  Kt  6. 

6. 

P 

-R7. 

7. 

P  -  Kt  7. 

7. 

P 

-R8 

(Q). 

8. 

P  -  Kt  8 

(Qck). 

8. 

K 

-B7. 

9. 

Q-Kt3 

(ck). 

9. 

K 

-B8. 

10. 

K-Q2. 

And  White 

wins. 

STRATEGETIC  LINES   OF  MOVEMENT. 

A  Strategetic  Line  of  Movement  is  composed  of  those 
processes  whereby  a  given  determinate  force  is  properly 
mobilized,  developed,  manoeuvred,  or  operated. 

Strategetic  Lines  of  Movement  are  divided  into  four 
classes :  — 

I.  LINES  OF  MOBILIZATION. 

II.  LINES  OF  DEVELOPMENT. 

III.  LINES  OF  MANOEUVRE. 

IV.  LINES  OF  OPERATION. 

A  Line  of  Mobilization  is  composed  of  those  move- 
ments whereby  all  the  pawns  and  pieces  are  deployed 
into  a  given  primary  base,  the  latter  being  situated  on 
the  proper  minor  strategic  front. 


STRATEGETIC  LINES  OF  MOVEMENT.  43 


LINES  OF  MOBILIZATION. 

Minor  Front  by  the  Right. 

FIG.  25. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 


44  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


LINES  OF  MOBILIZATION. 
Minor  Front  by  the  Left. 

FIG.  26. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


STRATEGETIC  LINES  OF  MOVEMENT. 


45 


LINES  OF  MOBILIZATION. 

Minor  Front  by  the  Eight  Refused. 

FIG.  27. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


46 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


LINES  OF  MOBILIZATION. 

Minor  Front  by  the  Left  Kefused. 

(Attack.) 

FIG.  28. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


STRATEGETIC  LINES  OF  MOVEMENT. 


LINES  OF  MOBILIZATION. 

Minor  Front  by  the  Left  Refused. 
(Counter  Attack.) 

FIG.  29. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


48 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


A  Line  of  Development  is  composed  of  those  move- 
ments whereby  the  primary  base  is  developed  along  the 
proper  major  or  grand  strategic  front. 


LINES  OF  DEVELOPMENT. 

White.  —  Major  Front  by  the  Right. 

Black.  — Major  Front  by  the  Left  Refused. 

FIG.  30. 
(Black.) 


m. 

i 


(White.) 


STRATEGETIC  LINES   OF  MOVEMENT.  49 


LINES  OF  DEVELOPMENT. 

White.  —  Major  Front  by  the  Left. 

Black.  —  Major  Front  by  the  Eight  Refused 

FIG.  31. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


50 


THE  GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


LINES  OP  DEVELOPMENT. 

Grand  Front  by  the  Left. 
FIG.  32. 

{black.) 


(White.) 


STRATEGETIC  LINES   OF  MOVEMENT. 


51 


LINES  OF  DEVELOPMENT. 

Grand  Front  by  the  Eight  Refused. 

FIG.  33. 

(Slack.) 


' 


•bfr 


(TFMe.) 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


LINES  OF  DEVELOPMENT. 

White.  —  Grand  Front  by  the  Eight. 

Black.  —  Grand  Front  by  the  Left  Kef  used. 

FIG.  34. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 


STRATEGETIC  LINES   OF  MOVEMENT. 


53 


A  Line  of  Manoeuvre  is  composed  of  those  movements 
whereby  a  given  force,  unless  prevented,  will  establish 
itself  at  a  given  point  and  at  a  given  time  as  the  greater 
force. 


LINES  OF  MANOEUVRE. 
(Combining  the  Deployment  of  a  Pawn.) 

FIG.  35. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


NOTE.  —  In  this  situation  White,  having  the  move,  de- 
ploys P  —  K  B  4.  This  pawn  now  occupies  its  proper 
post  on  the  line  of  mobilization,  and  throws  Black  on 
the  defensive  by  the  threat  to  advance  to  K  B  5,  which, 
all  else  being  equal,  would  give  White  a  winning  posi- 


54 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


tion.  Consequently  the  point  K  B  4  is  the  common 
objective  both  of  the  line  of  mobilization  and  of  the 
line  of  manoauvre. 

If  Black  has  the  move,  he  deploys  P  —  Q  R  4.  This 
pawn  now  occupies  its  proper  post  on  the  line  of  mobili- 
zation, and  throws  White  on  the  defensive  by  the  threat 
to  support  the  advance  of  the  black  Q  Kt  P  to  Q  Kt  5, 
which,  all  else  being  equal,  would  give  Black  a  decided 
advantage  in  position.  Consequently  the  point  Q  R  4  is 
the  common  objective  both  of  the  line  of  mobilization 
and  of  the  line  of  mano3uvre. 

LINES  OF  MANCEUVRE, 
(Combining  the  Development  of  a  Pawn.) 

FIG.  36. 

(mack.) 


(While.) 


STRATEGETIC  LINES  OF  MOVEMENT. 


55 


NOTE.  —  White,  having  to  move,  may  dislodge  by 
P  —  K  5  the  black  Kt  from  K  B  3  and  establish  the 
major  front  by  the  right.  Thus,  the  point  K  5  is  the 
common  objective  both  of  the  line  of  development  and  of 
the  line  of  manoeuvre,  and,  all  else  being  equal,  its  occu- 
pation by  the  white  K  P  will  increase  the  advantage  in 
position  which  White  already  possesses  by  establishing 
the  major  front  by  the  right  and  throwing  Black  on  the 
strategetic  defensive. 

LINES  OF  MANCEUVRE. 

(Combining  the  Deployment  of  a  Piece.) 

FIG.  37.    • 
(Black.) 


(Wfiite.) 


56 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


NOTE.  — White,  having  to  move,  castles  K  R,  throwing 
Black  on  the  tactical  defensive  by  the  threat  to  continue 
with  either  K  B  or  K  R,  takes  Black's  K  B  P  (ckj,  which, 
all  else  being  equal,  would  win  the  game.  The  point 
K  B  1  thus  is  the  common  objective  both  of  the  line  of 
mobilization  and  of  the  line  of  manoeuvre. 


LINES  OF  MANOEUVRE. 

(Combining  the  Development  of  a  Piece.) 

FIG.  38. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 


NOTE.  —  White,  having  the  move,  plays  Kt  —  K  Kt  5, 
which  throws  Black  on  the  .defensive  by  the  threat  to 
continue  either  with  Kt,  B,  or  R  takes  Black's  K  B  P, 


STRATEGETIC  LINES  OF  MOVEMENT. 


57 


which,  all  else  being  equal,  would  win  the  game.     Con- 
sequently the  point  K  Kt  5  is  the  common  objective  both 
of  the  line  of  development  and  of  the  line  of  manoeuvre. 
A  Line  of  Operations  is  composed  of  those  movements 
whereby  a  greater  force  overcomes  a  lesser  force. 

LINES  OF  OPERATIONS. 
(Strategic.), 

PIG.  39. 
(.Black.) 


(White.) 
White  to  move  and  win. 


NOTE.  — White,  having  the  move,  plays  1  Q  —  Q  5  (ck) ; 
the  black  K  cannot  enter  the  objective  plane  K  B  1  on 
account  of  White  mating  with  Q-KBT(ck),  and  is 


58 


THE  GRAND   TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 


compelled  to  retire  to  K  R  1.  The  white  Kt  then  checks 
at  K  B  7,  and  upon  Black  playing  K  —  K  Kt  1,  the  Kt 
again  checks  at  K  R  6,  also  disclosing  check  from  the 
white  Q.  The  hlack  K  again  is  compelled  to  retire  to 
KR1,  whereupon^the  white  Q  checks  at  KKt8.  The 
black  R  takes  the  Q,  and  then  the  white  Kt  mates  at 
KB  7. 

In  the  language  of  chess  strategetics  the  mobility  of 
the  objective  plane  is  1,  and  the  value  of  the  white  radius 
of  offence  is  1 ;  and  these  being  equal,  the  objective  plane 
is  commanded. 

LINES  OF  OPERATIONS. 

(Tactical.) 

FIG.  40. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
White  to  move  and  win. 


STRATEGETIC  LINES   OF  MOVEMENT. 


59 


NOTE.  —  White,  having  the  move,  plays  1  P  —  K  B  7 
(ck).  If  Black  moves  his  K,  the  white  P  takes  the 
black  Q  ;  if  the  black  Q  takes  the  P,  the  white  Kt  checks 
at  K  R  6 ;  and  if  the  black  K  takes  the  P,  the  white  Kt 
checks  at  Q  6  ;  and  in  either  case  White  wins  by  gaining 
the  black  Q  in  exchange  for  his  Kt  and  K  B  P. 

LINES  OF  OPERATIONS. 

(Logistic.) 

FIG.  41. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
White  to  move  and  win. 


NOTE.  —  White  plays  1  P  -  Q  B  6.  Black  must  take, 
and  if  with  Q  P,  White  continues  P  —  Q  Kt  6  ;  and  how- 
ever Black  plays,  White  queens  a  pawn  and  wins. 


60  THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 

In  the  language  of  chess  strategetics  White  occupies 
the  logistic  horizon,  thus  opening  communication  with 
the  kindred  hypothetical  force,  and  enabling  a  portion 
of  the  latter  to  enter  the  topographical  zone  and  effect 
a  junction  with  the  kindred  determinate  force,  the 
united  forces  being  the  greater  force  as  compared  to 
the  adverse  determinate  force. 


ILLUSTRATIVE  GAMES.    V 


I. 

The  immortal  fiftieth  battle.  Connoisseurs  hold  that 
the  annals  of  chess  produce  no  higher  flight  of  genius 
than  the  play  of  M'Donnell  in  this  game. 

This  game  illustrates  the  major  right  oblique  re- 
fused by  Black,  combined  with  a  line  of  manoeuvre 
against  an  objective  plane  located  on  the  centre. 

QUEEN'S  GAMBIT. 

1 

DE   LA   BOUKDONNAIS.  M'DONNBLL. 

1.  P-Q4.  1.  P-Q4. 

2.  P-QB4.  2.  PxP. 

3.  P-K4.  3.  P-K4. 

4.  P-Q5.  4.  P-KB4. 

5.  QKt-B3.  5.  KKt-B3. 

6.  K  B  X  P.  6.  K  B  -  B  4. 

7.  Kt-KB3.  7.  Q-K2. 

8.  B-KKt5.  8.  BxBP(ck). 

9.  K-Bsq.  9.  B-Kt3. 

10.  Q-K2.  10.  P-KB5. 

11.  R  — Qsq.  11.  B  — KKt5. 

12.  P-Q6.  12.  PxP. 

13.  Kt  — Q5.  13.  Ktx  Kt. 

14.  Bx  Q.  14.  Kt-K6(ck). 

15.  K-Ksq.  15.  K  X  B. 


62  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 

16.  Q-Q3.  16.   KR-Qsq. 

17.  QR-Q2.  17.   QKt-B3. 

18.  P-QKt3.  18.   KB-R4. 

19.  P-QR3.  19.    QR-QBsq. 

20.  KR-KKtsq.  20.   P-QK14. 

21.  KBxP.  21.    BxKt. 

22.  PxB.  22.    Kt-Q5. 

23.  B-B4.  23.    KtxBP(ck). 

24.  K  -  B  2.  24.   Kt  X  Q  R. 

25.  RxP(ck).  25.    K-B3. 

26.  R-KB7(ck).  26.    K-Kt3. 

27.  R-QKt7.  27.    Kt  (Q  7)  X  B. 

28.  PxKt.  28.   RxP. 

29.  Q-QKtsq.  29.   B-Kt3. 

30.  K-B3.  30.    R-QB6. 

31.  Q-QR2.  31.   Kt-QB5(clisck), 

32.  K  — Kt4.  32.    R  —  K  Kt  sq. 

33.  RxB.  33.   PxR. 

34.  K-R4.  34.    K-B3. 

35.  Q-K2.  35.    R-KKt3. 

36.  Q-KR5.  36.   Kt-K6. 

And  White  resigns. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


63 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES 
Position  after  White's  12th  Move. 

FIG.  42. 
M'DONNELL. 


BE    LA    BOURDONNAIS. 

Black  to  move. 


64  THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


II. 

Allowed  by  proficients  generally  to  be  the  most  bril- 
liant Evans'  Gambit  ever  played. 

It  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the  right  com- 
bined with  a  line  of  manoeuvre  against  an  objective 
plane  located  on  the  centre. 


EVANS'   GAMBIT. 

ANDERSSEN. 

DUFRESNE. 

1. 

P—  K4. 

1. 

P-K4. 

2. 

Kt-KB3. 

2. 

Kt-QB3. 

3. 

B-B4. 

3. 

B-B4. 

4. 

P-QKt4. 

4. 

BxKtP. 

5. 

P-QB3. 

5. 

B-R4. 

6. 

P-Q4. 

6. 

PxP. 

7. 

Castles. 

7. 

P-Q6. 

8. 

Q-Kt3. 

8. 

Q-B3. 

9. 

P  —  K5. 

9. 

Q-Kt3. 

10. 

R-K1. 

10. 

KKt-K2. 

11. 

B-R3. 

11. 

P-Kt4. 

12. 

QxKtP. 

12. 

R-QKtl. 

13. 

Q-R4. 

13. 

B-Kt3. 

14. 

QKt-Q2. 

14. 

B-Kt2. 

15. 

Kt-K4. 

15. 

Q-KB4. 

16. 

KBxQP. 

16. 

Q-R4. 

17. 

Kt-B6(ck). 

17. 

P  X  Kt. 

18. 

PxP. 

18. 

R  —  Ktl. 

19. 

QR-Ql. 

19. 

Q  X  Kt. 

20. 

R  X  Kt  (ck). 

20. 

KtxR. 

21. 

QxP(ck). 

21. 

KxQ. 

22. 

B-B5  (die  ck). 

22. 

K-K1. 

23. 

B-Q7(ck). 

23. 

K-Q1. 

24. 

B  x  Kt  (ck). 

Checkmate. 

ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


65 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 

Position  after  Black's  19th  Move. 

FIG.  43. 

DtJFRESNE. 


v//// 


ANDERSSEN. 
White  to  move. 


66 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


III. 


Considered  by  the  critics  the  most  brilliant  Evans  ever 
played  at  the  odds  of  the  Q  Kt. 

The  play  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  combined  with  a  line  of  manoeuvre  against  the 
objective  plane  located  on  the  King's  wing,  and  not 
covered  by  a  Kt  at  K  B  3. 


EVANS'  GAMBIT. 


Remove  White's  Queen's  Knight. 


M'DONNELL. 

AMATEUR. 

1. 

P-K4. 

1. 

P-K4. 

2. 

Kt  -  K  B  3. 

2. 

Kt-QB3. 

3. 

K  B  -  B  4. 

3. 

K  B  -  B  4. 

4. 

P-QKt4. 

4. 

B  X  Kt  P. 

5. 

P-QB3. 

5. 

B-R4. 

6. 

Castles. 

6. 

Kt  -  K  B  3. 

7. 

Q-QB2. 

7. 

Castles. 

8. 

B-QR3. 

8. 

R  —  Ksq. 

9. 

P-Q4. 

9. 

P-Q4. 

10. 

KPxP. 

10. 

K  Kt  X  P. 

11. 

Px  P. 

11. 

Kt  x  Q  B  P. 

12. 

QR-Qsq. 

12. 

Kt  X  R. 

13. 

R  X  Kt. 

13. 

B-Q2. 

14. 

BxKBP(ck). 

14. 

KxB. 

15. 

RxB(ck). 

15'. 

QxR. 

16. 

Kt-Kto(ck). 

16. 

K  -  Kt  sq. 

17. 

QxKRP(ck). 

Checkmate. 

ITLUSTRATIVE    GAMES. 


67 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 

Position  after  Black's  llth  Move. 

FIG.  44. 

AMATEUR. 


M'DONNELL. 

White  to  move. 


68  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 

IV. 

All  authorities  agree  that  this  partie  is  the  most  bril- 
liant game  of  which  there  is  any  record. 

It  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the  right,  com- 
bined with  a  line  of  manoeuvre  against  an  objective 
plane  located  on  the  centre. 

KING'S  BISHOP'S  GAMBIT. 
ANDERSSEN.  KIESEKITZKI. 


1. 

P-K4. 

1. 

P-K4. 

2. 

P  -  K  B  4. 

2. 

BxP. 

3. 

B-QB4. 

3. 

P-QKt4. 

4. 

B  X  Kt  P. 

4. 

Q-R5(ck) 

5. 

K-B1. 

5. 

Kt-KB3. 

6. 

Kt  -  K  B  3. 

6. 

Q-R3. 

7. 

P-Q3. 

7. 

Kt-R4. 

8. 

Kt  -  R  4. 

8. 

P-QB3. 

9. 

Kt-B5. 

9. 

Q-Kt4. 

10. 

P-KKt4. 

10. 

Kt  -  K  B  3. 

11. 

R-KKtl. 

11. 

PxB. 

12. 

P-KR4. 

12. 

Q-Kt3. 

13. 

P-R5. 

13. 

Q-Kt4. 

14. 

Q-B3. 

14. 

Kt  -  K  Kt  1 

15. 

BxP. 

15. 

Q^B  3. 

16. 

Kt  —  QB3. 

16.. 

B-B4. 

17. 

Kt-Q5. 

17. 

Q  x  Kt  P. 

18. 

B-Q6. 

18. 

BxR. 

19. 

P-K5. 

19. 

QxR(ck). 

20. 

K-K2. 

20. 

Kt-QR3. 

21. 

KtxKtP(ck). 

21. 

K-Q1. 

22. 

Q_B6(ck). 

22. 

Ktx  Q. 

23. 

B-K7(ck). 

Checkmate. 

ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


69 


ILLUSTRATIVE  GAMES. 
Position  after  Black's  17th  move. 

FIG.  45. 
KIESERITZKI. 


ANDERSSEN. 
White  to  move. 


70 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


V. 


The  following  game  is  accepted  generally,  as  the  most 
brilliant  of  Morphy's  masterpieces. 

It  illustrates  the  formation  of  the  major  right  oblique 
by  Black. 

PHILIDOR'S  DEFENCE. 


BIRD. 

MORPHY. 

1. 

P-K4. 

1. 

P-K4. 

2. 

Kt-KB3. 

2. 

P-Q3. 

3. 

P-Q4. 

3. 

P-KB4. 

4. 

Kt-B3. 

4. 

PxKP. 

5. 

QKtxP. 

5. 

P-Q4: 

6. 

Kt-Kt3. 

6. 

P-K5. 

7. 

Kt-K5. 

'7. 

Kt-KB3. 

8. 

B-KKt5. 

8. 

B-Q3. 

9. 

Kt  —  E5. 

9. 

Castles. 

10. 

Q-Q2. 

10. 

Q-K1. 

11. 

P-KKt4. 

11.' 

KtxP. 

12. 

Kt  X  Kt. 

12. 

QxKt. 

13. 

Kt-K5. 

13. 

Kt-B3. 

14. 

B-K2. 

14. 

Q-R6. 

15. 

Kt  X  Kt. 

15. 

PxKt. 

16. 

B-K3. 

16. 

R-Ktl. 

17. 

Castles  (QR). 

17. 

RxBP. 

18. 

BxR. 

18. 

Q-QR6. 

19. 

P-B3. 

19. 

QxRP. 

20. 

P-Kt4. 

20. 

Q-R8(ck)o 

21. 

K  —  B2. 

21. 

Q-R5(ck). 

22. 

K-Kt2. 

22. 

BxKtP. 

23. 

PxB. 

23. 

RxP(ck). 

24. 

QxR. 

24. 

QxQ(ck). 

25. 

K-B2. 

25. 

P-K6. 

26. 

BxP. 

26. 

B_B4(ck). 

27. 

R-Q3. 

27. 

Q-B5(ck). 

28. 

K  -  Q  2. 

28. 

Q-R7(ck). 

2!). 

K-Q1. 

29. 

Q-KtS(ck) 

And  White 

resigned. 

ILLUSTRATIVE    GAMES. 


71 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 

Position  after  White's  16th  Move. 

FIG.  46. 

MORPHY. 


I • 

i 


BIRD. 
Black  to  move. 


72 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


VI. 


Another  of  Morphy's  masterpieces.  This  game  illus- 
trates the  formation  of  the  first  supporting  parallel  by 
Black  and  the  attack  of  the  objective  plane  located  on 
the  centre.  It,  of  course,  ranks  as  one  of  the  finest 
games  ever  played. 


PHILIDOR'S  DEFENCE. 


BARNES. 

MORPHY. 

1. 

P-K4. 

1. 

P-K4. 

2. 

Kt-KB3. 

2. 

P-Q3. 

3. 

P-Q4. 

8. 

P-KB4. 

4. 

PXKP. 

4. 

BPxP. 

5. 

Kt-Kt5. 

5. 

P-Q4. 

6. 

P-K6. 

6. 

B-B4. 

7. 

Kt-B7. 

7. 

Q-B3. 

8. 

B-K3. 

8. 

P-Q5. 

9. 

B-KKt5 

9. 

Q-B4. 

10. 

KtxR. 

10. 

QxB. 

11. 

B-B4. 

11. 

Kt-QB3. 

12. 

Kt-B7. 

12. 

QxP. 

13. 

R-B1. 

13. 

Kt-B3. 

14. 

P  —  KB3. 

14. 

Kt-QKt5. 

15. 

Kt-R3. 

15. 

BxP. 

16. 

BxB. 

16. 

Kt-Q6(ck) 

17. 

QxKt. 

17. 

PxQ. 

18. 

Castles  (QR). 

18. 

BxKt. 

19. 

B-Kt3. 

19. 

P-Q7(ck). 

20. 

K-Ktl. 

20. 

B-B4. 

21. 

Kt-K5. 

21. 

K-B1. 

22. 

Kt-Q3. 

22. 

R-K1. 

23. 

KtxB. 

23. 

QXR. 

And  White 

resigns. 

ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


73 


ILLUSTKATIVE  GAMES. 

Position  after  White's  14th  Move. 

FIG.  47. 

MORPHT. 


'/////sf  '///////KM 

il 


BARNES. 
Black  to  move. 


GRAND  TACTICS. 


THE  PRIME  STRATEGETIC   POINT. 

The  Prime  Strategetic  Point  always  is  that  point  which 
is  occupied  by  the  kindred  King. 


PRINCIPLE. 

The  proper  post  for  the  Prime  Strategetic  Point  is  at 
the  extremity  of  a  straight  line  drawn  from  the  centre 
of,  and  at  right  angles  to,  the  grand  strategic  front.  It 
never  should  be  posted  at  the  extremity  of  an  adverse 
major  or  grand  strategic  front ;  nor  on  the  same  side  of 
the  board  with  the  crochet  aligned  in  a  double  strategic 
front ;  nor  on  the  wing  refused  of  a  kindred  minor  or 
major  strategic  front. 


78 


THE    GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


PRIME   STRATEGETIC  POINT. 
(By  the  Right.) 

FIG.  48. 
(Black.) 


IBS 


lib      «|     g 

'v//^:\Y/y 

'  4 

\mfmm —^ 


(WAife.) 


THE  PRIME  STRATEGETIC  POINT. 


79 


PRIME   STRATEGETIC  POINT. 
(By  the  Left.) 

FIG.  49. 

(Black.) 


(While.) 


80 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


PRIME  STRATEGETIC  POINT. 
(By  the  Right  Refused.) 

FIG,  50. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


THE  PRIME  STRATEGETIC  POINT. 


81 


PRIME  STRATEGETIC  POINT. 
(By  the  Centre.) 

FIG.  51. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


OBJECTIVE  PLANES. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  mobility  of  a  given  Objective  Plane  decreases  as 
the  number  of  points  open  to  the  movement  of  the  ad- 
verse King  decreases. 

The  vulnerability  of  a  given  Objective  Plane  increases 
as  the  number  of  radii  of  offence  possible  to  be  operated 
against  it  by  hostile  integers  of  force  increases. 

The  potential  value  of  a  given  Objective  Plane  is  as 
the  sum  of  its  mobility  and  its  vulnerability  is  to  the 
sum  of  the  radii  of  offence  operated  by  a  hostile  deter- 
minate force. 

There  are  sixty-four  Objective  Planes.  These  are 
divided  into  ten  classes  :  — 

CLASS  A  comprises  the  four  objective  planes  in  which 
the  adverse  King  is  situated  at  R  1.  The  normal  vul- 
nerability of  a  plane  of  this  class  is  21 ;  its  normal 
mobility  is  4. 


OBJECTIVE  PLANES. 


83 


OBJECTIVE  PLANES. 
Class  A. 
FIG.  52. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
Vulnerability    .     .    21  Mobility    .    .    4 

SUMMARY. 

Sum  of  Verticals  and  Horizontals    .... 

Sum  of  Diagonals 

Sum  of  Obliques 1 

Total 


Sum  of  Points  of  Movement 


21 
4 


84 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 


CLASS  B  comprises  the  eight  planes  in  which  the 
adverse  King  is  situated  at  Kt  1  or  at  R  2.  The  normal 
vulnerability  of  a  plane  of  this  class  is  30 ;  its  normal 
mobility  is  6. 


OBJECTIVE  PLANES. 

Class  B. 
FIG.  53. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
Vulnerability     .     .    30  Mobility 

SUMMARY. 

Sum  of  Verticals  and  ^lIqif^%#< 
Sum  of  Diagonals 
Sum  of  Obliques 
Total 


Sum  of  Points  of  Movement 


5 

7 

18 

30 

6 


OBJECTIVE  PLANES. 


85 


CLASS  C  comprises  those  eight  objective  planes  in 
which  the  adverse  King  is  located  at  K  B  1,  Q  B  1,  R  3, 
R6.  The  normal  vulnerability  of  a  plane  of  this  class 
is  39  ;  its  normal  mobility  is  6. 


OBJECTIVE  PLANES. 
Class  C. 
FIG.  54. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
Vulnerability     .    .    39  Mobility     .    .    6 

SUMMARY. 

Sum  of  Verticals  and  Horizontals  ....       7 

Sum  of  Diagonals 9 

Sum  of  Obliques 23 

Total 39    q 

Sum  of  Points  of  Movement 6 


86 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


CLASS  D  comprises  the  eight  objective  planes  in  which 
the  adverse  King  is  situated  at  K  1,  Q  1,  R  4,  R  5.  The 
normal  vulnerability  of  a  plane  of  this  class  is  42 ;  its 
normal  mobility  is  6. 


4"$ 


OBJECTIVE  PLANES. 
Class  D. 
FIG.  55. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
Vulnerability    .    .    42  Mobility 

SUMMARY. 
Sum  of  Verticals  and  Horizontals  .     . 


7  . 


Sum  of  Diagonals    ......... 

Sum  of  Obliques      .........  26 

Total   ...........  42 

Sum  of  Points  of  Movement            ....  6 


OBJECTIVE  PLANES. 


87 


CLASS  E  comprises  the  four  objective  planes  in  which 
the  adverse  King  is  situated  at  Kt  2.  The  normal 
vulnerability  of  a  plane  of  this  class  is  42 ;  its  normal 
mobility  is  9. 


OBJECTIVE  PLANES. 

Class  E. 

FIG.  56. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
Vulnerability    .     .    42  Mobility    .     .    9 

SUMMARY. 

Sum  of  Verticals  and  Horizontals  ....  9 

Sum  of  Diagonals 9 

Sum  of  Obliques .     .  24 

Total 42 

Sum  of  Points  of  Movement 9 


88 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


CLASS  F  comprises  the  eight  objective  planes  in  which 
the  adverse  King  is  situated  at  K  B  2,  Q  B  2,  or  Kt  3. 
The  normal  vulnerability  of  a  plane  of  this  class  is  54 ; 
its  normal  mobility  is  9. 


OBJECTIVE  PLANES. 
Class  F. 

FIG.  57. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
Vulnerability     .     .     54  Mobility     .     .     9 

SUMMARY. 

Sum  of  Verticals  and  Horizontals  ....  9 

Sum  of  Diagonals    .........  12 

Sum  of  Obliques      .........  33 

Total   ...........  54 


Sum  of  Points  of  Movement 


9 


OBJECTIVE  PLANES. 


89 


CLASS  G  comprises  the  eight  objective  planes  in 
which  the  adverse  King  is  located  at  K  2,  Q  2,  Kt  4,  or 
Kt  5.  The  vulnerability  of  a  plane  of  this  class  is  58  ; 
its  normal  mobility  is  9. 


OBJECTIVE  PLANES. 
Class  G. 
FIG.  58. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
Vulnerability    .    .    58  Mobility    .    .    9 

SUMMARY. 

Sum  of  Verticals  and  Horizontals  ....  9 

Sum  of  Diagonals 11 

Sum  of  Obliques ^ 

Total 58 

Sum  of  Points  of  Movement 9 


90 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


CLASS  H  comprises  those  four  objective  planes  in 
which  the  adverse  King  is  located  at  B  3.  The  normal 
vulnerability  of  a  plane  of  this  class  is  71 ;  its  normal 
mobility  is  9. 


OBJECTIVE   PLANES. 
Class  H. 

FIG.  59. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
Vulnerability    .    .    71  Mobility    .    .    9 

SUMMARY. 

Sum  of  Verticals  and  Horizontals  ....  12 

Sum  of  Diagonals 16  "2-  Q 

Sum  of  Obliques 43 

Total 71   7  5 

Sum  of  Points  of  Movement      .  9 


OBJECTIVE  PLANES. 


91 


CLASS  I  comprises  those  eight  objective  planes  in 
which  the  adverse  King  is  located  at  K  3,  Q  3,  K  B  4, 
Q  B  4,  K  B  5,  Q  B  5,  K  6,  or  Q  6.  The  vulnerability  of 
a  plane  of  this  class  is  78 ;  its  normal  mobility  is  9. 


OBJECTIVE   PLANES. 
Class  I. 

FIG.  60. 

(Black.) 


f "' 

v 


§ 


(FMe.) 
Vulnerability    .    .    78  Mobility    .    .    9 

SUMMARY. 

Sum  of  Verticals  and  Horizontals  ....  12 

Sum  of  Diagonals 16 

Sum  of  Obliques 50 

Total 78    ' 

Sum  of  Points  of  Movement 


92 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


CLASS  J  comprises  those  four  objective  planes  in 
which  the  adverse  King  is  located  at  K  4,  Q  4,  K  5,  or 
Q  5.  The  vulnerability  of  a  plane  of  this  class  is  92 ; 
its  normal  mobility  is  9. 


OBJECTIVE  PLANES. 
Class  J. 

FIG.  61. 
(Black.) 


(While.) 

Vulnerability    .    .    92  Mobility    .    .  9 

SUMMARY. 

Sum  of  Verticals  and  Horizontals  ....  12 

Sum  of  Diagonals 16  7.  O 

Sum  of  Obliques 64 

Total 92    <- 


Sum  of  Points  of  Movement 


9 


STRATEGIC  FRONTS  OF  OPERATIONS. 

Those  dispositions  of  the  pawns,  which,  properly  sup- 
plemented by  the  pieces,  establish  a  given  determinate 
force  in  such  a  formation  that  it  properly  may  cover  the 
prime  strategetic  point  and  the  strategetic  rear,  main- 
tain the  integrity  of  the  strategetic  front  and  flanks, 
and  operate  in  the  minimum  of  time  with  the  maximum 
of  force  against  the  objective  plane,  are  termed  in  this 
theory,  Strategic  Fronts  of  Operations. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Always  establish  the  strategic  front  of  operations 
upon  the  strategetic  centre,  and  extend  it  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  objective  plane. 

Strategic  Fronts  of  Operations  are  of  two  kinds, 
viz. : — 

I.     SINGLE  FRONTS. 
II.     DOUBLE  FRONTS. 

A  single  front  of  operations  always  is  adopted  when 
the  objective  plane  is  located  on  the  centre  or  at  the 
extremity  of  the  strategic  front. 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


SINGLE  FRONT  OF  OPERATIONS. 
(By  the  Right.) 

FIG.  62. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


STRATEGIC  FRONTS  OF  OPERATIONS. 


95 


SINGLE  FRONT  OF  OPERATIONS. 
(By  the  Left.) 

FIG.  63. 

(Slack.) 


(White.) 


96 


THE    GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


A  double  front  of  operations  always  is  to  be  adopted 
whenever  the  objective  plane  is  located  otherwise  than 
on  the  centre  or  at  the  extremity  of  the  strategic  front. 


DOUBLE  FRONT  OF  OPERATIONS. 
(By  the  Right.) 

FIG.  64. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


STRATEGIC  FRONTS   OF  OPERATIONS. 


97 


DOUBLE  FRONT  OF  OPERATIONS. 
(By  the  Left.) 

FIG.  65. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 


98 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


Strategic  fronts  of  operations  are  divided  into  tRree 
classes : — 

I.    MINOR  STRATEGIC  FRONTS. 

II.    MAJOR  STRATEGIC  FRONTS. 

III.     GRAND  STRATEGIC  FRONTS. 

A  Minor  Strategic  Front  is  formed  by  a  salient ;  or 
by  the  union  of  a  salient  and  a  supporting  parallel ; 
or  by  the  union  of  two  salients  ;  or  by  the  union  of  two 
salients  and  a  supporting  parallel.  It  may  properly  be 
aligned,  doubly  aligned,  and  reinforced  by  the  minor 
crochet  and  by  the  crochet  aligned. 

MINOR  STRATEGIC  FRONT. 
(By  the  Right.) 

FIG.  66. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


STRATEGIC  FRONTS  OF  OPERATIONS. 


99 


A  Major  Strategic  Front  is  formed  by  the  extension 
of  the  salient  one  point  along  that  diagonal  upon  which 
the  minor  strategic  front  already  is  established.  It 
may  properly  be  aligned,  doubly  aligned,  and  reinforced 
by  the  minor  crochet,  the  major  crochet,  the  crochet 
aligned,  or  supplemented  by  the  formations  echelon, 
enceinte,  and  en  potence. 


MAJOR  STRATEGIC  FRONT. 
(By  the  Right.) 

FIG.  67. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 


100 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


A  Grand  Strategic  Front  is  formed  by  the  extension 
of  a  salient  two  points  along  that  diagonal  upon  which 
the  minor  strategic  front  already  is  established.  It 
may  properly  be  aligned  and  reinforced  by  the  minor 
crochet,  the  major  crochet,  the  crochet  aligned,  or  sup- 
plemented by  the  formations  echelon,  enceinte,  and 
en  potence. 


GRAND   STRATEGIC  FRONT. 
(By  the  Right.) 

FIG.  68. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


SUPPLEMENTARY   FORMATIONS. 

Minor  Crochet.  —  The  Minor  Crochet  is  formed  by 
deploying  the  K  R  P  or  the  Q  R  P  at  R  3. 

Its  use  is  to  sustain  the  strategic  front  against  an 
adverse  major  oblique  refused  en  echelon. 


MINOR  CROCHET. 
FIG.  69. 

(Black.) 


/////, 

i 


(White.) 


102 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


Major  Crochet.  —  The  Major  Crochet  is  formed  by 
posting  the  K  Kt  P  or  the  Q  Kt  P  at  Kt  4,  to  sustain  the 
double  front  of  operations  ;  or  to  cover  a  major  or  grand 
strategic  front,  by  preventing  the  alignment  of  an  adverse 
minor  strategic  front  refused. 


MAJOK   CROCHET. 
FIG.  70. 
(Black.) 


( White.) 


SUPPLEMENTARY  FORMATIONS, 


103 


En  Appui.  —  The  En  Appui  is  formed  by  posting  at 
R  3  that  Rook's  pawn  which  when  thus  posted  does  not 
constitute  the  minor  crochet. 

The  utility  of  this  formation  consists  in  the  support 
it  affords  for  establishing  the  echelon  by  P  —  Kt  4,  and 
in  permitting  the  K  to  occupy  R  2  in  the  fronts  directed 
by  the  right. 


EN  APPUI. 
FIG.  71. 
(Black.) 


(White.} 


104  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 

Aligned.  —  The  Front  Aligned,  or  the  single  Alignment, 
is  a  supplementary  formation  in  which  the  K  P  is  posted 
at  King's  fourth  in  the  minor  right  oblique,  and  the 
Q  P  at  Queen's  fourth  in  the  minor  left  oblique ;  the 
K  B  P  at  King's  Bishop's  fourth  in  the  minor  right 
oblique  refused,  and  the  Q  B  P  at  Queen's  Bishop's 
fourth  in  the  minor  left  oblique  refused ;  the  K  B  P  at 
King's  Bishop's  fifth  in  the  major  right  oblique,  and 
the  Q  B  P  at  Queen's  Bishop's  fifth  in  the  major  left 
oblique;  the  K  Kt  P  at  King's  Knight's  fifth  in  the 
major  right  oblique  refused,  and  the  Q  Kt  P  at  Queen's 
Knight's  fifth  in  the  major  left  oblique  refused ;  the 
K  Kt  P  at  King's  Knight's  sixth  in  the  grand  right 
oblique,  and  the  Q  Kt  P  at  Queen's  Knight's  sixth  in  the 
grand  left  oblique. 

The  utility  of  this  formation  lies  in  the  facilities  it 
affords  for  assuming  the  offensive  either  by  attack  or  by 
counter-attack,  and  for  establishing  the  major  front. 


SUPPLEMENTARY  FORMATIONS. 


105 


ALIGNED. 
FIG.  72. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


Double  Alignment.  —  The  Front  Doubly  Aligned  is  a 
supplementary  formation  in  which  the  K  P  and  K  B  P 
are  posted  at  their  fourths  in  the  minor  right  oblique  ; 
the  Q  P  and  Q  B  P  at  their  fourths  in  the  minor  left 
oblique ;  the  K  B  P  and  K  Kt  P  at  their  fourths  in  the 
minor  right  oblique  refused,  and  the  Q  B  and  Q  Kt  P 
at  their  fourths  in  the  minor  left  oblique  refused ;  the 
K  B  P  and  K  Kt  P  at  their  fifths  in  the  major  right 


106 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


oblique,  and  the  Q  B  P  and  K  Kt  P  at  their  fifths  in  the 
major  left  oblique. 

The  utility  of  this  formation  lies  in  the  facilities  it 
affords  for  the  deployment  of  the  forces  and  for  estab- 
lishing the  major  front. 


DOUBLY  ALIGNED. 
PIG.  73. 

(Black,) 


(White.) 


SUPPLEMENTARY  FORMATIONS. 


107 


Crochet  Aligned.  —  The  Crochet  Aligned  is  formed  by 
the  deployment  of  the  K  R  P  and  the  K  Kt  P,  or  of  the 
Q  R  P  and  the  Q  Kt  P,  at  their  fourth  squares.  This  for- 
mation belongs  exclusively  to  the  double  fronts  of  opera- 
tions, and  is  never  properly  combined  with  a  single 
front. 

Its  use  is  to  bring  into  action  the  refused  wing,  when 
a  change  in  the  direction  of  the  strategic  front  is  not 
feasible,  and  after  the  objective  plane  is  permanently 
located  at  a  point  which  neither  is  on  the  centre  nor  at 
the  extremity  of  the  already  established  strategic  front. 


CROCHET  ALIGNED. 
FIG.  74. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


108 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


Enceinte.  —  The  Enceinte  is  a  supplementary  forma- 
tion in  which  the  K  B  P  is  posted  at  King's  Bishop's 
fifth  and  the  K  Kt  F  at  King's  Knight's  fourth,  or  the 
Q  B  P  at  Queen's  Bishop's  fifth  and  the  Q  Kt  P  at 
Queen's  Knight's  fourth,  to  sustain  the  major  right 
oblique  or  the  major  left  oblique,  respectively ;  or  the 
Q  Kt  P  is  posted  at  Queen's  Knight's  fifth  and  the 
Q  R  P  at  Queen's  Rook's  fourth,  to  sustain  the  major 
left  oblique  refused. 


ENCEINTE. 
FIG.  75. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


SUPPLEMENTARY  FORMATIONS. 


109 


En  Potence.  —  The  formation  En  Potence  is  a  supple- 
mentary disposition  of  either  the  K  B  P  or  the  Q  B  P,  in 
which  one  or  the  other  of  them  is  posted  at  Bishop's 
fourth  for  the  purpose  of  supporting  the  vertex  point  of 
the  major  right  oblique  or  of  the  major  left  oblique, 
respectively  ;  or  of  the  K  Kt  P  or  the  Q  Kt  P,  in  which 
case  one  or  the  other  of  these  is  posted  at  Knight's  fifth 
for  the  purpose  of  supporting  the  vertex  point  of  the 
grand  right  oblique  or  of  the  grand  left  oblique,  re- 
spectively ;  or  of  the  K  Kt  P  or  the  Q  Kt  P,  in  which 
case  one  or  the  other  of  them  is  posted  at  Knight's 
fourth  for  the  purpose  of  supporting  the  vertex  point  of 
the  major  right  oblique  refused  or  of  the  major  left 
oblique  refused,  respectively. 

EN  POTENCE. 
FIG.  76. 

(Slack.) 


(White.) 


110 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


Echelon.  —  The  Echelon  is  a  supplementary  formation 
in  which  either  the  K  B  P  and  the  K  Kt  P,  or  the  Q  B  P 
and  the  Q  Kt  P,  are  posted  at  their  fourth  squares,  for 
the  purpose  of  supporting  and  sustaining  the  major 
right  oblique  or  the  major  left  oblique,  respectively. 


ECHELON. 

FIG.  77. 

(Slack.) 


(White.) 


SUPPLEMENTARY  FORMATIONS. 


Ill 


ECHELON  SUPPORTED  EN  APPUI. 
FIG.  78. 
(Black.) 


112 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


Fianchetto.  —  The  Fianchetto  is  a  supplementary  for- 
mation wherein  the  Q  Kt  P  is  posted  at  its  third  square, 
to  permit  of  the  deployment  of  the  Q  B  at  Q  Kt  2.  This 
formation  is  properly  established  only  in  the  left 
oblique  refused. 


THE  FIANCHETTO. 

White. 
FXG.  79. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


SUPPLEMENTARY  FORMATIONS. 


113 


THE  FIANCHETTO. 

Black. 

FIG.  80. 

(Black.) 


(White.-) 


LINES   OF  MOBILIZATION. 

Lines  of  Mobilization  are  divided  into  four  classes 
according  to  their  direction:  — 

I.  *  BY  THE  RIGHT. 
II.     BY  THE  LEFT. 

III.  BY  THE  RIGHT  REFUSED. 

IV.  BY  THE  LEFT  REFUSED. 

The  object  of  a  line  of  mobilization  always  is  to  estab- 
lish the  strategic  front  coincidently  with  the  strategetic 
centre. 

PRINCIPLE. 

No  line  of  mobilization  ever  should  be  adopted  until 
the  direction  of  the  line  of  development  has  been  deter- 
mined, for  the  line  of  mobilization  always  should  take 
the  direction  of,  and  always  be  coincident  with,  the 
line  of  development. 

A  line  of  mobilization  directed  by  the  Right  compre- 
hends those  primary  bases  described  in  "The  Minor 
Tactics  of  Chess  "  as  the  — 


OPB1  A. 
OPB1B. 


OPB1C. 
OPB2A. 
OPB2B. 
OPB2C. 
OPB3. 

It  also  opposes  to  the  adverse  force  that  strategic 
front  of  operations  described  in  u  Grand  Tactics  "  as  the 
Minor  Right  Oblique. 


LINES  OF  MOBILIZATION.  115 

A  line  of  mobilization  directed  by  the  Left  compre- 
hends all  those  primary  bases  reversed  which  are  de- 
scribed in  "  Minor  Tactics  "  as  the  — 


OPB1  A  (Reversed). 

OPB1B 

a 

OPB1C 

u 

OPB2A 

u 

OPB2B 

a   • 

OPB2C 

ic 

OPB3 

re 

It  also  opposes  to  the  adverse  force  that  strategic 
front  of  operations  described  in  "  Grand  Tactics  "  as  the 
Minor  Left  Oblique. 

A  line  of  mobilization  directed  by  the  Right  Refused 
comprehends  all  those  primary  bases  which  are  de- 
scribed in  "  Minor  Tactics  "  as  the  — 

OPB4A. 
OPB4B. 
OPB5A. 
O  P  B  5  B. 

It  also  opposes  to  the  adverse  force  that  strategic 
front  of  operations  described  in  u  Grand  Tactics  "  as  the 
Minor  Right  Oblique  Refused. 

A  line  of  mobilization  directed  by  the  Left  Refused 
comprehends  all  those  primary  bases  which  are  de- 
scribed in  "  Minor  Tactics  "  as  the  — 

CPB1. 
CPB2. 
CPB3A 
CPB3B. 

It  also  opposes  to  the  adverse  force  that  strategic 
front  of  operations  described  in  "  Grand  Tactics  "  as  the 
Minor  Left  Oblique  Refused. 


116  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


SYMBOLS  AND  ABBREVIATIONS. 

+  =  Plus. 
—  =  Minus. 

(underscored  line)  =  With. 

X  (prefix)  =  Eliminate. 

X  (suffix)  =  Being  eliminated. 

=  Occupy. 

<  =  Play  as  follows. 

O  =  Oblique. 

OR      =  Oblique  Refused. 
R  O      =  Right  Oblique. 
L  0       =  Left  Oblique. 
C  E       =  Centre  Enceinte. 
RE      =  Right  Enceinte. 
L  E       =  Left  Enceinte. 
A          =  Aligned. 
DA      =  Doubly  Aligned. 
J  =  Major  Crochet. 

K          =  Minor  Crochet. 
C  A      — .  Crochet  Aligned. 
F          =  Fianchetto. 
P          =  En  Potence. 
H          =  En  Echelon. 
W         =  En  Appui. 
U          =  Unit. 
O  P  B  =  Open  Primary  Base. 
C  P  B  =  Close  Primary  Base. 
0  P  C  =  Objective  Plane  Centre. 
O  P  R  =  Objective  Plane  Right. 
O  P  L  =  Objective  Plane  Left. 

M     =  Minor. 
,    M     =  Major. 

G     =  Grand. 


M     =  Mobilize. 


=  Manoeuvre. 
D        —  Develop. 


THE   MINOR  RIGHT   OBLIQUE. 

This  front  properly  is  adopted  only  when  the  objec- 
tive plane  is  located  on  the  centre  or  -on  the  King's 
wing. 

Explanation.  —  Formula  No.  1.  Given  the  minor  right 
oblique  with  the  objective  plane  located  on  the^  centre; 
then  play  as  follows  :  First  mobilize  your  pieces  into 
the  primary  base  0  P  B  2  B  (vide  "  Minor  Tactics,"  p. 
148),  but  without  the  Rook  Unit,  and  instead  of  the 
latter  play  K  R  -  K  1. 

Secondly,  manoeuvre  to  eliminate  the  black  Q  P  at  Q  3 
and  the  black  Kt  at  K  B  3. 

Thirdly,  if  the  black  P  at  Q  3  is  eliminated,  occupy 
K  5  with  your  Kt  ;  and  if  the  black  Kt  at  B  3  is  elimi- 
nated, occupy  I&R  5  with  your  Queen. 

FORMULA   No.  1. 
MRO 


M 


_    _ 
(OPB2B-RU)  +  KRK1. 

V/  X  B.  P  Q  3  +  B.  Kt  K  B~3. 
_  D  _ 
B.  PQ3  x.  •.  K5Kt 
B.  KtKBS  X  .-.KR5Q. 


118 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FIG.  81. 


MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 

(Black.)  (Q.  P.  C.) 


( White.') 

MAXIM.  —  In  this  situation  White  often  can  advantageously  sacrifice  the 
K  B  for  the  black  K  B  P,  checking,  and  thus  permanently  locate  the  ob- 
jective plane  on  the  centre.  Also,  the  development  of  the  white  Q  B  at 
K  Kt  5,  followed  by  B  —  R  4  or  B  X  Kt,  is  frequently  valid,  as  likewise  is 
Kt  -  K  Kt  5. 

In  case  the  white  K  B  is  dislodged  from  the  post  Q  B  4,  it  should  re- 
tire to  Q  Kt  3,  after  which  White  should  establish  the  major  front  by 
Kt  —  K  5.  In  all  cases  wherein  the  black  Kt  at  K  B  3  is  eliminated,  the 
white  Q  should  develop  at  White's  K  R  5. 


NOTE.  —  The  symbol  B.  signifies  "  Black,"  and  the  symbol  W.  signifies 
"  White/' 


>.  82. 


THE  MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 

FORMULA   No.  2. 

MRQ 
OPR< 

M 

(OPB2A-RU)+KRK1. 
\/  X  B.  P  Q  3  +  B.  Kt  K  B  3. 

p _ 

B.  P  Q  3  x  .-.  K  5  Kt 

B.  Kt  K  B  3  x  .'.  K  R  5  Q. 


119 


MINOR   RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 

(Black.) 


(0.  P.  R.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  White  must  not  permit  the  black  Kt  to  become  established  at 
Black's  K  5  after  the  advance  of  the  black  Q  P  to  Q  4,  nor  the  black  K  R 
to  exchange  for  the  white  K  R,  unless  the  latter  can  be  at  once  replaced 
by  the  white  Q  R,  as  the  control  of  the  open  K  file  is  all  important  when- 
ever this  front  is  adopted.  The  white  K  B,  dislodged  from  Q  B  4,  should 
retire  to  Q  3,  and  not  to  Kt  3. 


120 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS, 


FORMULA   No.  3. 

MROA 
OPC+OPR 

M 

O  P  B  1  A. 
V/DA. 

D 
.*.  K  B  4  P. 


MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED. 
PIG.  83.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  this  situation  the  only  correct  course  is  to  doubly  align 
the  minor  front.  To  establish  the  major  front  by  the  right  would  be  a 
strategic  error,  as  after  P  —  K  5  Black  plays  P  X  P,  and  on  the  white 
Q  P  retaking,  an  interval  is  created  on  White's  centre. 


THE  MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


121 


FORMULA  No.  4. 

MR  PDA 
O  P  C  +  O  P  R< 

M 
OPB1  A. 


MR  OP 
"OPR. 

D 
.-.K5P. 


MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  DOUBLY  ALIGNED. 
FIG.  84.  (Black.) 


MAXIM. —  All  else  being  equal,  this  formation  once  established  ensures 
such  an  advantage  in  mobility,  i.  e.  it  gives  such  facilities  for  developing 
and  manreuvring,  that  with  the  best  play  on  both  sides  the  opponent 
must  lose. 


122 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  5. 

M  R  O  K 
OPC  +  OPJE^ 

M 

(OPB2A-RU)  +  KRK1. 

V  X  B.  Kt  K  B  3. 

D 

.-.  K  5  Kt  +  K  Kt  5  B 
B.  Kt  K  B  3  x  /.  K  R  5  Q. 

MINOR   RIGHT  OBLIQUE   WITH  MINOR  CROCHET. 
FIG.  85.  (Slack.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  All  else  being  equal,  the  minor  crochet  will  defend  the  re- 
fused wing  against  an  adverse  echeloned  major  front.  The  R  P  should 
always  be  exchanged  for  the  adverse  Q  Kt  P  when  the  latter  is  advanced 
to  Q  Kt  5.  The  motif  of  the  minor  crochet  is  to  destroy  a  portion  of  the 
adverse  force  which  is  thus  advancing  to  the  attack  of  the  strategetic  rear, 
with  the  object  of  occupying  one  or  more  points  on  its  logistic  horizon, 
and  thus  uniting  itself  with  its  kindred  hypothetical  force. 


THE  MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


123 


FORMULA   No.  6. 

MROAK 
O  P  C  +  O  P  R 

M 
O  P  B  2  A. 

/  X  B.  Kt  KB  3. 


.'.KKt5B  +  KB4P 
B.  KtKB3  x  .\ER5Q. 

MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  WITH  MINOR 
CROCHET. 


FIG.  86. 


(Black.) 


&  • 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  White  must,  not  permit  the  black  Kt  to  establish  itself  at 
Q  4,  as  it  would  do  if  White  now  proceeded  to  form  the  major  front 
by  P-K5. 

All  else  being  equal,  the  development  in  the  text  will  give  White  the 
superior  game. 


124 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  7. 
M  R  O  D  A  K 


OPC 


M 


OPB1A. 

V/xB.KtKB3. 
_  D  _ 
.'.K5P 
B.  KtKB3  x  /.KB  5  P. 

MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  DOUBLY  ALIGNED  WITH 
MINOR  CROCHET. 

FIG.  87. 


(White.-) 

MAXIM.  —  In  this  situation  White  has  nothing  to  fear  from  the  posting 
of  the  black  Kt  at  Q  4  after  White's  advance  of  P  —  K  5,  as  after  the 
alignment  of  his  major  front  by  P  —  B  5,  White  threatens  to  occupy  the 
strategetic  objective  by  P  —  K  B  6. 


THE  MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


125 


FORMULA   No.  8. 

MROJ 

OPL   < 
M 


(O  P  B  2  A  -  R,  Q,  Kt  U)  +  K  R  K  1  +  Q  Kt  Q  B  5. 
V/  X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 

P 
. \QR6RP. 


MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE   WITH  MAJOR   CROCHET. 
FIG.  88.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  double  front  cooperations  having  been  established,  the 
only  resource  left  to  the  opponent  is  to  throw  his  whole  force  by  the  right 
against  the  white  K. 

For  this  reason,  White  must  never  invalidate  his  formation  by  the  right, 
as  he  must  rely  on  it  for  the  integrity  of  his  prime  strategetic  point.  The 
advantage  in  mobility  that  Black  already  possesses  on  the  right,  will  be 
much  intensified  should  White,  by  changing  his  front  to  the  left  oblique, 
thus  locate  his  king  on  his  refused  wing. 


126 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  9. 

MRQAJ 
GPL 
M 


(O  P  B  2  A  -  R,  Q,  Kt,  U)  +  Q  Kt  Q  B  5. 

V/  X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 
D 


/.QR6RP. 

MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  WITH  MAJOR 
CROCHET. 


FIG.  89. 


(Black.) 


m  mm. 

4  Hi 


(TFMe.) 

MAXIM.  —  White  must  never  advance  the  Q  Kt  P  to  Q  Kt  5,  attacking 
the  black  Q  Kt  in  this  double  front.  Black  would  retire  Kt  —  Kt  1,  and 
either  exchange  or  compel  the  retreat  of  the  white  Kt  at  Q  B  5,  where- 
upon the  strategic  value  of  White's  position  is  greatly  depreciated. 

White  would  commit  a  strategic  error  if,  in  this  situation,  he  were  to 
establish  the  major  left  oblique  by  P  —  Q  5,  as  his  prime  strategetic  point 
would  then  become  posted  on  the  refused  wing. 


THE  MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


127 


FORMULA   No.  10. 

MRQDAJ 
OPL 
M. 


(O  P  B  1  A  -  R,  Q,  Kt,  U)  +  Q  Kt  Q  B  5. 

V  X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 

D 


.'.QR6RP. 


MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE   DOUBLY  ALIGNED   WITH 
MAJOR  CROCHET. 


FIG.  90. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM. —  It  would  be  a  strategic  error  for  White  to  establish  the 
major  right  oblique  by  P  —  K  5,  as  he  would  be  extending  his  strategic 
front  not  in  the  direction  of  the  objective  plane. 


128 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  11. 

MRQCA 
OPL     < 
M 


(O  P  B  2  A  -  Kt,  R,  Q,  U)  +  K  R  K  1  +  Q  Kt  Q  B  5. 
V/XB.  QKtP. 

D 
.  '.QR6RP. 


MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE   WITH  CROCHET  ALIGNED. 
FIG.  91.  (Black.) 


MAXIM.  —  White  has  also  a  secondary  line  of  attack,  resulting  from 
the  occupying  of  K  5  with  the  K  Kt,  or  of  K  6,  K  7,  or  K  8  by  the  K  R, 
at  the  proper  time,  which  always  can  be  accurately  calculated,  as  all  of 
these  moves,  when  valid,  will  be  part  of  a  line  of  operations. 


THE  MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


129 


FORMULA   No.  12. 

MROACA 
OPL 
M 


(O  P  B  2  A  -  Kt,  R,  Q,  U)  +  Q  Kt  Q  B  5. 
V/  X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 

D 
.'.QR6RP. 

MINIOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  WITH  CROCHET 
ALIGNED. 


FIG.  92. 


(Black.) 


MAXIM.  —  Should  Black  capture  the  white  Kt  at  Q  B  5,  the  capturing 
piece  must,  of  course,  be  taken  with  the  white  Q  Kt  P. 

But  afterwards  White  should  not  by  P  —  Q  5  change  his  front  by  the 
right,  to  the  major  left  oblique  aligned,  as  that  would  be  a  strategic 
error,  whereby  his  king  would  become  improperly  posted  on  the  refused 
wing. 

White's  correct  course  is  to  take  possession  of  the  open  file  thus  created, 
and  mass  against  the  objective  plane  by  Q  —  Q  Kt  3  followed  by  K  R  — 
QKtl. 


130 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  13. 

MRODACA 
OPL 
M 


(O  P  B  1  A  -  Kt,  R,  Q,  U)  +  Q  Kt  Q  B  5. 
y/xB.QKtP. 

D 
/.QR6RP. 

MINOE  EIGHT  OBLIQUE   DOUBLY  ALIGNED   WITH 
CEOCHET  ALIGNED. 


PIG.  93. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  Black's  game  is  hopeless.  White  has  the  advantage  in 
position  on  both  wings,  which  latter  are  connected  by  an  impregnable 
centre. 

With  this  formation  White  never  should  develop  either  by  the  right  or 
by  the  left,  but  should  win  by  means  of  his  supplementary  formation  the 
crochet  aligned,  in  co-operation  with  his  reserve  pieces. 


MINOR  CENTRE  ENCEINTE. 


This  front  properly  is  adopted  whatever  the  location 
of  the  objective  plane. 


132 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FIG.  94. 


FORMULA   No.  14. 

MCE 

OPC< 

M 

(OPB3-R,Q,U). 

MINOR   CENTRE  ENCEINTE. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  is  the  position  of  grand  tenace  at  chess.  From  it  the 
permanent  location  of  the  objective  plane  should  be  calculated,  and  the 
proper  major  front  projected. 

In  all  cases  wherein  the  permanent  location  of  the  objective  plane  cannot 
be  calculated,  that  line  of  development  should  be  selected  which  at  the  given 
time  seems  most  in  accord  with  strategic  principle,  with  the  resource  con- 
stantly kept  in  hand  of  adopting  a  double  line  of  operations  and  estab- 
lishing the  crochet  aligned. 


MINOR   CENTRE  ENCEINTE. 


133 


FORMULA   No.  15. 

MCE 

OPR"^ 

M 

(OPB3-R,Q,U). 

Y/.-.MRO. 
D 


FIG.  95. 


MINOR  CENTRE   ENCEINTE. 

(Black.) 


B 


§. 

/////. 


m 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  White  would  commit  a  strategic  error  in  attempting  to 
establish  the  major  front  by  the  right  previous  to  castling  K  R,  on  ac- 
count of  white's  K  R  4  being  open  to  occupation  by  the  black  Q. 


134 


THE  GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  16. 

MCE 
OPL< 
M 


(O  P  B  1  A,  reversed,  -  R,  Q,  U). 

Y/.'.MLO. 

D 

/ .  Q  B  4  P,  Q  B  3  Kt,  K2QQKtlKQBlR. 


FIG.  96. 


MINOR  CENTRE  ENCEINTE. 

(Black.) 


( White.) 

MAXIM.  —  White  could  also  castle  K  R  and  establish  the  M  R  O  D  A  J 
in  this  situation.  But  this  would  be  inferior,  as  the  prime  strategetic  front 
is  more  exposed,  and  defended  with  greater  difficulty,  in  a  double  front  of 
operations  than  in  a  single  front. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 

This  front  properly  is  adopted  only  when  the  objec- 
tive plane  is  located  on  the  Queen's  wing. 


136 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  17. 

MLO 
OPL< 
M 


(O  P  B  2  A,  reversed,  -  R,  Q,  U)  +  Q  R  Q  1. 


.-.  Q  5  Kt,  QKt  5  B,  Q  3  Q  R,  Q  1  K  R,  K  2  Q. 


FIG.  97. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 

(mack.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM. — This  situation  is  decidedly  more  to  White's  advantage  than 
when  the  objective  plane  is  located  on  the  right.  It  requires  more  time 
for  Black  to  perfect  his  line  of  defence,  owing  to  the  fact  that  his  Q  is 
exposed  to  the  attack  of  the  white  Q  R,  and  does  not  naturally  defend  the 
black  Kt  at  Q  B  3.  The  point  Q  5  is  usually  open  to  immediate  occupa- 
tion by  the  white  Q  Kt,  and  the  black  Q  R  P  is  undefended. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


137 


FIG.  98. 


FORMULA    No.  18. 

MLOA 
OPL  < 

M 

OPB  2  A,  reversed. 
V/  X  B.  Kt  Q  B  3. 

D 

.-.Q5P 

B.Ktx  .-.QKtSKt. 

MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED. 

(Black.). 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  Black  is  lost.  In  most  cases  it  will  be  found  that  White  can 
properly  sacrifice  a  piece  in  order  to  so  expose  the  objective  plane  that  it 
may  be  readily  and  decisively  attacked.  • 

It  will  be  observed  that  Black  has  no  offensive  resources,  as  the  entire 
White  force  interposes  between  him  and  its  prime  strategetic  point. 


138 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


FORMULA  No.  19. 

M  L  O  D  A 

OPL 
_  M  _ 

O  P  B  1  A,  reversed. 


.•.,M 
V       IQPL 

X  B.  Kt  Q  B  3. 
_  D  _ 
.-.  Q5P 
B.  Kt  X  .-.  QB5P. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE   DOUBLY  ALIGNED. 

FIG.  99.  (Black.} 


(White.} 


MAXIM.  —  White  wins  easily  in  this  situation.  It  is  of  no  consequence 
that  the  black  Kt  may  occupy  Q  4,  and  from  thence  exchange  for  the  white 
K  B,  for  White's  superiority  in  force  and  position  is  so  sufficient  that  noth- 
ing can  prevent  his  ultimate  command  of  the  objective  plane. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 

FORMULA   No.  20. 

MLOK 
OPL    * 
M 


139 


(O  P  B  2  A,  reversed,  -  R,  Q,  U)  +  Q  K  Q  1. 


v/ 


.  -.  iMLQ 
OPL. 
D 


.-.  Q  5  Kt,  Q  Kt  5  B,  Q  3  %  Q  1  QR. 

MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  WITH  MINOR  CROCHET. 

FIG.  100.  (Black.) 


(White.-) 

MAXIM. — In  the  formations  which  include  the  minor  crochet,  it  will 
he  observed  that  the  B  is  invariably  retired  to  B  2.  It  must  ^  never  be 
posted  at  Kt  1 ,  even  though  the  R's  are  deployed,  as  it  is  essential  to  the 
safety  of  the  refused  wing  that  no  adverse  piece,  especially  if  the  latter 
is  a  Kt,  be  permitted  to  occupy  the  point  R  5. 


140 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  21. 

M  L  O  A  K 
OPL 
M 

O  P  B  2  A,  reversed. 


.-.Q5P 

B.KtQBSx. \QKt5Kt. 

MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  WITH  MINOR  CROCHET. 
FIG.  101.  (Black.) 


(White.) 


MAXIM.  —  In  all  fronts  directed  by  the  left,  and  wherein  the  objective 
plane  is  the  result  of  Black's  castling  Q  R,  if  the  latter  attempts  to  sup- 
port the  black  Kt  at  Q  B  3  with  the  Q,  the  white  K  B  can  usually  be  de- 
veloped at  Q  Kt  5  with  advantage,  especially  after  the  white  Q  Kt  has 
occupied  the  point  white  Q  5,  for  then  the  latter  piece  in  many  cases  may 
be  posted  at  Q  Kt  4,  and  the  disintegration  of  the  pawns  on  Black's  Queen  s 
side  ensured. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


141 


FORMULA   No.  22. 
M  L  Q  D  A  K 
OPL 

M 

O  P  B  1  A,  reversed. 


OPL 

X  B.  Kt  Q  B  3. 
D 


.-.Q5P 

B.KtQB3x  .-.  QB5P. 

MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  DOUBLY  ALIGNED  WITH 
MINOR  CROCHET. 

FIG.  102.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXTM.  —  It  seems  worthy  of  remark  in  regard  to  this  position,  that 
under  the  most  favorable  circumstances,  and  even  should  Black  break 
through  the  white  minor  crochet,  still  Black's  game  is  hopeless,  for  the 
white  R's  are  not  required  in  the  attack  of  the  objective  plane,  and  may 
both  be  sacrificed  to  prevent  the  queening  of  one  or  more  black  pawns, 
the  white  force  in  the  interim  having  acquired  a  decisive  advantage  over 
the  adverse  king. 


142 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  23. 


(O  P  B  2  A,  reversed,  —  Kt,  R,  U)  +  Q  R  Q  1  +  K  Kt  K  B  5. 

V/><B.KKtP. 

D 

VQRGP. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE   WITH  MAJOR  CROCHET. 
FIG.  103.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  — In  all  double  fronts  the  presence  of  the  white  R  P  at  R  5  is 
a  serious  matter  to  Black.  Whether  the  pawn  proceeds  at  once  to  R  6 
and  forces  the  black  Kt  P  to  Kt  3,  or  whether  this  is  delayed  and  subordi- 
nated to  the  action  of  the  other  white  pieces,  is  immaterial,  and  is  always 
determined  by  the  conditions  which  actually  exist. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


143 


FORMULA    No.  24. 

MLQAJ 
OPR 
M 


(O  P  B  2  A,  reversed,  -  R  U)  +  K  Kt  K  B  5. 
V/  X  B.  K  KtP. 

D 
.;.QR6RP. 

MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  WITH  MAJOR  CROCHET. 

FIG.  104.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  Whenever,  in  the  double  front,  Black's  attack  ^  against  the 
white  K  becomes  too  powerful  for  the  force  defending,  the  white  Q  R  must 
be  played  to  Kt  1,  and  the  KKt  retired  to  Q  1 ;  while  the  white  K,  if 
necessary,  may  retreat  via  B  1  and  Q  2.  But  this  manoeuvre  is  seldom 
advisable,  except  when  the  checkmate  of  the  black  king  can  be  forecasted, 
as  it  is  only  a  temporary  expedient.  If  the  command  of  the  objective 
plane  cannot  be  calculated,  and  Black's  attack  is  more  immediate,  it  is  best 
to  rest  on  the  crochet  aligned  and  counter  attack  on  the  other  side  of  th^f 
board,  and  in  defence  of  the  white  K. 

Black  will  not  be  able  to  develop  offensive  measures  of  such  strength 
except  through  errors  on  the  part  of  White. 


144 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  25. 

M  L  Q  D  A  J 
OPR 
M 


(O  P  B  1  A,  reversed,  —  Kt,  R,  U)  +  K  Kt  K  B  5. 
V/xB.KKtP. 

D 
.-.QR6RP. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE   DOUBLY  ALIGNED  WITH 
MAJOR  CROCHET. 


FIG.  105. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  the  double  front  doubly  aligned  White  is  practically  im- 
pervious to  attack,  and  may  proceed  against  the  objective  plane  with 
entire  security. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


145 


FORMULA   No.  26. 


MLQCA 
OPR 
M 


(O  P  B  2  A,  reversed,  —  Kt,  R,  U)  +  Q  R  Q  1  +  K  Kt  K  B  5. 
VxB.QKtP. 

D 
.-.  Q  R  6  R  P. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE   WITH  CROCHET  ALIGNED. 

FIG.  106.  (Black.) 


( White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  all  double  fronts,  wherein  Black  plays  Kt  P  —  Kt  3,  and 
attacks  the  Kt  at  the  angle  of  the  salient  and  the  major  crochet,  it  de- 
pends upon  the  situation  entirely  as  to  whether  the  Kt  be  sacrificed  or 
not.  As  a  rule,  this  manoeuvre  will  be  fatal  to  Black. 


146 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  27. 

MLOACA 
OPR 
M 


(O  P  B  2  A,  reversed,  -  Kt,  R,  U)  +  K  Kt  K  B  5. 

V/xB.QKtP. 

D 


.-.QR6RP. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  WITH  CROCHET 
ALIGNED. 


FIG.  107. 


(Black.) 


™ 

— 

?»•%!        7\        %2> 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  It  must  never  be  lost  sight  of  that  in  the  double  front  a 
prime  object  is  to  create  an  open  file,  either  the  Kt's  or  the  R's,  whereby 
the  white  Q  and  white  R's  may  be  brought  into  action  against  the  objec- 
tive plane. 

After  the  R  P  has  reached  R  5  it  will  be  found  impossible  for  Black 
to  prevent  the  creation  of  this  open  file. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


147 


FORMULA   No.  28. 

M  L  O  D  A  C  A 
OPR 
M 


(O  P  B  1  A,  reversed,  —  Kt,  R,  U)  +  K  Kt  K  B  5. 
V/xB.QKtP. 

D 
.-.  Q  R  6  RP. 

MINOR   LEFT  OBLIQUE  DOUBLY  ALIGNED  WITH 
CROCHET  ALIGNED. 


FIG.  108. 


(Black.) 


MAXIM.  —  The  defensive  resources  of  this  position  are  surprising. 
White  has  not  a  piece  nor  a  pawn  which  is  not  supported  ;  but  one  point 
on  White's  side  (QKt4)  can  be  occupied  by  an  adverse  piece,  and  the 
white  pieces  command  42  out  of  the  total  64  squares  of  the  chess-board. 


MINOR   LEFT   OBLIQUE   REFUSED. 


This   front  may  be  adopted  either  by   White  or  by 
Black,  or  by  both. 

MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE   REFUSED. 

FIG.  109. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 


149 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 
FIG.  110. 

(Black.) 


mm       HM 

•  i 

'///////////, 


Y/s  % 


(WAtte.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  front  is  far  inferior  to  either  the  right  oblique  or  the 
left  oblique.  It  does  not  take  the  direction  of  the  objective  plane,  it  is 
not  established  on  the  strategetic  centre,  and  it  compels  the  prime  strate- 
getic  point  to  become  permanently  located  on  the  refused  wing. 


150 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  29. 

MLQRF 
OPC,OPL,OPR< 

M 

(CPBl-Kt,R,U). 
LOR. 


D 


.-.  Q  1  K  R,  QB4P,QB3Kt,QBl  QR. 

MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED  EN  FIANCHETTO. 

FIG.  ill. 
.    White. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 


151 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED  EN  FIANCHETTO. 

Black. 
FIG.  112.  (Black.) 


(White.) 


MAXIM.  —  This  formation  frequently  is  much  preferable  to  aligning 
the  front,  on  account  of  its  preventing  Black  from  exchanging  the  Q  P 
and  Q  B  P  until  such  time  as  White  may  profit  by  such  manoeuvre.  The 
fianchetto  should  be  adopted  only  when  the  range  of  the  B  takes,  the 
direction  of  the  objective  plane. 


152  THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED  AND  ALIGNED. 

FIG.  113. 

White. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 


153 


FORMULA   No.  30. 
MLORA 


OPC,  OPL,OPR 
M 


(C  PB  1  —  B,  R,  Q,  U  and  2nd  aux.  salient). 
\l .-.  M  L  E  R. 

D 

.-.  QKt3P,QKt2B,QBlQR,Q2Q,  Q  1  K  R. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE   REFUSED  AND  ALIGNED. 

Black. 
FIG.  114.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  aligned  front  is  much  less  valuable  to  White  as  an 
offensive  formation  than  it  is  to  Black  as  a  defensive  measure. 

In  the  latter  case  it  is  of  great  utility,  and  one  of  the  strongest  minor 
fronts  at  Black's  disposal.  • 


154 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  31. 
MLER 


OPC,OPR,OPL 

M 
CPB1. 


LORH. 


D 


/.QB5P,QKt4P1QR4P. 

MINOR  LEFT  ENCEINTE  REFUSED. 

White. 
FIG.  115.  (Black.) 


( White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  front  is  much  inferior  to  the  right  and  left  obliques,  on 
account  of  the  fact  that  it  is  not  coincident  with  the  strategetic  centre. 

Black  should  oppose  it  with  the  0  P  B  2  A,  and  direct  his  whole  attack 
by  the  right  against  the  objective  plane. 


MINOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 

FORMULA    No.  32. 
MLER 


OPC,  OPL,  OPR 

M 
CPB1. 


y/  /.  ,M  L  O 
!    D 


RH. 


.-.QB5P,QKt4P1QR4P. 

MINOR  LEFT  ENCEINTE   REFUSED. 

Black. 
FIG.  116.  (Black.) 


155 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  The  C  P  B  1  belongs  equally  to  Black  and  to  White,  but  the 
former  never  can  safely  adopt  it  if  White  initiates  it ;  neither  can  he 
safely  adopt  it  against  the  minor  right  oblique  initiated  by  White.  On 
the  other  hand,  it  is  the  most  effective  mobilization  against  the  major 
right  oblique  when  prematurely  established  by  White. 


MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 


This  front  properly  is  adopted  only  by  Black,  and  by 
him  only  when  the  objective  plane  is  located  on  the 
King's  wing. 


MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 


157 


FORMULA   No.  33. 

MROR 
OPC,  OPR. 

M 
O  P  B  5  A. 


FIG.  117. 


V  •'.  O  P  B  4  A. 

D 

•    .-.KKt5Kt,  KB4P. 

MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE   REFUSED. 

(Black.) 


i        i  _ 

^  wm  A  us      i 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  this  situation  it  often  is  extremely  good  play  for  Black 
to  manoeuvre  K  Kt  —  Kt  5. 

If  White  at  once  replies  with  P  —  K  R  3,  it  may  create  a  weakness 
from  which  he  will  suffer  throughout  the  game.  Otherwise  Black  may 
follow  with  P  —  K  B  4,  securing  the  desired  position. 


158 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  34. 

MRORA 
O  P  C,  O  P  R^ 

M 
OPB4A. 

.-.OPB1A 
X  W.  Kt  K  B  3. 
D 


v/' 


.-.K5P    * 

W.  Kt  K  B  3  x  .-.  Q  4  P,  K  2  Q  Kt,  Q  B  8  R 

MINOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED  AND  ALIGNED. 

FIG.  118.  (Black.) 


( White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  powerful  position  belongs  to  Black.  It  is  the  strongest 
formation  possible  for  him  to  attain,  with  correct  play  by  White.  It 
should  be  the  model  for  the  second  player  in  all  games  which  open  with 
1  P  -  K  4. 

There  is  no  reason  why  Black  should  lose,  after  he  has  once  perfected 
this  line  of  mobilization. 


LINES  OF  DEVELOPMENT. 

Lines  of  Development  are  divided  into  eight  classes 
according  to  their  direction  :  — 

I.  MAJOR  FRONT  BY  THE  RIGHT. 

II.  MAJOR  FRONT  BY  THE  LEFT. 

III.  MAJOR  FRONT  BY  THE  RIGHT  REFUSED. 

IV.  MAJOR  FRONT  BY  THE  LEFT  REFUSED. 
V.  GRAND  FRONT  BY  THE  RIGHT. 

VI.     GRAND  FRONT  BY  THE  LEFT. 
VII.     GRAND  FRONT  BY  THE  RIGHT  REFUSED. 
VIII.     GRAND  FRONT  BY  THE  LEFT  REFUSED. 

The  object  of  a  line  of  development  always  is  to 
take  possession  of  the  strategetic  objective. 

PRINCIPLE. 

A  line  of  development  should  always  take  the  direc- 
tion of  the  objective  plane. 

Whenever  the  line  of  development  does  not  take  the 
direction  of  the  objective  plane,  the  strategic  front  of 
operations  always  should  be  reinforced  by  the  crochet 
aligned. 


MAJOR  RIGHT   OBLIQUE. 

The  objective  plane  being  located  on  the  King's  wing, 
this  front,  properly  constructed,  gives  the  advantage 
in  position  as  compared  with  any  adverse  minor  or 
major  front  of  operations. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


161 


FIG.  119. 


FORMULA   No.  35. 

MRO 
"^OPCjOPR^ 

M 

(OPB2A  +  PK5). 

D 

.-.  K  Kt  5  Kt,  K  B  4  P,  K  B  5  P. 

MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 

(Black.) 


(While.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  all  single  major  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  the  object 
of  White  is  to  occupy  the  point  white  K  B  6  with  a  piece  or  a  pawn,  and 
if  the  latter,  then  preferably  with  the  K  B  P.  All  else  being  equal,  this 
manoeuvre,  if  successful,  will  give  White  a  winning  superiority  in 
position. 


162 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  36. 

MROA 
OPC,OPR. 
M 


(OPB1A  +  PK5  +  PKB5). 

V/  /.  G  R  0. 
D 


.-.  K  B  6  P. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED. 
FIG.  120.  (Slack.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  When  the  opportunity  is  presented  to  occupy  the  strategetic 
objective  .on  a  single  front,  it  must  be  remembered  that  mere  occupation  is 
not  enough,  but  that  the  piece  or  pawn  must  be  established  on  K  B  6. 
Thus,  if  the  latter  point  is  supported,  White  usually  should  so  manoeuvre 
as  not  to  be  compelled  to  retake  adverse  pieces  with  the  white  K  P. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


163 


FORMULA   No.  37. 

MROP 
•  OPC,OPR< 
M 


Y/.-.MROA. 

D      • 
.-.KB5P. 


MAJOE  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE. 

PIG.  121.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  this  situation  White  secures  a  winning  position  by 
I*  —  K  B  5.  As  a  rule,  Black  can  prevent  this  only  by  the  deployment 
K  B  P  —  B  4,  in  which  case  White  should  take  with  the  K  P  en  passant, 
followed  by  P  -  K  B  5  and  K  Kt  -  K  5. 


164 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 
FORMULA   No.  38. 
MROK 


O  P  C,  O  P  R 
M 


(OPB2A  +  PK5  +  PQR3). 
V/.'.GRCX 

D 

.-.  K  Kt  5  Kt,  K  B  4  P,  K  B  5  P,  K  B  6  P. 

MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  WITH  MINOR  CROCHET. 
FIG.  122.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  this  and  similar  situations  Black's  attack  is  not  decisive 
except  through  an  error  on  the  part  of  White.  The  latter  should  attack 
the  objective  plane  with  the  utmost  vigor ;  exchange  the  Q  R  P  for  the 
Q  Kt  P  when  advanced,  in  order  to  reduce  the  promotion  value  of  the 
black  force.  Usually  White  will  win,  from  the  fact  that  his  front  is 
directed  against  the  objective  plane,  while  Black's  is  not. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


165 


FORMULA   No.  39. 

MROAK 
"I"OPC,OPR< 
M 


(OPB1A  +  PK5  +  PKB5  +  PQR3). 

Y/.-.G.R.O. 
p 

.-.KB  6  P. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE   ALIGNED  WITH  MINOR 
CROCHET. 


FIG.  123. 


(Slack.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  is  the  model  for  attack  in  all  situations  wherein  the 
adverse  king  is  located  on  the  refused  wing.  It  particularly  shows  the 
line  of  counter-attack  which  Black  should  always  adopt  whenever  White 
initiates  the  left  oblique  refused. 


166 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  40. 

MRQPK 
O  P  C,  O  P  R< 

M 

(OPB1A  +  PK5  +  PQR3). 

\/.-.GRO. 

D 


.-.KB5P,  KB  6  P. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE   WITH  MINOR 
CROCHET. 


FIG.  124. 


(Black.) 


(White.') 

MAXIM.  —  After  the  establishment  of  the  front  aligned  by  P  —  K  B  5, 
White  usually  can,  with  great  advantage,  manreuvre  the  K  Kt  —  Kt  5  be- 
fore playing  P  —  KB  6.  At  the  same  time  it  frequently  happens  that  the 
immediate  advance  by  P  —  K  B  6  is  preferable,  retaking  with  the  K  P,  and 
then  posting  the  K  Kt  at  K  5. 

In  all  cases  wherein  other  things  are  equal,  this  is  a  winning  position 
for  White,  as  Black  is  enormously  outflanked  on  the  right,  and  will  be 
found  utterly  unable  to  defend  his  prime  strategetic  point  against  the 
white  force  thus  massed  against  the  objective  plane. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


167 


FORMULA   No.  41. 

M  E  O  A  W 
O  P  C,  O  P  E 
M 


(OPB1A  +  PKB5  +  P-KR3), 

V/GRO. 

D 


.-.  KKt4P,KKt5P. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI. 

FIG.  125.  (Slack.) 


(White.-) 

MAXIM. — The  formation  en  appui  is  chiefly  directed  against  those 
positions  in  which  Black  has  occupied  the  strategetic  ohjective  with  his 
K  B  P  strongly  supported.  The  object  of  White  is  to  break  up  this  posi- 
tion by  exchanging  his  K  Kt  P  for  the  adverse  K  B  P,  and  then  to  occupy 
the  open  K  Kt  file  with  his  K  R. 


168 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  42. 

M  R  Q  D  A  W  ^ 

OPC^OPR^ 

M 


(OPB1A  +  PKB5,  PKKto,PKR3  +  KRKKtl 
+  QRKB1  +  KR2). 

y/.-.  open  KKt  file  KR. 

D 

.-.KBGKKtP. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE   DOUBLY  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI. 
FIG.  126.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  — The  white  KKtP  should  exchange  for  the  black  K  BP. 
There  are  no  cases  in  which  the  K  Kt  P  should  advance  to  K  Kt  6. 

The  motif  of.  this  situation  is  to  permit  of  the  white  Q  and  R  attacking 
the  objective  plain  via  the  open  K  Kt  file. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


169 


FORMULA  No.  43. 

M  R  O  P  W 
+OPC,OPR< 

\ M 

(OBP1A  +  PK5  +  PKR3). 
y/ .-.  open  K  Kt  file  K  R. 

D 

.-.  K  R  2  K,  K  Kt  1  K  R,  K  Kt  4  P. 

MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE  EN  APPUI. 

FIG.  127.  (Black.) 


{White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  this  and  similar  situations  the  object  of  White  is  to  open 
the  K  Kt  file  by  exchanging  the  K  Kt  P  for  the  adverse  K  B  P  at  K  B  4, 
and  then  to  occupy  the  open  K  Kt  file  with  K  R. 

Usually  the  K  Kt  P  should  not  be  advanced  to  K  Kt  4  until  supported 
by  the  K  R  at  K  Kt  1  ;  but  there  are  cases  wherein  White  may  properly 
advance  K  Kt  P  —  K  Kt  4,  and  if  Black  plays  K  B  P  X  Kt  P,  then  White 
may  proceed  P  —  K  B  5.  But  this  last  manoeuvre  is  only  feasible  when 
Black  has  committed  an  egregious  error,  which  opens  to  White  a  strategic 
line  of  operations. 


170 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 
FORMULA   No.  44. 
, MROHW 


OPC,  OPR 
M 


V/ .-.  open  K  Kt  file~KR. 

D 
.-.KBSKKtP. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ECHELONED  EN  APPUI. 
FIG.  128.  (Block.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  this  position  Black's  game  is  untenable,  but  White  must 
never  play  P  —  K  Kt  5,  nor  prematurely  exchange  the  Kt  P  for  the  black 
KB  P. 

Instead,  the  white  Q  Kt  may  be  developed  at  K  Kt  3,  after  which 
White  may  frequently  initiate  a  strategic  line  of  operations  by  the  sacri- 
fice of  a  "piece  for  one  or  more  pawns. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 
FORMULA   No.  45. 

MROPWK 
OPC,  OPR< 

M 

(OPB1A+PK5  +  PKR3+PQR3). 
V/.'.KKtP  echelon. 

D 

'.• .  K  R  2  K,  K  Kt  1  K  R,  K  Kt  4  P. 


171 


MAJOR   RIGHT  OBLIQUE   EN  POTENCE  EN  APPUI  WITH 
MINOR   CROCHET. 

(Black.) 


(While.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  this  situation  many  opportunities  will  be  presented  for 
breaking  the  right  wing  of  Black,  but  in  all  cases  the  exchange  of  the 
K  Kt  P  for  the  black  K  B  P  must  be  reserved  for  the  decisive  moment, 
and  until  such  time  as  White  has  absolute  control  of  the  K  Kt  file,  and  in 
no  case  must  the  white  K  Kt  P  be  advanced  to  K  Kt  5. 


172 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA  No.  46. 

MROAWK 
OPC,OPB< 
M 


(QPB1A  +  PK5  +  PKB5  +  PKR3  +  PQR3). 
\/  X  B.  P  K  B  3 

D 

.-.KB4KKt. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI  WITH 
MINOR  CROCHET. 


FIG.  130. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  White  should  never  attempt  to  form  the  echelon  in  this  and 
similar  situations,  but  should  seek  for  the  strategic  line  of  operations 
which  will  usually  be  found  to  exist.  The  sacrifice  of  a  pawn,  or  even 
of  a  piece,  will  frequently  be  justified,  if  thereby  White  is  enabled  to 
occupy  the  strategetic  objective. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


173 


FORMULA   No.  47. 

,  M  R  O  D  A  W  K 
OPC,  OPR    < 
M 


/.  open  Kt  file. 

D 
.'.  K  B  6  Kt  P 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE   DOUBLY  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI 
WITH  MINOR  CROCHET. 


FIG.  131. 


(Slack.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  White  must  always,  and  at  once,  exchange  his  K  Kt  P  for  the 
black  K  B  P,  and  never  lose  his  command  of  the  open  K  Kt  file.  After- 
ward the  white  Q  B  should  develop  at  K  B  6,  and  the  white  K  Kt  at 
KB  4. 


174 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  48. 


M  R  O  H  W  K 

O  P  C,  0  P  R  " 

M 


+  QRKB1  +  KKR2). 


V  /.  open  K  Kt  file, 

D 

/.  K  B  5  Kt  P,  K  Kt  5  K  Kt. 

MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ECHELONED  EN  APPUI 
WITH  MINOR   CROCHET. 


FIG.  132. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  The  object  of  White,  after  opening  the  K  Kt  file,  must 
always  be  to  concentrate  the  Kts  by  K  Kt  5  and  K  R  5  via  K  Kt  3,  against 
the  black  King's  wing  pawns ;  to  so  manoeuvre  as  to  compel  Black  to 
create  a  strategetic  weakness  in  his  position,  and  then  to  initiate  a  strate- 
gic line  of  operations  by  the  sacrifice  of  a  piece. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


175 


FORMULA   No.  49. 


,  M  R  0  C  A 

OPL 

M 


(OPBlA-Kt,R,U)  +  PK5  +  PQKt4  +  PQR4+QKtQB5). 

V  X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 

D 


.-.  QR5P,QR6P. 
MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  WITH  CROCHET  ALIGNED. 

FIG.  133.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  White  must  never  change  the  direction  of  his  front  by  play- 
ing in  this  situation  P  —  Q  5.  So  long  as  no  line  of  operations  exists,  the 
Q  R  P  should  steadily  be  advanced  to  its  sixth.  If  P  —  Q  5,  Black  will 
retire  Kt  —  Q  Kt  1,  and  the  white  Kt  must  then  either  retreat  or  be  ex- 
changed, and  White's  strategic  front  is  disorganized,  and  although  it  so 
happens  that  in  this  case  he  undoubtedly  will  win  the  game,  the  process  is 
not  scientific,  and  is  far  less  easy  than  the  consistent  developing  of  the 
strategic  front. 


176 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  50. 

.  MRO AC A 
OPL 
M 


(OPBlA-Kt,R,U)  +  PK5  +  PKB5-f-PQKt4  +  PQR4 
4-Kt-QB5). 

\l  X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 
D 


.-.  QR6P,QR6P. 

MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  WITH  CROCHET 
ALIGNED. 


FIG.  134. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  White  should  not  proceed  with  P  —  K  B  6,  thus  establish- 
ing the  grand  right  oblique,  as  that  front  would  not  have  the  direction  of 
the  objective  plane.  He  should  continue  with  the  advance  of  the  Q  R  P 
to  Q  R  6. 

It  does  not  follow  that  a  player  should  adopt  a  course  which  will  ulti- 
mately win ;  the  true  criterion  of  skill  is  the  selection  of  that  course 
which  wins  in  the  quickest  and  surest  manner.  The  high  art  consists  in 
despatching  a  beaten  antagonist  like  a  master,  and  not  like  a  novice. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


177 


FORMULA   No.  51. 


.MROFCA 

OPL 

M 


(OPPlA-Kt,RU)+PK5  +  P- 


X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 

D 
.'.  Q  R  6  P. 

MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE   WITH  CROCHET 
ALIGNED. 


FIG.  135. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  this  situation  it  will  be  found  that  through  the  errors  of 
Black,  a  strategic  line  of  operation  may  frequently  be  initiated  by  either 
P  -  Q  5,  P  -  Q  Kt  5,  B  -  Q  R  6,  or  Kt  X  Q  Kt  P.  But  neither  of  these 
moves  are  valid  on  a  line  of  manoeuvre,  and  you  must  not  forget  that  a 
strategic  line  of  operations  does  not  exist  until  the  checkmate  of  the 
adverse  king  can  be  definitely  calculated. 


178 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  52. 

,MROA WC A^ 


OPL 
M 


(OPBlA-Kt,R,U) 
+  PQR4). 


_ 
\/XB.  QKtP. 

D 
/.QR6P. 

MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE   ALIGNED  EN  APPUI  WITH 
CROCHET  ALIGNED. 


FIG.  136. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  If  in  this  and  similar  situations  Black  makes  the  error 
of  playing  P  —  Q  R  3,  usually  the  best  continuation  for  White  is 
P  —  Q  Kt  5 ;  and  this  always  is  the  correct  move  if  the  black  point  Q  1  is 
occupied  by  any  piece  except  a  Kt.  The  result  will  often  be  a  strategic 
'line  of  operations. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


179 


FORMULA   No.  53. 


MRODAWCA,. 
OPL 
M 


(OPBlA-Kt,R,U)+PK5  +  PKB5+PKKt5  +  PKR3 
+  PQKt4  +  PQR  4  +  K  K  R  2). 

^  X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 

D 
/.  Q  R  6  P. 

MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE   DOUBLY  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI 
WITH  CROCHET  ALIGNED. 


FIG.  137. 


(Black.) 


(White.') 

MAXIM.  —  In  all  situations  wherein  the  major  double  front  is  doubly 
aligned,  White  has  the  advantage  on  both  wings.  This  advantage  is  so 
decisive  that  often  a  logistic  or  a  tactical  line  of  operations  presents 
itself  before  the  strategic  line  of  operations  is  initiated  by  P  —  Q  R  6. 
These  opportunities  must  never  be  neglected. 


180 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  54. 

MRQF WCA 
OPL 
M 


(0  P  B  1  A  -  Kt,  R,  U)  +  P  K  5,  P  K  R  3,  P  -  Q  Kt  4,  P  Q  R  4,  Kt  Q  B  5. 
V/  X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 


/.  QR6R 

MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE   EN  POTENCE  EN  APPUI  WITH 
CROCHET  ALIGNED. 


FIG.  138. 


(Black.) 


m  i 


MAXIM.  —  If  in  this  situation  Black  makes  the  error  of  playing 
P  —  Q  Kt  3,  White  replies  B  -  R  6  (ck),  followed  by  K  R  —  Q  K  1,  and  then 
by  p  —  Q  R  5.  If  the  B  K  retreats  to  Q  1,  however,  on  the  check  White 
may  usually  best  proceed  with  Kt  -  Kt  7  (ck),  followed  by  B  —  Q  Kt  5. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


181 


FORMULA  No.  55. 

.MROHWCA^ 


OPL 
M 


(0  P  B  1  A  -  Kt,  R,  U)  +  P  K  5  +  P  K  Kt  4  -f  P  K  R  3  +  P  Q  Kt  4 
+  P  Q  R  4  +  K  K  R  2. 

V/  X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 

D 
.-.  QR6P. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE   ECHELONED  EN  APPUI  WITH 
CROCHET  ALIGNED. 


FIG.  139. 


(Black.} 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  all  cases  wherein  Black  makes  the  error  of  playing 
P  -  Q  R  4,  White  should  reply  with  K  R  -  Q  Kt  1.  If  Black  now  ex- 
changes the  white  Kt  at  Q  B  5,  White  retakes  with  Q  Kt  P,  followed  by 
Q  —  Q  Kt  2.  The  black  K  thus  being  driven  to  the  centre,  White  now  con- 
tinues the  attack  by  developing  his  major  front  by  the  right  unto  P  —  K  B  5 
and  P  —  K  Kt  5,  with  the  purpose  of  occupying  the  strategetic  objective 
with  a  piece. 


182 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  56. 


MEO  J 


GPL 
M 


(O  P  B  2  A  -  Kt,  E,  U)  +  P  -  K  5  +  P  Q  Kt  4  +  Q  Kt  Q  B  5. 
.*.  en  potence    • 
X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 
D 


.-.  K  1  or  K  Kt  5  Kt,  +  K  B  4  P 
/.  QE6P. 

MAJOE  EIGHT  OBLIQUE  WITH  MAJOE  CEOCHET. 

FIG.  140.  (Black.) 


(White.) 


MAXIM.  —  White  must  prepare  to  support  his  major  front  with  the 
K  B  P  en  potence,  and  his  best  move  is  Kt  —  K  Kt  5,  all  else  being  equal. 
Otherwise,  he  should  play  Kt  —  K*l ,  followed  by  P  —  K  B  4  in  either 
case,  and  returning  the  Kt  to  K  B  3  with  all  despatch. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


183 


FORMULA   No.  57. 


MROAJ 
OPL 
M 


(OPBlA-Kt,  R, 


V  X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 
D 

.-.  Q  R  6  P. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  WITH  MAJOR 
CROCHET. 


FIG.  141. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  White  must  establish  the  crochet  aligned  by  P  —  Q  R  4  at 
once  ;  and  as  in  all  similar  cases,  he  m.ust  hold  his  right  wing  and  centre 
immovable,  and  press  the  attack  on  the  left  with  all  possible  energy. 


184 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  58. 


MRODAWJ 
OPL 
M 


(OPBlA-Kt,  R,U)  +  PK5  +  PKB5-fPKKt5-fPKRS 
+  P  Q  Kt  4  +  Q  Kt  Q  B  5  +  K  K  R  2  +  K  R  K  Kt  1. 
\f  X  B.  P  Q  Kt  2. 

D 
/.  Q  R  6  P. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  DOUBLY  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI 
WITH  MAJOR  CROCHET. 


FIG.  142. 


(Slack.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  Here  is  presented  a  strong  temptation  for  White  to  develop 
a  single  front  by  the  right,  all  of  which  is  wrong  at  this  time.  White 
should  at  once  establish  the  crochet  aligned  by  P  —  Q  R  4,  and  hold  sta- 
tionary his  centre  and  right  wing  until  a  line  of  operations  is  initiated. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


185 


FORMULA   No.  59. 


MRO  P  J 
OPL 
M 


(0  P  B  1  A  -  Kt,  R,  U)  +P-K5  + 


QKtQB5. 


X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 
D 

/.  Q  R  6  P. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE   WITH  MAJOR 
CROCHET. 


FIG.  143. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  White  should  establish  the  crochet  aligned  by  P  —  Q  R  4  at 
once,  and  follow  this  with  P  —  Q  R  5.  This  is  one  of  the  safest  positions 
that  White  can  adopt,  for  Black  can  make  no  impression  whatever  on  the 
white  right  wing. 


186 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  60. 


MRO  WJ 

GPL 

M 


(O  P  B  1  A  -  Kt,  R,  U)  +  P  K  5  +  P  K  R  3  +  P  Q  Kt  4  -f-  Q  Kt  Q  B  5. 

/.  appui 
X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 
D 


/.  KR2K 
.'.  Q  R  6  P. 

MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE   EN  APPUI  WITH  MAJOR 
CROCHET. 


FIG.  144. 


(Black.) 


MAXIM.  —  White  should  play  at  once  K  —  K  R  2,  in  order  to  perfect 
the  en  appui  and  to  permit  of  the  quick  formation  of  the  echelon  on  the 
right,  when  necessary.  Then  he  should  at  once  proceed  to  establish  the 
crochet  aligned  by  P  —  Q  R  4. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


187 


FORMULA   No.  61. 


MRO A W J 
GPL 
M 


(0  P  B  1  A  -  Kt,  R,  IT)  +  P  K  5  -f  P  K  B  5  +  P  K  R  3  +  P  Q  Kt  4. 
\/  X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 

D 
/.  Q  R  6  P. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI  WITH 
MAJOR  CROCHET. 


FIG.  145. 


(Slack.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  Whenever  the  formation  en  appui  is  adopted,  the  K  should 
be  posted  at  R  2,  in  order  to  support  the  R  P  and  to  make  room  for  the 
posting  of  the  R  at  Kt  1.  This  may  be  delayed  in  cases  where,  as  in  this 
instance,  the  strategic  front  is  so  powerfully  developed  that  White  has 
nothing  to  fear  from  any  attempted  adverse  attack. 


188 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  62. 

,MR  O  H  W  J 


(OPB1  A-Kt,  R,  U) 


OPL 

M 


< 


PKKt4+PKR3+PQKt4 


X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 

D 
/.  Q  R  6  RF. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ECHELONED  EN  APPUI  WITH 
MAJOR  CROCHET. 


FIG.  146. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  these  fronts,  never  change  the  direction  by  advancing 
P  —  Q  5,  nor  extend  further  iii  the  same  direction  by  P  —  K  B  6.  Put  all 
your  time  and  energy  into  the  attack  of  the  objective  plane,  by  means  of 
the  crochet  aligned. 


MAJOR  EIGHT  ENCEINTE. 

The  objective  plane  being  located  on  the  King's  wing, 
this  front,  properly  constructed,  constitutes  a  winning 
advantage  in  position. 


190 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  63. 


|     MRE  W 


0  P  C,  O  P  R 
M 


(OPBlA-RU)+PK5  +  PKB5-fP 
+  KKR2  +  KRKKtl  +  QRKBl. 

V'  Grand  Right  Oblique. 
D 

.\  K  B  6  P^or  K  Kt  5  P,  or  K  B  4  Kt^or  K  Kt  5  KtT 

MAJOR  RIGHT   ENCEINTE  EN  APPUI. 
FIG.  147.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

• 

MAXIM.  —  White's  win  is  assured,  the  question  being  merely  one  of 
manner  of  finishing  the  game.  The  best  move  usually  will  be  P  —  K  Kt  5. 
Either  P  —  KB  6  (if  no  black  pawn  is  at  either  K  2  or  KKt2),  or 
Kt  —  Kt  5,  or  Kt  -  B  4,  and  in  some  cases  Q  B  —  Kt  5,  are  available.  The 
object  is  simply  to  establish  the  grand  right  oblique  and  to  open  the 
K  Kt  file  for  the  rooks  in  case  Black  has  castled  K  R. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  ENCEINTE. 


191 


FORMULA   No.  64. 


MBE  WK 


O  P  C,  O  P 
M 


(OPBlA-RU) 


KRKKtl+QRKBl. 


.'.  Grand  Right  Oblique. 
D 


.-.  K  B  6  P,  or  K  Kt  5  P,  or  K  B  4  Kt,  or  K  Kt  5  Kt. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  ENCEINTE  EN  APPUI  WITH  MINOR 
CROCHET. 


FIG.  148. 


(Black.) 


1ft 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  The  remarks  on  the  foregoing  apply  equally  to  this  situa- 
tion. White  establishes  the  minor  crochet  in  order  to  properly  oppose  the 
major  left  oblique  refused  and  echeloned  adopted  by  Black. 


192  THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 

FORMULA   No.    65. 

MRE  W  J 
OPL      ^ 

M  

(0  P  B  1  A  -  Kt,  R,  U)  +  P  K  5  +  P  K  B  5  +  P  K  Kt  4  +  P  K  R  3 
+  K  K  R2  +  KR  KKt  1. 

.'.  Crochet  aligned 
C  A  /.  x  B.  Q  Kt  P. 
D 


.-.  QR4P,QR5P,QR6P. 

MAJOR  RIGHT  ENCEINTE   EN  APPUI  WITH  MAJOR 

CROCHET. 
FIG.  149.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  this  and  similar  positions  establish  the  crochet  aligned, 
and  attack  the  square  Q  R  6  with  the  Q  R  P,  meanwhile  availing  of  any 
opportunity  to  win  in  any  other  way  by  an  error  of  the  opponent,  and 
especially  by  Kt  x  Q  Kt  P,  or  by  P  —  Q  Kt  5. 

Changing  front  by  P  —  Q  5  will  seldom  be  found  desirable,  although 
it  may  be  adopted  at  times  when  the  opponent  has  played  so  unscientifi- 
cally that  he  is  without  resources. 

The  right  enceinte  rarely  should  be  adopted  without  the  en  appui,  and 
as  a  rule  the  latter  should  be  constructed  first. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  ENCEINTE. 


193 


FORMULA   No.  66. 


MRE  WC A 

OPL 

M 


(0  P  B  1  A  -  Kt,  R,  U)  +  P  K  5  +  P  K  B  5  +  P  K  Kt  4  +  P  K  R  3 


X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 

D 
/.  Q  R  6  P. 


MAJOR   RIGHT  ENCEINTE  EN  APPUI  WITH   CROCHET 
ALIGNED. 


FIG.  150 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  all  formations  which  include  the  en  appui,  it  is  necessary 
to  prevent  the  opponent  from  creating  by  the  exchange  of  pawns  open 
files  which  cannot  be  controlled  by  the  kindred  rooks.  It  is  equally 
important  to  maintain  intact  the  P  at  K  5  and  at  Q  4  until  the  decisive 
moment. 


MAJOR  RIGHT   OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 

This  is  the  model  front  for  Black  to  aim  at  when  the 
objective  plane  is  located  on  the  King's  wing. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 


195 


FORMULA   No.  67. 

MROR 


O  P  C,  0  P  R 
M 


(OPB4  A)  +  PKB5. 

V  X  W.KtKBS. 
D 

/.  K  5  P 

W.  Kt  K  B  3  X  /.  K  4  Q  E 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 
FIG.  151.  (Black.) 


(White.) 


MAXIM.  —  This  position  belongs  to  Black,  and  is  the  most  powerful 
formation  possible  for  him  to  attain  with  proper  play  on  the  part  of  White. 

Black  can  now  proceed  with  P  —  K  5,  or  P  —  K  Kt  4  (in  which  case  he 
should  first  move  K  —  R  1 ),  or  Kt  —  K  Kt  5,  or  B  —  K  Kt  5.  After  either 
of  these  moves  Black  may  continue  as  best  suits  the  resulting  situation, 
having  always  in  view  the  dislodging  of  the  white  Kt  at  K  B  3  and  the 
establishing  of  the  O  P  B  1  A  by  P  -  K  5,  followed  by  P  -  Q  4  and 
P-QB3  (after  Kt-K4  or  Kt-K2),  if  and  when  necessary. 


196 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA  No.  68. 


M  R  O  R  A 


OPR 
M 


(OPB4A-R,  U)+KKRl+KRKKtl  +  QRKBl 
+P  K  B  5  +  P  K  Kt  5. 

V^  X  W.  Kt  K  B  3. 
D 


W.  Kt  K  B  3  X  .'.  K  B  6  P. 

MAJOR   RIGHT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED  AND  ALIGNED. 

FIG.  152.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  After  establishing  the  grand  right  oblique  by  P  —  K  B  6, 
Black  should  not  neglect  to  support  it  by  properly  developing  the  K  P 
and  QP  along  the  strategetio  centre. 


MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 


197 


FORMULA   No.  69. 

.MRORP. 


OPR 
M 


(OPB4A-R,  U 
+  QRKB1. 


X  W.  Kt  K  B  3. 
D 


/.  K  Kt  5  P. 
MAJOR  RIGHT  OBLIQUE   REFUSED  EN  POTENCE. 


FIG.  153. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  It  is  usually  well  to  defer  the  attempt  to  dislodge  the  white 
K  Kt  in  this  and  similar  situations  until  such  time  as  nothing  can  prevent 
the  quick  development  of  the  front  from  the  M  R  O  R  to  the  G  R  O,  by 
the  advance  of  P  —  K  5  and  P  —  Q  4.  If,  however,  White's  king's  wing  be- 
comes disintegrated,  and  the  front  refused  is  sufficient  for  forming  the  base 
of  operations,  then,  of  course,  there  is  no  necessity  for  further  developing  it, 
and  Black  should  manoeuvre  to  initiate  a  strategic  line  of  operations. 


MAJOR  LEFT   OBLIQUE. 

The  objective  plane  being  located  on  the  Queen's 
wing,  this  front,  properly  constructed,  gives  the  advan- 
tage in  position  as  compared  with  any  adverse  front 
of  operations. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


199 


FORMULA   No.  70. 


MLO 


(0  P  B  2  A,  reversed)  +  P  Q  5. 
^  .'.  en  potence. 

D 

.-.  Q  Kt  5  Kt  +  Q  B  4  P. 


FIG.  154. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 

(Slack.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  It  is  a  serious  matter  whenever  the  major  front  is  adopted 
and  there  is  inability  to  support  it  at  once  with  the  formation  en  potence. 

The  opponent,  in  such  a  case,  should  violently  attack  the  vertex  pawn, 
and  endeavor  to  destroy  the  front  at  once. 

In  this  position  White,  if  he  has  the  time,  and  if  the  black  K  is  per- 
manently located  on  the  Queen's  side,  may  properly  form  the  appui  and 
retire  the  Q  Kt  temporarily  to  Q  R  2,  in  order  to  advance  P  —  Q  B  4. 


200 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  71. 


MLO  A 
GPL 

M 


(O  P  B  1  A,  reversed)  +  PQ5  +  PQB5. 
^  .-.  Grand  Left  Oblique. 

D 

.-.  Q  B  6  P,  or  Q  Kt  5  Kt,  or  Q  Kt  5  B,  or  Q  B  4  Kt. 


MAJOK  LEFT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED. 
FIG.  155.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  The  idea  is  to  establish  a  white  pawn  or  a  white  piece  at 
O  B  6,  without  removing  the  white  Q  P  from  Q  5. 

This  may  be  done  in  several  ways,  all  of  which  are  indicated  in  the  line 
of  development. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


201 


FIG.  156. 


FORMULA   No.  72. 

M  L  O  P 

OPL  <> 

M 

(0  P  B  1  A,  reversed)  +  P  Q  5. 
y  /.  front  aligned. 

D 
.'.  Q  B  5  P. 

MAJOK  LEFT  OBLIQUE   EN  POTENCE. 

(Slack.) 


(White.) 


MAXIM.  —  In  this  and  similar  situations  White  wins  by  establishing 
the  major  front  aligned.  Whenever  Black  presents  this  alignment  by 
playing  P  — B4,  White  seldom  should  take  the  pawn  en  passant,  but, 
instead,  he  should  form  the  echelon  supported  en  appui. 


202 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA  No.  73. 

MLOK 


(O  P  B  2  A,  reversed)  +  PQ5  +  PKR3. 

V  •'•  en  potence. 
D 


/.  QKt  5  Kt  +  QB4P. 

MAJOK  LEFT  OBLIQUE   WITH  MINOE   CROCHET. 

FIG.  157.  (Black.) 


( White.) 

MAXIM.  —  White's  object  is  to  form  the  en  potence  at  once  and  after- 
ward to  establish  the  grand  left  oblique,  while  the  minor  crochet  covers 
"the  right  wing  against  the  adverse  major  front  echeloned.  The  Kt  always 
is  preferably  developed  at  Kt  5  in  these  situations. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


203 


FORMULA   No.  74. 

M  L  O  A  K^ 

OPL 

M 


(O  P  B  1  A,  reversed)  +FQ5  +  PQB  5  +  P  K  R  3. 
^  .  -7  Grand  Left  Oblique. 

D _____ 

.-.  Q  B  6  P,  or  Q  Kt  5  Kt,  or  Q  Kt  5  B,  or  Q  B  4  Kt. 

MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  WITH  MINOR 
CROCHET. 


FIG.  158. 


(Slack.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  this  and  similar  situations  a  line  of  operations  usually 
exists,  whereby  the  command  of  the  objective  plane  may  readily  be 
secured.  Otherwise,  the  object  of  White  always  is  to  establish  the  B  P 
or  a  piece  upon  the  strategetic  objective,  without  eliminating  the  white 
pawn  at  Q  5. 


204 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA  No.   75. 


GPL 
M 


(0  P  B  1  A,  reversed)  +PQ5  +  PKR3. 
Y  /.  front  aligned. 

D 
/.  Q  B  5  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE  WITH  MINOR 
CROCHET. 


FIG.  159. 


(Black.) 


!!•   Hi 


(White.) 


MAXIM.  —  White  must  push  his  attack  against  the  objective  plane  with 
all  vigor,  while  Black  must  with  like  energy  attack  the  logistic  horizon. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


205 


FORMULA   No.  76. 


MLO  A  W 


OPL 
M 


(0  P  B  1  A,  reversed)  +  PQ5  +  PQB5  +  PQR3. 
y  /.  Major  Left  Enceinte. 

D 

/.  Q  R  2  K,  Q  Kt  4  P,  Q  Kt  1  R. 

MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI. 


FIG.  160. 


(Slack.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  — Never  be  guilty  of  the  folly  of  advancing  P  —  Q6,  unless 
on  a  line  of  operation. 

The  proper  manoeuvre  is  to  advance  P  —  K  Kt  4,  thus  forming  the 
major  enceinte,  which  latter  may  be  later  resolved  into  the  double 
alignment. 


206 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  77. 


M  L  Q  D  A  W 
OPL 

M 


(0  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -K,U)+PQ5-fPQB5  +  PQKt5  + 
+  KR  QB1. 

\l .'.  open  Q  Kt  file 
T   X  B.  P  Q  B  3. 

D 
.-.  Q  B  6  OKtP. 


MAJOK  LEFT  OBLIQUE   DOUBLY  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI. 
FIG.  161.  (Slack.) 


(White.) 

•      MAXIM.  — If  Black  plays  B  P  X  QP,  always  retake  with  the  Kt  at 
B3. 

Never  advance  the  Kt  P  to  Kt  6,  nor  the  O  P  to  Q  6. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE, 


207 


FORMULA   No.   78. 

,  M  L  O  P  W  • 


OPL 
M 


(0  P  B  1  A,  reversed)  +PQ5  +  PQK3, 
\/  /.  front  aligned. 

D 
.-.  Q  B  5  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE   EN  POTENCE  EN  APPUL 
FIG.  162.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  Whenever  the  major  front  is  established  en  potence,  never 
hesitate  to  form  the  front  aligned  by  advancing  the  B  P  to  B  5  on  the 
next  move. 

All  else  being  equal,  the  establishment  of  the  front  aligned  constitutes 
a  won  game. 


208 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 


FORMULA  No.  79. 


MLOHW 

OPL 

M 


(0  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -  R,  U)+PQ5+ 
+  Q  R  Q  Kt  1  +  K  R  Q  B  1. 


\   .:  open  Q  Kt  file. 

D 
.-.  Q  B  5  QKt  P. 


MAJOE  LEFT  OBLIQUE   ECHELONED  EN  APPUI. 
FIG.  163.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  situation  usually  results  from  Black's  effort  to  prevent 
the  alignment  of  White's  major  front.  White  must  never  fail  to  open  the 
Kt  file  by  exchanging  the  Kt  P  ;  still  he  need  not  do  this  at  once,  but  may 
properly  await  the  opportune  moment- 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


209 


FORMULA   No.  80. 


MLODAWK 

OPL 

M 


(O  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -B,R,U) 

+KQR2+QBKB  2  +  Q  R  Q  Kt  1  +  K  R  Q  B  1. 

V  /.  Q  Kt  file. 
D 


.-.  Q  B  6  Q  KtP. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  DOUBLY  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI 
WITH  MINOR  CROCHET. 


FIG.  164. 


(Black.) 


Hi 

""f^^ss,^"^^^ 


(White.) 

MAXIM. — White,  of  course,  has  a  won  game,  and  to  finish  it  off  in  an 
elegant  manner  is  the  particular  object  he  has  in  view.  The  initial  step 
always  is  to  open  the  Kt  file  by  Kt  P  X  B  P. 


210 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  81. 


MLOP WK 


OPL 
M 


(0  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -B,U) 


/.  echelon. 
D 


.-.  Q  R  2  K,  Q  Kt  1  QR,  Q  Kt  4  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE  EN  APPUI  WITH 
MINOR   CROCHET. 


FIG.  165. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  position  invariably  necessitates  the  formation  of  the 
echelon. 

In  such  a  case  always  post  K  at  R  2,  before  advancing  Kt  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


211 


FORMULA   No.  82. 


M  L  O  H  W  K 

OPL 

M 


(O  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -B,  R,  U)+PQ5  +  PQKt4 


.'.  open  Q  Kt  file. 

P 
/.  Q  B  5  QKtP. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE   ECHELONED  EN  APPUI  WITH 
MINOR  CROCHET. 


Fm.  166. 


(Black.) 


•  Ill 

w////////.  t///////y/. 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  this  situation  it  is  sometimes  well  to  double  the  rooks  on 
the  Kt  file  before  exchanging  Kt  P  for  the  adverse  B  P,  but  more  fre- 
quently this  is  immaterial. 


212 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


FORMULA  No.  83. 


.MLOJ  . 

f~OPlT< 

M 


(O  P  B  2  A,  reversed  -  Kt,  R,  U)  +  P  Q  5  +  P  Q  Kt  4  +  K  Kt  K  B  5. 

\/  /.  en  potence  +  crochet  aligned. 
D 


.-.  Q  Kt  5  Kt,  Q  B  4  P,  Q  R  4  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE   WITH  MAJOR   CROCHET. 
FIG.  167.  (Black.) 


m       wm& 

4  PP  i 

JL  Jlli  x 


(TFMe.) 

MAXIM.  —  The  sacrifice  of  the  Kt  for  the  Kt  P  must  always  be  borne 
in  mind  by  White  in  these  situations. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


213 


FORMULA   No.  84. 

M  L  O  A  J 
OPR     < 

M 


(0  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -  Kt,  R,  U)  +  P  Q  5  +  P  Q  B  5  +  P  K  Kt  4 
+  K  Kt  K  B  5. 

/.  crochet  aligned 
X  B.  K  Kt  P. 
D 


.'.  K  R  4  P,  K  R  5  P,  K  R  6  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  WITH  MAJOR 
CROCHET. 


FIG.  168. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  Always  remember  that  there  is  no  quicker  nor  safer  way 
of  winning  the  game,  than  by  the  march  of  the  R  P  to  R  6  after  the  for- 
mation of  the  crochet  aligned. 


214 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  85. 


M  L  O  P  J 
OPR 

M 


(0  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -  Kt,  R,  U)  +  P  Q  5  +  P  K  Kt  4  +  K  Kt  K  B  5. 
^  .'  crochet  aligned . 

D 
/.  K  R  4  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE  WITH  MAJOR 
CROCHET. 


Fro.  169. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  The  en  potence  is  invaluable  in  these  situations,  as  it  pre- 
vents the  disintegration  of  the  strategic  front  by  the  adverse  pawns.  The 
front  must  always  be  relied  on  to  cover  the  prime  strategetic  point  when 
attacking  by  the  crochet  aligned. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


215 


FORMULA   No.  86. 


M  L  O  A  W  J 

OPE 

M 


(O  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -Kt,  R,  U)+PQ5 
+  P  K  Kt  4  +  K  Kt  K  B  5. 

y  •'•  crochet  aligned. 
D 

.-.  K  R  4  K  R  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI  WITH 
MAJOR  CROCHET. 


Fis.  170. 


(Black.) 


. 


(White.') 

MAXIM.  —  White  wins  in  this  situation  with  ease.  Black  is  on  the 
defensive  on  both  wings.  This  is  one  of  the  few  situations  in  which  White 
ever  is  justified  in  attacking  on  hoth  flanks  simultaneously. 


216 


THE  GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 
"FORMULA  NO.  87. 

,MLOD  A 


OPR 
M 


(O  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -Kt,  R, 


5  +  PQB5  +  PQKt5 


/.  crochet  aligned. 

D 
.-.  K  R  4  KRP. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  DOUBLY  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI 
WITH  MAJOR  CROCHET. 


FIG.  171. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  White's  superiority  in  position  is  manifest,  and  he  can  win 
either  on  the  right  or  on  the  left. 

The  attack  always,  however,  should  he  directed  against  the  objective 
plane  in  preference  to  any  other  line  of  manoauvre,  but  the  first  line  of 
operations  presented  must  always  be  accepted. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


217 


FORMULA   No.  88. 


MLOPWJ 
OPR 

M 


(O  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -Kt,  R, 
+  K  Kt  K  B  5. 


PQR3-fPKKt4 


V  /.  crochet  aligned. 

D 
/.  K  R  4  K  R  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE  EN  APPUI  WITH 
MAJOR  CROCHET. 


FIG:  172. 


(Slack.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  is  another  winning  position  for  White,  the  proper  pro- 
cess being  the  formation  of  the  crochet  aligned. 


218 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  89. 


M  L  O  H  W  J 

OPR 

M 


(O  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -  Kt,  R, 
+  P  K  Kt  4  +  K  Kt  K  B  5. 


PQKt4  +  PQR3 


.'.  crochet  aligned, 

D 
.'.  K  R  4  K  R  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  ECHELONED  EN  APPUI  WITH 
MAJOR  CROCHET* 


FIG.  173. 


(Black.) 


1 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  is  a  powerful  formation,  and  all  to  White's  advantage. 
It  usually  results  from  the  eccentric  manoeuvres  of  Black  in  the  location 
of  his  prime  strategetic  point. 

White  should,  of  course,  at  once  attack  with  the  crochet  aligned. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


219 


FORMULA   No.  90. 


M  L  O  C  A 
OPE  -< 
M 


(O  P  B  2  A,  reversed  -Kt,  R,U)+PQ5  +  PKKt4  +  P 
+  K  Kt  K  B  5. 

V^  X  B.  K  Kt  P. 
D 


.-.  K  R  5  KRP,  K  R  6  K  R  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  WITH  CROCHET  ALIGNED. 

FIG.  174.  (Black.) 


(While.) 

MAXIM. —  In  this  situation,  if 'Black  menaces  a  strong  attack  by  the 
left,  it  usually  is  well  to  reinforce  the  major  front  with  the  en  potence  for 
the  purpose  of  covering  the  prime  strategetic  point,  and  preventing  the 
disintegration  of  the  strategic  front. 


220 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  91. 


M  L  O  A  C  A 


OPR 
M 


(0  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -Kt,  R, 
+  PKR4  +  KKtKB5. 


X  B.  K  Kt  P. 
D 


.-.  K  R  5  K  R  P,  K  R  6  K  R  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  WITH  CROCHET 
ALIGNED. 


FIG.  175. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 


MAXIM.  — This  aligned  front  is  not  so  desirable  as  the  front  en  potence, 
unless  the  attack  takes  the  direction  of  the  left,  for  the  purpose  of  acting 
against  the  logistic  horizon  on  a  line  of  operations. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


FORMULA   No.  92. 


M  L  O  P  C  A 
OPR 

M 


(0  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -Kt,  R,  U)+PQ5  +  PKKt4  +  PKR4 
+  K  Kt  K  B  5. 

\/  X  B.  K  Kt  P. 
D 


.-.  K  R  5  K  R  P,  K  R  6  K  R  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE  WITH  CROCHET 
ALIGNED. 


FIG.  176. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  is  a  model  front  when  operating  with  the  crochet 
aligned.  Black  is,  and  must  remain,  absolutely  on  the  defensive,  or  attack 
at  a  great  disadvantage. 


222 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  93. 


,  M  L  0  A  W  C  A 

OPR 

M 


(0  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -Kt,  R,  U)+PQ5  +  PQB5  +  PQR3 
+  P  K  Kt  4  +  P  K  R  4  +  K  Kt  K  B  5. 
\/  X  B.  K  Kt  P. 
D 


.'.  K  R  5  K  R  P,  K  R  6  K  R  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI   WITH 
CROCHET  ALIGNED. 


FIG.  177. 


(Black.) 


I 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  The  front  aligned  in  these  situations  is  not  desirable  unless 
Black  has  serious  defects  existing  in  his  left  flank. 

Whenever  the  objective  plane  is  not  posted  at  its  extremity,  the  strate- 
gic front  is  stronger  en  potence  than  in  any  other  formation. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


223 


FORMULA   No.  94. 


ML OF WC A 

OPR 

M 


(O  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -Kt,  B, 
+  P  K  R  4  +  K  Kt  K  B  5. 


V  X  B.  K  Kt  P. 
D 


.-.  K  R  5  K  R  P,  K  R  6  K  R  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE  EN  APPUI  WITH 
CROCHET  ALIGNED. 


FIG.  178. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  The  appui  in  these  situations  is  not  desirable,  as  it  offers  a 
chance  of  success  to  a  proper  attack  by  Black,  should  any  opportunity 
arise  for  the  sacrifice  of  a  piece  for  the  white  R  P  and  Kt  P. 


224 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA  No.  95. 


MLO  H WC A 

OPR 

M 


(O  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -Kt, 


+  PQKt4 
KKtKB5. 


X  B.  P  K  Kt  2. 
D 


/.  K  R  5  K  R  P,  K  R  6  K  R  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  ECHELONED  EN  APPUI  WITH 
CROCHET  ALIGNED. 


FIG.  179. 


(Black.) 


////,,**&////> 

•»! 


AM.  Hi 


( White.') 

MAXIM.  —  To  permit  the  formation  of  this  powerful  front,  Black  must 
manoeuvre  with  great  eccentricity. 


MAJOR  LEFT   OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 

This  front,  properly  constructed,  gives  the  advantage 
in  position  against  a  minor  front  of  the  same  class ;  but 
it  is  inferior  to  a  front  directed  either  by  the  right  or  by 
the  left,  or  by  the  right  refused. 


226 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  96. 


.  ML  OR 

O  P  C,  Q  P  K,  Q  P  L 

M 

(C  P  B  1  -B,  R,  U)  +  P  Q  B  5. 

y  .'.  en  potence. 
D 


.-.  Q  Kt  4  Q  Kt  P. 


MAJOE  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 

White. 
FIG.  180.  (Black.) 


( White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  front  is  a  desirable  front  for  White  to  establish  only 
when  Black  has  adopted  the  major  left  oblique  refused. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED.  227 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 
Black. 

FIG.  181.  (Black.) 


(White.) 


228 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  97. 

MLOR  A 

+0  P  C,  O  P  R,  O  P  L^ 
M 


(C  P  B  1  -  R,  U)  +  P  Q  B  5  +  P  Q  Kt  5. 
^  .'.  Major  Left  Enceinte  Refused. 

D 
.-.  Q  R  4  QRP. 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED  AND  ALIGNED. 

White. 
FIG.  182.  (Black.) 


(White.) 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 


229 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED  AND  ALIGNED. 

Black. 
FIG.  183.  (Black.) 


.^^a^ito. 

f^mm/'m 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  front  is  legitimate  for  both  White  and  for  Black,  but 
its  weakness  consists  in  the  fact  that  it  has  not  the  direction  of  the  objec- 
tive plane,  and  does  not  permit  of  the  crochet  aligned. 


230 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  98. 


MLORDA 
0  P  C,  0  P  R,  O  P 
M 


(CPB1-R, 


\/  /.  open  Q  R  file. 
D 


.-.  Q  Kt  6  QKtP,  or  /.  Q  R  6  Q  R  P. 

MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED  AND  DOUBLY 
ALIGNED. 


FIG.  184. 


White. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 


231 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE   REFUSED  AND  DOUBLY 
ALIGNED. 


FIG.  185. 


Black. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 


MAXIM.  —  This  front,  all  else  being  equal,  is  certain  to  pierce  the  ad- 
verse  left  wing,  and  to  ensure  the  queening  of  a  kindred  pawn. 


232 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  99. 

M  L  O  R  P 

X)  P  C,  O  P  R,  O  P  L< 
M 


(C  P  B  1  -  R,  U)  +  P  Q  B  5  +  P  Q  Kt  4. 

^  .'.  echelon. 
D 


.-.  Q  R  4  QRP. 

MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED  EN  POTENCE. 

White. 
PIG.  186.  (Black.) 


(White.) 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 


233 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED  EN  POTENCE. 

Black. 
FIG.  187.  (Black.) 


X/VX/////V 

1 


ilJ  LA. it. 


(Fftife.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  en  potence  to  the  major  left  oblique  refused  is  a  very 
necessary  formation.  It  usually  is  developed  from  the  fianchetto.  It  prop- 
erly may  be  reinforced  by  the  echelon,  but  the  most  powerful  method  is  to 
convert  it  into  the  major  left  enceinte  (O  P  R). 


234 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  100. 

MLORH 
0  P  C,  O  P  E,  0  P  L< 

M 


(CPB1-R, 


/.  Major  Left  Euceinte  Refused. 


.-.  Q  Kt  P  QKtP. 

MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE   REFUSED  AND  ECHELONED. 

White. 
FIG.  188.  (Black.) 


( White.) 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 


235 


MAJOR  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED  AND  ECHELONED. 

Black. 
FIG.  189.  (Black.) 


i      i 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  powerful  formation  ensures  the  superiority  in  position 
on  the  left. 

Its  weakness  lies  in  the  exposure  of  the  King's  side  to  the  attack  of  the 
right  oblique. 


MAJOR  LEFT  ENCEINTE  REFUSED. 

This  front,  properly  constructed,  gives,  all  else  being 
equal,  a  winning  logistic  line  of  operation  against  the 
logistic  horizon. 


MAJOR  LEFT  ENCEINTE  REFUSED. 


237 


FORMULA   No.  101. 


M  L  E  R 
OPC.OPR, 
M 


(CPBl-R,U)+PQB5 


.'.  Major  Left  Oblique  Refused  and  Doubly  Aligned. 

D 
/.  Q  R  5  QRP. 


MAJOR  LEFT  ENCEINTE  REFUSED. 

White. 
FIG.  190.  (Black.) 


(White.) 


238 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


MAJOK  LEFT  ENCEINTE  KEFUSED. 

Black. 
FIG.  191.  (Black.) 


jpf1 

MI    HP 

9§  i 

mi  * 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  formation  is  decisive  of  the  advantage  on  the  Queen's 
wing,  and  inaugurates  the  process  which  disintegrates  the  adverse  right 
oblique. 

But  the  weakness  of  all  these  fronts  directed  by  the  left  refused  is, 
that  the  prime  strategetic  point  is  located  on  the  wing  refused. 


MAJOR  LEFT  ENCEINTE  REFUSED. 

FORMULA   No.  102. 
M  L  E  W 


239 


OPL 

M 


(0  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -R, 

+  KQR2  +  QRQKtl+KRQBl. 


.*.  Major  Left  Oblique  Doubly  Aligned. 
_  D 
/.  Q  Kt  5  QKtP. 


MAJOR  LEFT  ENCEINTE  EN  APPTJI. 
FIG.  192.  (Slack.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  powerful  position  is  decisive  of  the  advantage  on  the 
Queen's  wing  when  attacking  by  the  left  oblique. 


240 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  103. 


MLE  WK 

OPL 

M 


(O  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -R,U)+PQ5 


+  PQKt4-f-PQR3 


y  .*.  Major  Left  Oblique  Doubly  Aligned. 

D 
.-.  Q  Kt  5  Q  Kt  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  ENCEINTE   EN  APPUI  WITH  MINOR 
CROCHET. 


Pis.  193. 


(Black.) 


i 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  this  and  similar  situations  White  will  gain  command  of 
the  objective  plane  before  Black  can  profit  by  occupying  the  logistic  hori- 
zon and  uniting  with  his  hypothetical  force. 


MAJOR  LEFT  ENCEINTE  REFUSED. 


241 


FORMULA   No.  104. 


OPR 
M 


(O  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -  Kt,  R,  U)  +  P  Q  5  +  P  Q  B  5  +  P  Q  Kt  4 
+  PKKt4-fQRQKtl+KKtKB5. 
^  /.  crochet  aligned. 

D 
.-.  K  R  4  K  R  P. 


MAJOR  LEFT  ENCEINTE  EN  APPUI  WITH  MAJOR 
CROCHET. 


FIG.  194. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  White  will  win  by  the  advance  of  Q  R  P  to  R  6  after  the 
formation  of  the  crochet  aligned. 


242 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA  No.  105. 


M  L  E  W  C  A 

1         OPR 


M 


(0  P  B  1  A,  reversed  -  Kt,  R,  U)+PQ5 


V  X  B.  P  K  Kt  2. 
D 


.-.  K  R  5  K  R  P,  K  R  6  K  R  P. 


PQKt4 


MAJOR  LEFT  ENCEINTE  WITH  CROCHET  ALIGNED. 
FIG.  195.  (Black.) 


mm 

/"•LJM^J1™,!!*, 


MAXIM.  —  Black  is  obliged  to  expose  either  the  objective  plane  or  the 
logistic  horizon.  Thus  is  created  a  strategetic  weakness  of  which  White 
can  readily  avail  by  lines  of  operation. 


GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 

Properly  constructed,  this  front  constitutes  a  winning 
superiority  in  position  in  all  situations  in  which  the  ob- 
jective plane  is  located  on  the  centre  or  on  the  King's 
wing. 


244 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FIG.  196. 


FORMULA   No.  106. 

GRO 

OPR^ 

M 

Major  Bight  Oblique  +  P  K  B  6. 

V^  /.  O  P. 
D 

Strategic  Line  of  Operation. 

GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 

(Black.) 


mm^mr--!* 

iyWY/YY////. 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  In  this  situation  the  object  of  White  is  to  maintain  a  piece 
at  K  B  6  and  to  prevent  the  disintegration  of  his  front.  Consequently  the 
K  B  P  rarely  should  occupy  K  B  6,  unless  supported  by  a  piece  in  addition 
to  the  K  P. 


GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


245 


FORMULA   No.  107. 

GRQK 
OPR 
M 


Major  Eight  Oblique  +  PKB6  +  PQR3. 

V'.-.GP. 

D 

Strategic  Line  of  Operation. 

GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE   WITH  MINOR  CROCHET. 
FIG.  197.  (Black.) 


A  n 


(IFMe.) 

MAXIM.  —  If  the  grand  front  is  established,  it  will  not  be  necessary  to 
form  the  minor  crochet.  Otherwise,  this  precaution  should  not  be  ne- 
glected, whenever  the  opponent  establishes  the  major  left  oblique  refused 
and  echeloned. 


246 


THE  GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA  No.  108. 


GBOJ, 

OPL  ' 

M 


(Major  Right  Oblique  -  B,  Q,  U)  +  P  K  B6  +  PQKt4  +  KtQB5. 

V  .'•  O  P. 

D 

If  Strategic  Line  of  Operation  then  .'.  Q  R  4  Q  R  P. 
If  Logistic  Line  of  Operation  then  /.  K  Kt  5  Kt. 


GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE   WITH  MAJOR  CROCHET. 

Fio.  198.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  White  may  support  the  grand  front  en  potence,  or  exchange 
the  K  B  P,  thus  reducing  his  front  to  a  major  front.  But  in  all  cases  he 
should  form  the  crochet  aligned  at  once. 


GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


247 


FORMULA  No.  109. 


GRO  AW 
OPR 

M 


(Ma3orRightOblique- 


.-.  O  P. 
D 


Strategic  Line  of  Operation. 

GRAND   RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI. 
FIG.  199.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  front  needs  no  comment.  Black's  situation  manifestly 
is  hopeless,  as  the  objective  plane  is  open  to  the  attack  of  the  entire  White 
force. 


248 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  110. 


GROP  W 
OPE 
M 


(Major  Eight  Oblique  —  E,  U)  +  PKB6  +  PKKt5  +  PKE3  +  KKE2. 

y^.  O  P. 

D 

Strategic  Line  of  Operation. 

GEAND  EIGHT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE  EN  APPUL 
FIG.  200.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  is  one  of  the  most  powerful  of  the  single  fronts.  The 
accumulation  of  the  White  force  against  the  Black  King  obviously  cannot 
be  prevented. 


GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


249 


FORMULA   No.  111. 


GRO A WK 
OPR 

M 


(Major  Right  Oblique  -  R,  U)  +  P  K  B  6  +  PKKt6  +  PKR3  +  PQR3 
+  K  K  R  2. 

V/  /.  0  P. 

D 

Strategic  Line  of  Operation. 

GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI  WITH 
MINOR  CROCHET. 


FIG.  201. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  situation,  like  all  the  grand  fronts,  is  an  easy  winning 
position  for  White. 

The  particular  line  of  strategic  operations,  however,  varies  in  all, 
according  to  the  value  of  the  objective  plane. 


250 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  112. 


GROP WK 
OPR 
M 


(Major  Right  Oblique  -R,  U)+PKB6  +  PKKt5  +  PKR3 
+  PQR3  +  KKR2. 

V  /.  0  P. 

D 

Strategic  Line  of  Operation. 

GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE  EN  APPUI  WITH 
MINOR   CROCHET. 


FIG.  202 


(Black.) 


'tiw/M 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  Black  has  not  time  even  to  attempt  to  attack  the  White 
salient,  which  on  this  account  is  well  secured,  even  without  the  protec- 
tion of  the  crochet. 


GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


251 


FORMULA   No.  113. 


GRO  A  W  J 
OPL 
M 


(Major  Eight  Oblique  -  R,  Q,  U)+PKB6  +  PKKt6  +  PKR 
+  PQKt4  +  KKR2  +  Kt  Q  B  5. 

V  /.  0  P. 

D 

Strategic  Line  of  Operation. 

GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI  WITH 
MAJOR  CROCHET. 


FIG.  203. 


(Slack.) 


(White.) 


MAXIM.  —  White  may  attack  either  by  the  right  or  by  the  left,  accord- 
ing to  whichever  flank  presents  the  most  desirable  line  of  operations. 


252 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  114. 


GROP W J 
OPL 
M 


(Major  Right  Oblique  -  R,  Q,  U)  +  P  K  B  6  +  P  K  Kt  5  +  P  K  R  3 
+  P  Q  Kt  4  +  Kt  Q  B  5. 

V  /.  O  P. 
D 

Strategic  Line  of  Operation. 

GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE  EN  APPUI  WITH 
MAJOR  CROCHET. 


Fia.  204. 


(Black.) 


mm 


, B—^JSM^ 

if     B 
— J 


(TTAzYe.) 

MAXIM.  —  The  attack  on  the  right  is  merely  supplementary  to  the 
attack  by  the  crochet  aligned. 


GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 


253 


FORMULA   No.  115. 

G  R  O  C  A 

OPL 

M 


{Major  Right  Oblique  -R,  Q,U)+PKB6  +  PQKt4+PQR4 

+  Kt  Q  B  5.  

V^  X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 
D 


/.  Q  R  5  QRP  +  Q  R  6  Q  R  P. 

GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  WITH  CROCHET  ALIGNED. 

FIG.  205.  (Black.) 


(White.-) 

MAXIM.  —  White  should  remain  passive  on  the  right,  and  attack  by  the 
advance  of  the  Q  R  P  to  Q  R  6. 


254 


THE  GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA  No.  116. 


GROP WC A 


OPL 
M 


(Major  Right  Oblique  -R,  Q,  U)  +  PKB6  +  PKKt5  +  PQKt4 


\    X  B.  Q  Kt  P. 
D 


If  Strategic  Line  of  Operation  then  .-.  Q  R  5  Q  R  P,  Q  R  6  Q  R  P. 
If  Logistic  Line  of  Operation  then  .•.  K  Kt  6  K  Kt  P. 


GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE  EN  APPUI  WITH 
CROCHET  ALIGNED. 


FIG.  206. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  White  should  merely  maintain  his  position  of  advantage  on 
the  right  and  attack  by  the  crochet  aligned,  unless  an  immediate  line  of 
operations  is  presented,  when  it  always  must  at  once  be  accepted. 


GRAND  LEFT   OBLIQUE. 

Properly  constructed,  this  front  constitutes  a  winning 
superiority  in  position  in  all  situations  wherein  the  ob- 
jective plane  is  located  on  the  Queen's  wing. 


256 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FIG.  207. 


FORMULA   No.  117. 

GLO 
OPL^ 

M 

Major  Left  Oblique  +  P  Q  B  6. 
\J  .'.  Objective  Plane. 

D 

Strategic  Line  of  Operation. 

GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 

(Black.) 


(White.-) 

MAXIM.  —  What  has  been  said  in  regard  to  the  grand  fronts  by  the 
right  applies  equally  to  the  grand  fronts  by  the  left.  Support  the  B  P 
before  occupying  the  point  B  6,  if  that  point  is  defended  by  adverse 
pieces. 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


257 


FORMULA  No.  118. 


Major  Left  Oblique  +  PQB6  +  PKK3. 

\j  /.  Objective  Plane. 

D 


Strategic  Line  of  Operation. 

GRAND  LEFT   OBLIQUE   WITH  MINOR   CROCHET. 

FIG.  208.  (Slack.) 


(White.) 


MAXIM.  —  If  the  minor  crochet  is  formed,  so  much  the  better ;  but  it 
is  superfluous  after  the  occupation  of  the  strategetic  objective. 


258 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  119. 


GLO  J 

OP  R  ' 
M 


(Major  Left  Oblique  -R,  U)  +  PQB6  +  PKKt4  +  KtKB5. 

V  X  B.  K  KtP. 

D 


V  K  R  4  KRP. 

GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE   WITH  MAJOR  CROCHET. 

FIG.  209.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM. —  Form  the  crochet  aligned  and  attack  with  the  K  R  P.  Never 
be  deterred  from  this  process  unless  you  can  accurately  calculate  the 
checkmate  of  the  adverse  K,  or  the  decisive  gain  of  material. 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


259 


FORMULA  No.  120. 

G  L  O  A  W 
OPL      < 
M 


(Major  Left  Oblique  -R,U)  +  PQB6  +  PQKt6  +  PQ 
+  KRQBl+QRQKtl+KQR2. 

\j  .'.  Objective  Plane. 
D 


Strategic  Line  of  Operation. 

GRAND  LEET  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI. 
FIG.  210.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  Exchange  the  pawns  and  open  the  adverse  K  to  the  attack 
of  the  White  pieces,  or  hold  the  position  and  concentrate  upon  the  objec- 
tive plane. 


260 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  121. 


GLOP  W 
OPL 
M 


(Major  Left  Oblique  —  K,  U)+PQB6  +  PQKt5 
+  K  R  Q  B  1  +  Q  R  Q  Kt  1  +  K  Q  R  2. 

V'  •'.  Objective  Plane. 

r> 


Strategic  Line  of  Operation. 

GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE  EN  APPUI. 
FIG.  211.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM. — This  is  one  of  the  finest  formations  known  in  grand  tactics. 
Black  is  helpless.  This  position  should  be  White's  model  in  all  lines  of 
manoeuvre  against  an  objective  plane  located  on  the  left. 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


261 


FORMULA   No.  122. 

G  L  O  P  W  K 
OPL 

M 

(Major  Left  Oblique  -R,U)+PQB6  +  PQKt5  +  PQR3 

+  PKR3  +  KR  Q  B  1  +  Q  R  Q  Kt  1  +  K  Q  R  2. 

V/  Objective  Plane. 

D 

Strategic  Line  of  Operation. 

GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE  EN  APPUI 
WITH  MINOR  CROCHET. 

PIG.  212. 


(White.) 

MAXIM. — The  crochet  is  well  to  have,  but  is  not  indispensable  in  this 
situation. 

All  grand  fronts  which  are  directed  by  the  right  or  by  the  left  consti- 
tute a  winning  superiority  in  position,  all  else  being  equal. 


262 


THE  GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  123. 

G  L  O  A  W  K 
OPL 
M 


(Major  Left  Oblique  -R,U)  +  PQB6  +  PQKt6  +  PQR3 

+  QRQKtl+KQR2. 


V  /.  Objective  Plane. 

D 

Strategic  Line  of  Operation. 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI  WITH 
MINOR  CROCHET. 


FIG.  213. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  Black  can  do  nothing  on  the  right.  Long  before  he  can  avail 
of  his  occupation  of  the  logistic  horizon,  the  objective  plane  will  be  com- 
manded by  White. 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


263 


FORMULA   No.    124. 

• 

G  L  Q  P  W  J 
OPR < 
M 


(Major  Left  Oblique  -  R,  U)+PQB6-f-PQKt5 
+  P  K  Kt  4  +  Kt  K  B  5  +  K  Q  R  2. 
V/  X  B.  K  Kt  P. 
D 


/.  K  R  4  K  R  P. 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE  EN  POTENCE   EN  APPUI  WITH 
MAJOR  CROCHET. 


FIG.  214. 


(Slack.) 


(White.') 
MAXIM.  —  Attack  with  the  crochet  aligned     P  —  K  R  4  is  the  move. 


264 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  125. 


GLOAWJ 
OPL 
M 


(Major  Left  Oblique  -  R,  U)  +  PQB6  +  PQKt6  +  PQR3 


V  /.  Objective  Plane. 
D 


If  Strategic  Line  of  Operation  then  /.  K  R  4  K  R  P. 
If  Logistic  Line  of  Operation  then  .-.  Q  B  1  K  R. 


GRAND   LEFT  OBLIQUE  ALIGNED  EN  APPUI  WITH 
MAJOR  CROCHET. 


FIG.  215. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  Attack  by  the  left,  if  a  line  of  operations  exists ;  otherwise, 
form  the  crochet  aligned. 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE. 


265 


FORMULA   No.  126. 


G  L  Q  C  A 
OPR 
M 


(Major  Left  Oblique  -R,  U)+PQB6  +  PKKt4  +  PKR4 
+  QRQBl  +  KQKtl. 

\/  X  B.  K  Kt  P. 
D 


.'.  K  R  5  K  R  P,  K  R  6  K  R  P. 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE  WITH  CROCHET  ALIGNED. 

FIG.  216.  (Black.) 


Ill1 


m 

I 


(White.} 
MAXIM.  —  Attack  by  the  advance  of  the  R  P  to  R  6. 


266 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  127. 


GLOP WC A 


OPR 
M 


(Major  Left  Oblique  -  R,  U)+PQB6  +  PQKt5 


X  B.  K  Kt  P. 
D 


K  R  P  KR5,  K  R  P  K  R  6. 

GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE   EN  POTENCE   EN  APPUI  WITH 
CROCHET  ALIGNED. 


FIG.  217. 


(Black.) 


(White.) 
MAXIM.  —  Attack  by  the  advance  of  the  R  P  to  R  6. 


GRAND  RIGHT   OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 


This  front,  properly  constructed,  establishes  Black  with 
the  superiority  in  position. 


268 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  128. 

GROR^ 
OPR 
M 


(Major  Right  Oblique  Refused  -  R,  K,  U)  +  P  K  Kt  6  +  K  R  K  Kt  1 
+  QRKB1  +  KKR1. 

V  /.  G  R  0  A. 
D 


.-.  K  5  KP,  K  B  6  KB  P. 

GRAND  RIGHT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 

Black. 
FIG.  218.  (Black.) 


•  i 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  is  the  best  front  that  Black  can  hope  for,  and  better 
than  he  ever  can  get  if  White  plays  properly. 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 


This  front,  properly  constructed,  establishes  a  win- 
ning superiority  in  position  as  against  the  logistic 
horizon  ;  but  it  is  inferior  to  either  the  grand  right  or 
the  grand  left  obliques. 


270 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  129. 

GLOR 

OPR,OPC,OPL^ 
M 


(Major  Left  Oblique  Refused  —  R,  U)  +  P  Q  Kt  6 
V/  /.  G  L  O  R  A. 

D 

Q  K  4  QRP,  Q  R  5  Q  R  P,  Q  R  6  Q  R  P. 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE   REFUSED. 

White. 
FIG.  219.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  Black  should  attack  by  the  major  right  oblique,  and  en- 
deavor to  obtain  command  of  the  objective  plane  while  White  is  laboriously 
moving  against  the  logistic  horizon. 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED.  271 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE  EEFUSED. 

Black. 
FIG.  220.  (Black.) 


£ 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  — This  front  is  not  desirable,  as  a  rule,  unless  it  can  be  aligned 
without  difficulty.  Consequently  it  is  far  better  to  echelon  the  major 
front  and  proceed  by  the  major  left  enceinte  refused. 


272 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  130. 

GLQRP 

O  P  R,  O  P  C,  O  P  L^ 
M 


(Major  Left  Oblique  Refused  -  R,  U)  +  PQKt6  +  PQR5. 
V/ .'.  G  L  O  R  A. 

D 
.-.  Q  R  6  QRP. 

GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED  EN  POTENCE. 

White. 
FIG.  221.  (Black.) 


\ 


(White.) 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 


273 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQtlE  REFUSED  EN  POTENCE. 

Black. 
FIG.  222.  (Black.) 


i 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  front  will  pierce  the  adverse  wing,  but  its  weakness  is 
that  it  has  not  the  direction  of  the  objective  plane. 


274 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FORMULA   No.  131. 

GLOR  A 
O  P  R,  0  P  C,  0  P  L^ 

M 


(Major  Left  Oblique  Refused  -  R,  U)  +  P  Q  Kt  6  +  P  Q  R  6. 

^  .'.  Logistic  Horizon. 

D 

Logistic  Line  of  Operation. 

GRAND  LEFT   OBLIQUE   REFUSED  AND  ALIGNED. 


FIG.  223. 


White. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED. 


275 


GRAND  LEFT  OBLIQUE  REFUSED  AND  ALIGNED. 

Black. 
FIG.  224.  (Black.) 


(White.) 

MAXIM.  —  This  front  is  much  more  favorable  to  Black  than  to  White. 
It  is  defective  inasmuch  as  while  it  is  bound  to  penetrate  to  the  logistic 
horizon,  this  event  does  not  of  itself  win  the  game. 


LESSEE    LOGISTICS. 


Lesser  Logistics  treats  of  those  movements  of  forces 
.which  are  contained  in  lines  of  Mobilization  and  in  lines 
of  Development. 


LESSER  LOGISTICS. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  In  the  construction  of  a  minor  oblique,  so  deploy 
that  each  pawn  and  each  piece  may  reach  its  proper 
post  in  one  move,  whether  the  resultant  strategic  front 
takes  direction  either  to  the  right  or  to  the  left. 

II.  In  the  construction  of  a  major  oblique,  so  deploy 
that  each  pawn  and  each  piece  may  reach  its  proper 
post  in  one  move,  whether  the  resultant  strategic  front 
takes  direction  either  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  except  : 

In  the  major  right  oblique,  the  K  P,  K  B  P,  and  Q  Kt 
may  each  be  moved  twice,  and  in  the  major  left  oblique 
the  Q  P,  Q  B  P,  and  K  Kt  may  be  moved  twice. 

III.  In  the  construction  of  a  grand  oblique,  so  deploy 
that  each  pawn  and  each  piece  may  reach  its  proper  post 
in  one  move,  whether  the  resultant  strategic  front  takes 
direction  either  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  except : 

In  the  grand  right  oblique  the  K  P  and  Q  Kt  may 
each  be  moved  twice,  and  the  K  B  P  may  be  moved  three 
times ;  and  in  the  grand  left  oblique  the  Q  P  and  K  Kt 
may  each  be  moved  twice,  and  the  K  B  P  may  be  moved 
three  times. 


LOGISTICS  OF  THE  QRP. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left,  and  in  all 
single  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  the  QRP, 
if  deployed,  should  be  posted  at  Q  R  3. 

II.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left  refused, 
and  in  all  double  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right, 
the  Q  R  P,  if  deployed,  should  be  posted  at  Q  R  4. 

III.  The   QRP   should   never   be   deployed   in    any 
strategic  front  directed  by  the  right  refused. 

The  Q  R  P  is  the  guardian  of  the  extreme  Queen's 
wing.  Its  duty  is  to  prevent  an  adverse  piece  from 
occupying  Q  Kt  3,  and  especially  to  prevent  the  adverse 
QRP  from  occupying  the  point  Q  R  1. 

But  it  is  not  responsible  for  the  preservation  of  both 
these  points  against  a  simultaneous  attack  of  the  hostile 
QRP  and  another  adverse  piece,  and  to  suffer  the 
Q  R  P  to  be  thus  assailed,  is,  all  else  being  equal,  a 
serious  error. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  and  in 
which  the  objective  plane  is  located  on  the  centre  or  the 
King's  wing,  the  duties  of  the  QRP  are  absolutely  con- 
fined to  the  defence  of  the  Q  R  file,  or  the  points  Q  Kt  3 
and  Q  Kt  4.  For  the  fulfilment  of  this  duty  it  is  best 
posted  at  Q  R  2  or  at  Q  R  3,  and  its  removal  from  these 
points  is  an  error,  entailing  loss  of  time  by  the  wasting 
of  moves  which  properly  should  be  devoted  to  develop- 
ing the  main  line  of  offence  and  of  defence. 


LOGISTICS   OF  THE  QRP.  281 

The  only  case  in  which  the  functions  of  the  Q  R  P  be- 
come offensive  is  when  a  tactical  defect  exists  in  the 
adverse  position,  whereby  the  advance  of  the  Q  R  P 
ensures  the  gain  of  adverse  material.  In  all  such  cases, 
all  else  being  equal,  the  neglect  to  at  once  assume  the 
offensive  with  the  Q  R  P  is  an  error. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  of  operations  directed  by  the 
right,  and  in  which  the  objective  plane  is  located  on  the 
Queen's  wing,  the  functions  of  the  Q  R  P  are  defen- 
sive, only  when  it  is  needed  to  support  the  occupation  of 
the  point  Q  Kt  3  by  a  Kt  en  route  to  Q  B  5 ;  in  which  case 
the  Q  R  P  remains  at  Q  R  2,  so  that  in  case  an  adverse 
piece  captures  the  Kt  in  transitu  at  Q  Kt  3,  the  Q  R  P, 
by  retaking,  may  strengthen  the  strategic  front,  and  also 
open  the  Q  R  file  for  the  attack  by  the  R's  against  the 
objective  plane. 

In  all  other  cases  the  best  post  for  the  Q  R  P  is  at 
Q  R  5,  where  it  covers  the  Kt  posted  at  the  logistic  ob- 
jective from  the  attack  of  the  adverse  Q  Kt  P,  as,  if  the 
latter  is  advanced,  the  Q  R  P  at  once  exchanges,  thus 
opening  the  Q  R  file  for  the  action  of  the  R's. 

In  all  fronts  of  operations  not  refused  and  directed 
by  the  left,  the  objective  plane  being  located  on  the 
centre  or  on  the  King's  wing,  the  functions  of  the  Q  R  P 
are  absolutely  defensive,  and  its  movements  are  limited 
to  forming  the  en  appui. 

In  all  minor  strategic  fronts  of  operation  refused 
and  directed  by  the  left,  the  objective  plane  being  located 
either  upon  the  centre,  the  King's  wing,  or  the  Queen's 
wing,  the  functions  of  the  Q  R  P  are  absolutely  defen- 
sive, and  it  should  not  be  removed  from  Q  R  2,  and  such 
removal  is  an  error. 

In  all  major  fronts  of  operations  refused  and  directed 
by  the  left,  the  objective  plane  being  located  either  upon 


282  THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 

the  centre,  the  King's  wing,  or  the  Queen's  wing,  the 
functions  of  the  Q  R  P  are  absolutely  offensive,  and  it 
early  should  be  posted  at  Q  R  4. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  of  whatever  nature,  when  the 
opponent  has  made  a  tactical  error,  by  reason  of  which 
any  manoeuvre  of  the  Q  R  P  ensures  a  gain  in  material, 
such  manoeuvre,  all  else  being  equal,  is  true,  and  must 
always  and  at  once  be  made,  and  any  neglect  to  make 
such  manoeuvre  is  an  error. 

Whenever  the  opponent  has  established  a  major  front 
of  operations  by  the  left,  and  is  moving  on  a  compound 
line  of  manoeuvre  en  echelon  or  doubly  aligned,  then,  and 
in  this  case  only,  the  Q  R  P  should  be  advanced  to  Q  R  3, 
and  placed  en  crochet  in  the  minor,  major,  or  grand 
strategic  front  directed  by  the  right,  for  the  purpose  of 
covering  the  logistic  horizon. 


LOGISTICS  OF  THE  QKtP. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts   directed   by  the  left,  and 
in  all  double  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  and 
in  all  major  and  grand  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the 
left  refused,  the  Q  Kt  P,  if  deployed,  should  be  posted  at 
Q  Kt  4. 

II.  The    Q  Kt  P   never   should   be   deployed   in   any 
single  strategic  front  directed  by  the  right,  or  by  the 
right  refused,  or  in  any  minor  strategic  front  directed 
by  the  left. 

III.  In  a  minor  strategic  front  directed  by  the  left 
refused,    the    Q  Kt  P  always    should    be    deployed    at 
Q  Kt  3. 

The  Q  Kt  P  is  the  prime  component  part  of  the 
Queen's  wing.  Its  duty  is  to  support  or  to  cover  the 
Q  B  P,  and  to  co-operate  at  all  times  with  the  latter 
for  maintaining  the  integrity  of  the  strategic  front.  Its 
special  duty  is  to  prevent  the  adverse  Q  Kt  P  from  occu- 
pying the  point  Q  Kt  1,  to  prevent  the  adverse  Q  B  P 
from  attacking  the  Q  P  in  the  major  and  grand  right 
obliques,  and  to  sustain  the  Q  B  P  in  all  single  fronts  of 
operation  directed  by  the  right,  or  by  the  left,  or  by  the 
left  refused. 

Incidentally,  it  devolves  upon  the  Q  Kt  P  to  support 
the  point  Q  R  3.  But  while  its  duties  are  manifold,  it  is 
responsible  for  the  execution  of  only  one  at  a  time,  and 


284  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 

to  allow  the  points  which  it  guards  to  be  attacked  simul- 
taneously by  two  or  more  adverse  pieces,  is,  all  else  being 
equal,  an  error. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  the  func- 
tions of  the  Q  Kt  P  are  absolutely  defensive.  It  is  best 
posted  at  Q  Kt  2,  and  its  removal  from  that  post,  unless 
the  objective  plane  is  located  on  the  Queen's  wing,  is  an 
error  entailing  loss  of  time  by  the  wasting  of  a  move 
which  properly  should  be  devoted  to  developing  the  main 
line  of  offensive  or  defensive  operations,  and  by  seri- 
ously, and  frequently  fatally,  weakening  the  defensive 
resources  of  the  general  position  by  creating  a  defect 
in  the  strategic  front,  by  thus  uncovering  the  point. 
QB3. 

But  in  all  cases  wherein  the  objective  plane  is  located 
on  the  Queen's  wing,  the  proper  post  for  the  Q  Kt  P  is 
the  point  Q  Kt  4.  From  thence  it  protects  the  Q  P  from 
the  attack  of  the  adverse  Q  B  P,  and  is  in  a  situation  to 
retake  any  adverse  piece  which  may  capture  the  Kt  oc- 
cupying Q  B  5.  There  it  establishes  an  impregnable 
strategic  front,  and  opens  the  Q  Kt  file  for  the  action  of 
the  rooks  against  the  objective  plane. 

In  all  minor  strategic  fronts  refused  and  directed  by 
the  left,  the  functions  of  the  Q  Kt  P  are  absolutely  de- 
fensive, and  it  should  be  posted  at  Q  Kt  3,  in  support  of 
the  Q  B  P. 

In  all  major  strategic  fronts  refused  and  directed  by 
the  left,  whatever  the  location  of  the  objective  plane,  the 
proper  post  for  the  Q  Kt  P  is  Q  Kt  4,  in  support  of  the 
QBP. 

In  all  major  strategic  fronts  not  refused  and  directed 
by  the  left,  with  the  objective  plane  located  on  the  centre 
or  on  the  King's  wing,  the  proper  post  for  the  Q  Kt  P  is 
Q  Kt  4,  in  support  of  the  QBP. 


LOGISTICS  OF  THE   Q  Kt  P.  285 

In  all  major  strategic  fronts  not  refused  and  directed 
by  the  left,  the  movements  of  the  Q  Kt  P  are  limited  to 
the  formation  of  the  en  echelon. 

Errors  in  tactics  by  the  opponent  in  any  strategic 
front,  whereby  the  opportunity  to  gain  material  is  pre- 
sented, must  be  availed  of  by  the  Q  Kt  P.  But  all  such 
opportunities  must  be  cautiously  and  thoroughly  investi- 
gated, as  the  sacrifice  of  a  pawn,  and  often  of  a  piece,  is 
fully  compensated  for  by  the  elimination  of  the  support 
of  the  Q  Kt  P  from  the  strategic  front. 


LOGISTICS   OF   THE   QBP. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  the 
QBP  always  should  be  deployed  at  Q  B  3. 

II.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left  and  by 
the  left  refused,  the  Q  B  P  always  should  be  deployed  at 
QB4. 

III.  The  QBP  never  should  be  deployed  in  any  stra- 
tegic front  directed  by  the  right  refused. 

The  Q  B  P  is  the  corner-stone  in  all  strategic  fronts 
not  refused  which  are  directed  by  the  right,  whatever 
may  be  the  location  of  the  objective  plane,  and  for  purely 
defensive  purposes  it  is  the  most  important  factor  in  the 
strategic  front. 

The  duty  of  the  Q  B  P  is  to  support  the  Q  P  after  the 
establishment  of  the  latter  at  the  point  Q  4 ;  to  cover 
the  point  Q  Kt  4  from  occupation  by  the  hostile  Q  Kt  or 
K  B,  and  in  all  situations  wherein  the  objective  plane  is 
located  on  the  Queen's  wing,  to  support  the  Q  Kt  P  after 
the  latter  has  been  advanced  to  its  fourth  point.  Inci- 
dentally it  is  the  province  of  the  QBP  to  co-operate 
with  the  Q  Kt  P  to  cover  the  left  wing  of  the  general 
position,  to  prevent  the  adverse  Q  or  K  B  from  penetrat- 
ing the  centre  via  the  King's  major  diagonal,  and  to  pre- 
vent the  adverse  Q  Kt  from  acting  via  Q  4  or  Q  Kt  4, 
upon  the  point  Q  B  2,  at  which  point  there  originally 


LOGISTICS   OF  THE   Q  B  P.  287 

exists  a  tactical  defect  arising  from  the  relative  situation 
of  the  K  and  Q  R  in  the  normal  position. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  not  refused  and  directed  by  the 
right,  the  objective  plane  being  located  either  on  the 
centre,  on  the  King's  wing,  or  on  the  Queen's  wing, 
the  proper  post  for  the  Q  B  P  is  Q  B  3. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  refused  and  directed  by  the 
right,  the  proper  post  for  the  Q  B  P  is  Q  B  2,  and  it 
should  not  be  removed  from  this  post  until  such  time  as 
the  Q  P  has  either  been  advanced  to  Q  4  or  exchanged. 

In  all  minor  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left  or 
by  the  left  refused,  the  Q  B  P  should  be  posted  at  Q  B  4. 

In  all  major  and  grand  strategic  fronts  refused  and 
directed  by  the  left,  the  proper  post  for  the  Q  B  P  is 
QB5. 

Errors  by  which  the  opponent  exposes  himself  to  the 
loss  of  material  must,  all  else  being  equal,  at  once  be 
availed  of  by  the  Q  B  P.  But  these  opportunities  must 
be  regarded  with  the  greatest  circumspection,  as  the  sac- 
rifice of  a  pawn,  and  even  of  a  piece,  is  frequently  justi- 
fiable for  the  purpose  of  eliminating  the  support  of  the 
Q  B  P  from  the  strategic  front. 


LOGISTICS  OF  THE  QP. 

PKINCIPLE. 

I.  The  Q  P  always  should  be  deployed  at  Q  4  in  all 
strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  or  by  the  left,  or 
by  the  left  refused. 

II.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right  re- 
fused, the  Q  P  always  should  be  deployed  at  Q  3. 

The  Q  P  is  the  centre  of  all  strategic  fronts  not  re- 
fused which  are  directed  by  the  right.  In  all  such 
positions  the  Q  P  always  should  be  posted  at  and  be 
maintained  at  Q  4.  Failure  to  do  this  is  an  error,  and 
to  advance  the  Q  P  from  this  post,  except  on  a  line  of 
operations,  or  in  a  change  of  front  from  the  right  oblique 
to  the  major  or  grand  left  oblique,  is  usually  a  fatal 
error,  which  should  lose  the  game  with  correct  play  on 
the  part  of  the  opponent.  This  likewise  applies  to  all 
fronts  of  operations  which  are  refused  and  directed  by 
the  left. 

All  else  being  equal,  the  Q  P  may  usually  be  ex- 
changed without  detriment,  provided  it  can  be  replaced 
by  a  Kt,  and  any  opportunity  to  gain  material  presented 
to  it  through  tactical  errors  by  the  opponent  may,  under 
like  conditions,  be  availed  of  without  fear. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  refused  and  directed  by  the 
right,  the  proper  post  for  the  Q  P  is  the  point  Q  3. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  not  refused  and  directed  by  the 
left,  the  proper  post  for  the  Q  P  is  Q  5.  The  neglect  to 
so  post  the  Q  P  is  an  error,  and  its  removal  from  this 


LOGISTICS  OF  THE  QP.  289 

post  is  frequently  a  fatal  error,  which,  with  correct  play 
on  the  part  of  the  opponent,  should  lose  the  game. 

In  all  mobilizations  wherein  the  strategic  front  is  to 
be  directed  by  the  left,  the  preservation  of  the  Q  P  is  of 
the  highest  importance. 


LOGISTICS   OF   THE  KP. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  The  K  P  always  should  be  deployed  at  K  4  in  all 
strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  or-  by  the  left,  or 
by  the  right  refused. 

II.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed*by  the  left  refused, 
the  K  P  should  be  deployed  at  K  3. 

The  logistics  of  the  KP  are  identical  to  the  logis- 
tics of  the  Q  P,  as  this  pawn  holds  the  same  relations  to 
the  fronts  directed  by  the  right  as  the  Q  P  does  to  those 
fronts  directed  by  the  left,  and  to  those  fronts  directed 
by  the  left  as  the  Q  P  does  to  those  fronts  directed  by 
the  .right. 


LOGISTICS   OF   THE  KB  P. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  or  by 
the   right  refused,  the  K  B  P,  if   deployed,  should   be 
posted  at  K  B  4. 

II.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed   by  the  left,  the 
K  B  P  always  should  be  deployed  at  K  B  3. 

III.  The  K  B  P  never  should  be  deployed  in  any  front 
directed  by  the  left  refused. 

The  K  B  P  is  the  complement  of  the  Q  B  P,  and  the 
logistics  of  one  are  identical  to  those  of  the  other. 

But  the  K  B  P  is  especially  sensitive  to  strategic  con- 
ditions, inasmuch  as  it  is  a  chief  factor  for  the  defence 
of  the  prime  strategic  point,  whether  on  the  centre  or 
castled  K  R.  Consequently,  by  its  advance,  either  by 
one  or  by  two  points,  the  strategic  radii  are  frequently 
exposed  to  the  attack  of  the  adverse  Q  or  K  B  with 
detrimental  effect. 

This  circumstance  peculiarly  affects  the  defensive 
power  of  the  K  B  P,  particularly  when  the  kindred  King 
is  located  on  the  centre,  and  consequently  one  or  more 
pawns,  or  even  pieces,  may  properly  be  sacrificed  to 
eliminate  the  protection  which  the  K  B  P  affords  to  the 
strategic  objective  in  the  normal  position  of  the  objective 
plane. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  the  K  B  P 
should  be  posted  at  the  point  K  B  4  as  soon  as  possible 
after  the  K  has  castled  K  R. 


LOGISTICS   OF  THE  KKtP. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  and  in 
all  double  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left,  and  in  all 
major  and  grand  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right 
refused,  the  K  Kt  P,  if  deployed,  should  be  posted  at 
KKt4. 

II.  The   K  Kt  P   never   should   be   deployed   in   any 
strategic  front  directed  by  the  left  refused,  nor  in  any 
minor  strategic  front  directed  by  the  right  refused. 

The  logistics  of  the  K  Kt  P  are  identical  to  the  logis- 
tics of  the  Q  Kt  P,  and  the  considerations  which  govern 
the  Q  Kt  P  apply  equally  to  the  K  Kt  P. 


LOGISTICS   OF  THE  KRP. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  Ill  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  and  in 
all  single  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left,  the  K  R  P, 
if  deployed,  should  be  posted  at  K  R  3. 

II.  In  all  double  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left, 
the  K  R  P,  if  deployed,  should  be  posted  at  K  R  4. 

III.  The   K  R  P   never   should   be   deployed   in  any 
refused  front. 

The  logistics  of  the  K  R  P  are  identical  with  the  logis- 
tics of  the  Q  R  P,  and  the  considerations  which  govern 
the  latter  apply  equally  to  the  K  R  P. 


LOGISTICS   OF   THE  WHITE   KKt. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right  refused 
or  by  the  left  refused,  the  white  K  Kt  always  should  be 
deployed  at  K  B  3. 

II.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  either  by  the  right 
or  by  the  left,  in  which  the  supporting  parallel  is  com- 
pleted, the  white  K  Kt  should  be  deployed  at  K  2  ;  and  in 
all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right  or  by  the  left, 
in  which  the   supporting   parallel   is   incompleted,  the 
white  K  Kt  should  be  deployed  at  K  B  3. 

The  white  K  Kt  is  best  posted  at  K  2  previous  to  the 
advance  of  the  K  B  P  to  its  fourth  in  all  strategic  fronts 
directed  by  the  left  wherein  Black  has  adopted  the  close 
defence,  i.e.  has  made  any  other  move  than  IP  — K4 
in  reply  to  White's  initial  deployment  of  the  K  P  two 
squares.  But  in  all  cases  wherein  Black  answers  IP  — 
K  4  by  1  P  -  K  4,  the  best  post  for  the  K  Kt  is  at  K  B  3, 
and  the  response  of  2  K  Kt  —  B  3  is  White's  best  second 
move. 

The  chief  functions  of  the  white  K  Kt  when  deployed 
at  K  B  3  are,  to  support  the  advance  of  the  Q  P  to  its 
fourth,  to  menace  the  black  K  P  at  K  4,  to  sustain  the 
points  K  Kt  5  and  K  R  4  which  are  menaced  by  the 
hostile  Q,  and  to  cover  the  point  K  B  2  from  any  attack 
by  the  adverse  Q  or  R's  along  the  K  B  vertical. 


LOGISTICS   OF  THE    WHITE  K  Kt.  295 

Furthermore,  Black  is  thus  compelled  oil  his  second 
move,  either  directly  or  indirectly,  to  protect  his  P  at 
K  4,  and  should  he  commit  an  error  either  in  strategy  or 
tactics,  in  so  doing  the  white  K  Kt  is  finely  posted  for 
quick  and  vigorous  co-operation  in  a  possible  strategic  or 
tactical  line  of  operations,  by  occupying  at  once  either 
the  points  K  5,  K  Kt  5,  or  K  R  4. 

Should  the  strategic  front  take  the  form  of  the  major 
right  oblique  minus  Q  P,  the  proper  post  for  the  K  Kt  is 
Q  4.  Should  it  take  the  form  of  the  major  left  oblique, 
the  K  Kt  should  retire  to  Q  2  —  never  to  K  1  —  in  order 
to  permit  the  advance  of  K  B  P  to  K  B  3. 

In  the  minor  right  oblique  the  proper  post  for  the 
K  Kt  is  at  K  5,  provided  the  kindred  K  P  has  been  ex- 
changed ;  but  so  easy  is  it  for  Black  to  render  this  point 
untenable  to  the  white  K  Kt,  that  such  occupation  is  sel- 
dom justifiable  previous  to  the  commission  of  a  strategic 
error  by  Black.  Whenever  White  opens  with  the  close 
game,  the  white  K  Kt  should  always,  and  at  once,  be 
deployed  at  K  B  3  to  cover  the  P  at  K  B  2. 


LOGISTICS  OF  THE  BLACK  KKt. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  black  K  Kt  always  should  be  deployed  at  K  B  3. 

The  black  K  Kt  never  should  be  deployed  at  any  other 
point  than  K  B  3.  If,  however,  through  an  error  of  the 
opponent,  Black  has  been  enabled  to  establish  the  major 
right  or  the  minor  left  oblique,  then,  and  in  this  case 
only,  the  black  Kt  may  be  deployed  at  K  2. 

For  the  special  province  of  the  black  K  Kt  is  to  pre- 
vent the  white  Q  from  occupying  the  points  K  Kt  4  and 
K  R  5,  and  to  cover  the  point  K  B  2  against  any  attack 
via  the  K  B  vertical.  This  point  K  B  3  never  can 
safely  be  denuded  of  the  presence  of  a  Kt  so  long  as  the 
prime  strategetic  point  is  located  on  the  centre  or  the 
King's  side,  and  Black  has  not  established  a  major  front 
of  operations  by  the  right. 

Consequently  it  is  evident  that  it  is  a  serious  strategic 
error  for  Black  to  exchange  his  K  Kt,  or  to  interrupt  in 
any  way  its  line  of  communication  with  the  point  K  B  3, 
until  he  has  first  established  his  game  as  fully  equal  to 
White's,  and  has  initiated  an  offensive  line  of  develop- 
ment by  the  right,  so  long  as  his  K  remains  on  the 
centre  or  has  castled  K  R.  Whenever  White  has  adopted 
a  close  opening,  or  Black  a  close  defence,  the  black  K  Kt 
always  should  be  deployed  at  K  B  3. 


LOGISTICS  OF  THE  WHITE   QKt. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right  refused 
or  by  the  left  refused,  the  white  Q  Kt  always  should  be 
deployed  at  Q  B  3. 

II.  In  all  strategic  fronts  in  which  the  kindred  K  Kt 
is  deployed  at  K  2,  the  white  Q  Kt  always  should  be 
deployed  at  Q  2. 

In  all  the  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  in 
which  the  Q  P  is  located  at  Q  4,  the  white  Q  Kt  should 
be  deployed  at  Q  2.  But  in  all  such  fronts  in  which  the 
Q  P  is  absent,  the  Q  Kt  is  best  deployed  at  Q  B  3. 

Should  the  strategic  front  take  the  direction  by  the 
left,  the  Q  Kt  always  should  be  deployed  at  Q  B  3  ;  but 
such  deployment  usually  should  not  take  place  previous 
to  the  advance  of  the  Q  B  P  to  its  fourth,  if  the  Q  P  is 
on  the  board. 

Consequently  it  is  obvious  that  the  deployment  of  the 
Q  Kt,  while  extremely  simple,  nevertheless  requires 
accurate  timing,  and  that  it  should  be  delayed  until  the 
permanent  location  of  the  objective  plane  is  determined, 
and  until  such  time  as  the  Kt  can  be  brought  in  one 
move  to  his  proper  post. 

Whenever  the  opponent  has  adopted  the  close  de- 
fence to  the  open  game,  by  replying  to  1  P  —  K  4  by 
any  other  move  than  1  P  —  K  4,  and  especially  if  Black 
has  weakened  his  centre  or  Queen's  wing  by  one 


298  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 

or  more  strategic  errors,  the  Q  Kt  should  be  quickly 
deployed  at  Q  B  3  to  co-operate  with  kindred  pieces  in 
preventing  Black  from  eliminating  such  defects  from  his 
strategic  front.  Thus,  if  Black  plays  IP  —  Q4,  orlP- 
K  3,  or  1  P  -  Q  B  4,  the  Q  Kt  should  be  deployed  at 
Q  B  3  ;  but  if  Black  plays  1  P  -  Q  Kt  3,  or  1  P-  K  B  3, 
or  1  P  -  K  Kt  3,  or  1  K  Kt  -  B  3,  or  1  Q  Kt  -  B  3,  or 
1  P  -  Q  3,  the  Q  Kt  should  be  deployed  at  Q  2,  unless  the 
white  strategic  front  takes  the  direction  of  the  left,  in 
which  case  the  white  Q  Kt  is  best  deployed  at  Q  B  3  after 
the  advance  of  P  to  Q  B  4. 

Whenever  White  opens  with  the  close  game,  the  white 
Q  Kt  always  should  be  deployed  at  Q  B  3,  but  never 
before  the  Q  B  P  has  been  first  deployed  to  its  fourth 
square. 


LOGISTICS   OF   THE  BLACK   Q  Kt. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  black  Q  Kt  always  should  be  deployed  at  Q  B  3. 

The  black  Q  Kt  always  should  be  deployed  at  Q  B  3, 
whether  in  the  open  or  in  the  close  game,  but  in  the 
latter  it  never  should  be  deployed  previous  to  the  ad- 
vance of  the  Q  B  P  to  its  fourth. 

In  case,  however,  the  opponent  has  made  such  errors 
as  permit  Black  to  establish  the  minor  or  major  right 
oblique,  then,  and  in  that  case  only,  the  black  Q  Kt  may 
be  deployed  at  Q  2. 


LOGISTICS  OF  THE  WHITE  KB. 

• 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  the 
white  K  B  is  best   deployed  at  Q  B  4  if  the  objective 
plane  is  permanently  located  on  the  centre,  otherwise  it 
is  best  deployed  at  Q  3. 

II.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left  refused, 
the  white  K  B  always  should  be  deployed  at  K  2. 

III.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left,  the 
white  K  B  always  should  be  deployed  at  Q  3. 

The  K  B  is  the  chief  bishop  in  all  lines  of  mobiliza- 
tion which  are  directed  by  the  right,  and  it  is  hardly  less 
valuable  than  the  Q  B  in  all  lines  of  mobilization  which 
are  directed  by  the  left.  It  is  a  strong  piece  in  every 
situation,  and  should  not,  without  due  regard,  be  ex- 
changed for  a  Kt,  the  adverse  Q  B,  or  even  for  R.  The 
points  at  which  the  K  B  is  properly  to  be  deployed  in  the 
open  game  are  Q  3,  Q  B  4,  or  Q  Kt  5. 

Whenever  Black  has  made  one  or  more  strategic 
errors,  and  has  exposed  the  objective  plane  to  decisive 
attack  by  a  simple  strategic  line  of  operations,  then  the 
proper  post  for  the  K  B  is  at  Q  B  4,  where  he  co-operates 
to  the  best  advantage  with  the  Q  at  K  R  5,  and  the  Kt  at 
K  5,  K  Kt  5,  or  K  R  4,  in  the  attack  of  the  objective 
plane. 


LOGISTICS  OF  THE    WHITE  KB.  301 

But  in  all  positions  wherein  Black  has  made  no  error, 
the  correct  post  for  the  KB  is  at  Q  3 ;  and  this  is  its 
proper  post  whatever  the  location  of  the  prime  strategic 
point,  or  whatever  the  location  of  the  objective  plane. 

Whenever  the  objective  plane  is  situated  on  the  centre, 
and  a  tactical  defect  exists  in  the  black  position,  the 
white  K  B  can  frequently,  with  much  effect,  be  posted  at 
QKt5. 

But  in  all  cases  whenever  the  white  K  B  is  forced  to 
retire  from  either  Q  Kt  5  or  Q  B  4,  he  should  always  re- 
tire to  Q  3,  unless,  on  account  of  a  strategic  or  a  tactical 
error  by  Black,  the  command  of  the  black  K  Kt  major 
diagonal  is  an  essential  factor  of  the  line  of  action. 

In  the  close  game  the  best  post  for  the  white  K  B  is 
always  at  K  2,  as  it  is  his  specific  duty  to  defend  the 
K  Kt  posted  at  K  B  3  against  the  attack  of  the  hostile 
Q  B  posted  at  Q  Kt  2,  and  its  functions  are  primarily 
defensive. 


LOGISTICS  OF  THE  BLACK  KB. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right  refused, 
the  black  K  B  always  should  be  deployed  at  Q  B  4. 

II.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left  refused, 
the  black  K  B  always  should  be  deployed  at  K  2. 

The  black  K  B  is  one  of  the  most  important  factors 
in  the  early  operations  of  Black,  and  always  should  be 
posted  as  soon  as  possible'  at  the  point  Q  B  4,  and  never 
should  be  deployed  otherwise  in  all  those  strategic  fronts 
which  result  from  1  P  —  K  4  on  the  part  of  Black. 

The  black  K  B  never  should  be  posted  at  K  2  or  Q  3 
in  the  open  game,  and  as  a  rule  it  should  be  deployed  at 
Q  B  4  as  soon  as  may  be  after  the  occupation  of  the 
point  K  B  3  by  the  black  K  Kt,  and  even  before  that,  if 
opportunity  serves. 

The  correct  point  of  retreat  for  the  black  K  B  in  the 
open  game  is  the  point  Q  Kt  3,  and  it  is  a  serious  disad- 
vantage to  be  compelled  to  retire  this  piece  to  K  2. 

In  the  close  game  the  functions  of  the  black  K  B,  like 
those  of  the  white  K  B,  are  defensive  in  character,  and 
it  is  best  posted  at  the  point  K  2  in  support  of  the  Kt 
posted  at  K  B  3. 


LOGISTICS   OF  THE  WHITE  Q  B. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right  or  by 
the  left,  the  white  Q  B  always  should  be  deployed  at  K  3. 

II.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left  refused, 
the  white  Q  B  always  should  be  deployed  at  Q  Kt  2. 

In  all  the  openings  which  result  from  1  P  —  K  4  by 
White,  the  proper  deployment  of  the  white  Q  B  is  of 
high  importance. 

The  functions  of  this  piece  are  entirely  defensive,  and 
its  only  correct  post  is  at  K  3 ;  and  this  is  true  of  the 
Q  B  in  all  strategic  fronts  of  the  open  game,  whether 
directed  by  the  right  or  by  the  left.  In  case  the  oppon- 
ent commits  errors  in  strategy  or  in  tactics,  the  white 
Q  B  may  be  deployed  with  much  effect  at  K  Kt  5 ;  and  if 
Black  replies  to  1  P  -  K  4  by  1  P  -  Q  B  4,  the  Q  B  may 
often  be  deployed  at  K  B  4  with  much  effect,  especially 
if  by  this  process  the  adverse  K  P  can  be  compelled  to 
advance  to  its  fourth  point,  thus  leaving  the  adverse 
Q  P  at  Q  3,  which  point  has  been  already  converted 
into  an  uncovered  point  by  the  unscientific  advance  of 
the  black  Q  B  P,  and  is  thus  by  the  forced  advance  of 
the  K  P  converted  into  a  strategic  defect  which,  by  cor- 
rect play  on  the  part  of  White,  should  properly  cost 
Black  the  game. 

Whenever  the  Q  B  is  compelled  to  retreat  from  the 
points  K  B  4  or  K  Kt  5,  his  only  correct  point  of  retreat 


304  THE  GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 

is  K  3,  unless  by  reason  of  other  strategic  or  tactical 
errors  by  Black  he  is  most  properly  manoeuvred  on  the 
black  Queen's  major  diagonal,  in  which  case  he  may  re- 
tire to  KR4. 

In  the  close  game  the  white  Q  B  is  correctly  posted 
only  at  Q  Kt  2.  His  functions  are  in  all  such  cases  pri- 
marily offensive.  He  should  be  deployed  at  this  point 
as  early  as  possible,  and  the  student  is  warned  against  the 
fallacious  deployment  of  the  white  Q  B  at  either  K  B  4 
or  at  K  Kt  5  in  the  close  opening,  except  when  such 
deployment  is  dictated  by  the  principles  of  greater 
logistics. 


LOGISTICS   OF   THE  BLACK   Q  B. 

PKINCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right  refused, 
the  black  Q  B  always  should  be  deployed  at  K  3. 

II.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left  refused, 
the  black  Q  B  always  should  be  deployed  at  Q  Kt  2. 

The  functions  of  the  black  Q  B  in  the  close  game,  like 
those  of  the  white  Q  B,  are  primarily  offensive.  This 
piece  is  usually  best  deployed  at  Q  Kt  2,  and  always 
so  if  both  Q  P  and  Q  B  P  be  not  exchanged.  But  in  all 
cases  wherein  the  Q  P  and  the  Q  B  P  are  early  ex- 
changed, the  brack  Q  B  is  best  deployed  at  Q  2,  and 
thence  to  K  1.  Later,  if  the  black  strategic  front  takes 
the  form  of  the  minor  left  oblique,  the  best  post  for  the 
black  Q  B  is  the  point  K  B  2. 


LOGISTICS   OF   THE   WHITE   K  R. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  the 
white  K  R  should  be  deployed  at  K  B  1. 

II.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left  or  by 
the  left  refused,  the  white  K  R  should  be  deployed  at 
Ql. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  of  operation  which  are  directed 
by  the  right,  the  proper  post  for  the  K  R  is  the  point 
K  B  1.  But  in  case  the  prime  strategetic  point  is  perma- 
nently located  on  the  centre  or  Queen's  wing,  the  best 
post  for  the  K  R  is  either  K  Kt  1  or  K  R 1.  In  all  cases 
in  which  both  K  P  and  Q  P  have  been  exchanged,  the 
proper  post  for  the  K  R  is  the  point  K  1. 

Jn  the  close  game  the  best  post  for  the  K  R  is  the 
point  Q  1. 


LOGISTICS   OF   THE   BLACK  K  R. 

PEINCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right  refused, 
the  black  K  R  should  be  deployed  at  K  E  1. 

II.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left  refused, 
the  black  K  R  should  be  deployed  at  Q  1. 

In  all  defensive  situations  in  the  open  game,  the  cor- 
rect post  for  the  black  K  R  is  the  point  K  B  1,  as  it  thus 
defends  the  K  B  P,  and  supports  the  advance  of  the  latter 
to  its  fourth  square,  should  the  opportunity  to  do  so 
occur. 

In  the  close  game  the  only  proper  post  for  the  black 
K  R  is  the  point  Q  1. 

Whenever  the  offensive  has  been  assumed  by  Black, 
the  K  R  may  be  properly  manoeuvred  on  the  lines  laid 
down  for  the  manoeuvring  of  the  white  King's  rook4 


LOGISTICS   OF   THE   WHITE   Q  R. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  the 
white  Q  R  should  be  deployed  at  K  1. 

II.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left  or  by 
the  left  refused,  the  white  Q  R  should  be  deployed  at 
QB1. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  the  proper 
point  at  which  to  deploy  the  Q  R  is  the  point  K  1.  But 
if  the  Q  P  has  been  exchanged,  or  both  K  P  and  Q  P 
have  been  exchanged,  the  proper  point  at  which  to  deploy 
the  Q  R  is  the  point  Q  1. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  which  are  directed  by  the  left, 
the  only  correct  post  at  which  to  deploy  the  Q  R  is  the 
point  QB1. 


LOGISTICS   OF   THE   BLACK   Q  R. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right  refused, 
the  black  Q  R  should  be  deployed  at  K  1. 

II.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left  refused, 
the  black  Q  R  should  be  deployed  at  Q  B  1. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  of  operations  directed  toward 
the  right,  the  only  correct  post  for  the  Q  R  is  the  point 
K  1,  and  in  all  strategic  fronts  which  are  directed  by  the 
left,  the  only  correct  post  for  the  black  Q  R  is  the  point 
QB1. 

In  all  cases,  however,  in  which  Black  has  been  able  to 
assume  the  offensive,  the  black  Q  R  may  be  deployed  in 
the  same  manner  as  the  white  Q  R. 


LOGISTICS   OF  THE  WHITE   Q. 

PK1NCIPLE. 

I.  In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right  and  by 
the  left  refused,  the  white  Q  is  best  deployed  at  Q  2. 

II.  In  all.  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left,  the 
white  Q  is  best  deployed  at  K  2. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  of  operations  which  are  directed 
by  the  right,  the  Q  is  best  deployed  on  the  point  Q  2. 
She  may  also  be  deployed  at  Q  B  2,  but  such  deployment 
is  only  justified  by  a  strategic  or  a  tactical  error  of  the 
opponent. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  left,  the  Q  is 
best  deployed  at  K  2 ;  and,  in  fact,  in  these  situations  she 
may  not  properly  be  deployed  at  any  other  point. 

"Whenever  the  opponent  has  committed  one  or  more 
strategic  or  tactical  errors  in  the  early  opening,  and  es- 
pecially if  the  objective  plane  be  located  either  on  the 
centre  or  on  the  King's  side,  the  Q  may  frequently,  and 
with  much  effect,  be  deployed  at  K  B  3,  at  K  R  5,  or  at 
QR4. 

It  is  extremely  rare  that  the  Q  can  be  deployed  at 
either  Q  Kt  3,  or  at  K  Kt  4,  or  at  K  B  3,  to  any  lasting 
advantage ;  and  never  can  she  be  thus  deployed  if  the 
defensive  measures  taken  by  the  opponent  have  been 
scientifically  correct. 

In  the  close  game  the  Q  is  only  properly  deployed  at 
the  point  Q  2,  and  the  Q  is  never  properly  deployed  at 
K  1  or  at  Q  B  1,  except  when  by  such  deployment  one 
or  more  strategic  or  tactical  errors  on  the  part  of  the 
opponent  may  be  availed  of  to  the  most  advantage. 


LOGISTICS   OF   THE   BLACK   Q. 

PRINCIPLE. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right  refused 
or  by  the  left  refused,  the  black  Q  is  best  deployed  at 
Q2. 

In  all  strategic  fronts  directed  by  the  right,  the  Q 
is  best  deployed  at  Q  2 ;  and  in  all  strategic  fronts  di- 
rected by  the  left,  the  Q  is  best  deployed  at  K  2.  The 
Q  is  seldom  correctly  deployed  at  the  points  K  2,  Q  B  2, 
Q  Kt  3,  K  B  3,  almost  never  at  K  1  or  Q  B  1 ;  and  only 
gross  strategic  or  tactical  errors  render  her  deployment 
at  the  points  Q  R  4,  K  Kt  4,  or  K  R  5  feasible  and 
effective. 

Also  in  the  close  game  the  Q  is  best  deployed  at  the 
point  Q  2. 


LINES   OF   MANOEUVRE. 

A  Line  of  Manoeuvre  is  composed  of  those  movements  whereby  a 
given  force  augments  itself  to  the  greater  force  as  compared  to  the 
opposing  force. 

Lines  of  manoeuvre  are  divided  into  three  classes :  — 

I.     SIMPLE. 
II.     COMPOUND. 
III.     COMPLEX. 

PRINCIPLE. 

When  not  acting  on  a  line  of  operation,  always 
manoeuvre,  and  never  manoeuvre  otherwise  than  strate- 
gically, i.  e.  against  points ;  and  always  combine  with 
a  manoeuvre  that  deployment  or  development  which 
properly  is  in  sequence  in  the  given  situation. 

A  Simple  Line  of  Manoeuvre  is  composed  of  those 
movements  whose  object  is  to  occupy  a  given  point  with 
a  given  piece,  at  a  time  when  such  occupation  will  compel 
the  opponent  either  to  adopt  an  improper  strategic  front, 
or  to  improperly  construct  the  strategic  front  adopted. 

A  simple  line  of  manoeuvre  never  aims  at  more  than 
a  gain  in  position,  and  is  never  based  upon  a  strategetic 
weakness.  A  simple  line  of  manoeuvre  always  has  for 
its  object  the  proper  deployment  or  development,  and 
the  compelling  of  the  opponent  to  adopt  an  inferior 
strategic  front,  to  establish  improper  piece  units,  to 
improperly  locate  the  objective  plane,  and  to  establish 
uncovered  points. 


LINES  OF  MAN(EUVRE. 


313 


PRINCIPLE. 

Having  the  initiative  in  a  single  line  of  manoeuvre, 
always  select  that  move  which  will  establish  the  strategic 
front  upon  the  strategetic  centre  and  prevent  the  oppon- 
ent from  doing  likewise,  or  will  oppose  a  full  front  to 
the  adversary's  front  refused,  or  a  major  front  to  his 
minor  front,  or  a  grand  front  to  his  major  front. 

SIMPLE  LINE  OF  MANCEUVRE. 

FIG.  225. 
MR.  WARE. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 

MR.  YOUNG. 

White  to  move. 


314  THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 

THE  PLAY. 


WHITE. 

BLACK. 

1. 

P-K5. 

1. 

Kt-K5. 

2. 

B-Q3. 

2. 

P-Q4. 

3. 

Castles. 

3. 

P-K3. 

4. 

Q-K2. 

4. 

B-B4. 

5. 

BxKt. 

5. 

BxB. 

6. 

Kt-Kt5. 

6. 

B-B4. 

7. 

P-KKt4. 

7. 

P-KR3 

8. 

PxB. 

8. 

PxKt. 

9. 

P-B6. 

9. 

B-B1. 

10. 

PxP. 

And 

White  won. 

A  Compound  Line  of  Manoeuvre  is  composed  of  those 
movements  whose  object  is  to  occupy  a  given  point  with 
a  given  piece  at  a  time  when  such  occupation  will  compel 
the  opponent  either  to  adopt  an  improper  strategic  front, 
or  to  improperly  construct  the  strategic  front  adopted, 
and  at  the  same  time  will  menace  him  either  with  loss 
in  material,  or  with  the  junction  of  the  given  determi- 
nate force  with  the  kindred  hypothetical  force. 

A  compound  manoeuvre  aims  at  gain  in  material, 
either  indirectly  by  destroying  a  portion  of  the  adverse 
force,  or  directly  by  occupying  a  point  on  the  logistic 
horizon  and  uniting  with  the  kindred  hypothetical  force. 

A  compound  line  of  manoeuvre  always  is  based  upon 
a  strategetic  weakness  contained  either  in  Class  V.,  VI., 
or  VII. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Having  the  initiative  in  a  compound  line  of  manoeu- 
vre, always  select  that  move  which  unites  the  proper 
development  of  the  strategic  front,  with  the  greatest 
possible  gain  to  be  derived  from  menacing  the  strategetic 
weakness  existing  in  the  adverse  position. 


LINES  OF  MAN(EUVRE. 


315 


COMPOUND  LINE   OF  MANCEUVRE. 

FIG.  226. 

MR.  FISKE. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 

MR.  YOUNG. 

White  to  move. 

THE   PLAY. 


WHITE. 

1.  Kt  —  Q5. 

2.  P-Q4. 

3.  Q-QB3. 

4.  Q-R5. 

5.  Q-B7(ck). 

6.  Q  B  X  P. 

7.  BxQ. 

8.  Ktx  Kt  (ck). 

9.  BxR. 

And  White  won. 


BLACK. 

1.  Castles  (Q  R). 

2.  Kt  X  P. 
P-QB4. 
K-Ktl. 
K-R1. 
Kt-K3. 


7.  KtxQ. 

8.  K-Ktl. 


316  THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 

A  Complex  Line  of  Manoeuvre  is  composed  of  those 
movements  whose  object  is  to  occupy  a  given  point  with 
a  given  piece  at  a  time  when  such  occupation  will  com- 
pel the  opponent  to  adopt  either  an  improper  strategic 
front,  or  to  improperly  construct  the  strategic  front 
adopted,  and  at  the  same  time  will  menace  him  with  the 
loss  of  the  prime  strategetic  point. 

A  complex  line  of  manoeuvre  always  aims  at  gaining 
command  of  the  objective  plane,  and  is  based  upon  a 
strategetic  weakness  contained  in  either  Class  I.,  II., 
III.,  or  IV. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Having  the  initiative  in  a  complex  line  of  manoeuvre, 
always  select  that  move  which  unites  the  proper  devel- 
opment of  the  strategic  front  with  the  greatest  menace 
against  the  objective  plane. 


LINES  OF  MAN(EUVRE. 


317 


COMPLEX  LINE   OF   MANCEUVRE. 

FIG.  227. 
MR.  FELLXAR. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
MR.  YOUNG. 


THE  PLAY. 


9. 
10. 
11, 


WHITE. 

B-QR6. 

Kt-BG(ck). 
QB  XP. 
B-Q6(ck). 
Kt-B5. 
B  X  B. 
P-K6. 
B  — K5. 
B-Kt  7(ck). 
RxKt. 
ExR. 


1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 
7. 
8. 
9. 
10. 
11. 


BLACK. 
P-QB4. 
PxKt. 
Q-KB2. 
K-R1. 
B-QB1. 
P-QR4. 
Q-KB3. 
Q-K2. 
K-R2. 
RxR. 
Q  — KR5. 


White  announces  mate  in  nine  moves. 


LINES   OF   OPERATION. 

A  Line  of  Operation  is  composed  of  those  movements  whereby 
the  greater  force  overcomes  the  opposing  force. 

Lines  of  operation  are  divided  into  three  classes  :  — 

I.     STRATEGIC. 
II.     TACTICAL. 
III.     LOGISTIC. 

The  object  of  a- line  of  operation  always  is  either  to 
command  the  objective  plane,  to  unite  a  determinate  force 
with  the  kindred  hypothetical  force,  or  to  destroy  a 
portion  of  the  adverse  force. 

A  Strategic  Line  of  Operation  is  composed  of  those 
processes  whereby  the  greater  force  acquires  possession 
of  the  objective  plane. 

A  strategic  line  of  operations  always  originates  in  a 
complex  line  of  manoeuvre ;  it  always  is  directed  against 
a  strategetic  weakness  either  of  Class  I.  or  of  Class  II., 
and  its  value  is  determined  by  the  coefficient  of  mobility 
of  the  ultimate  objective  plane. 

The  validity  of  any  projected  strategic  line  of  oper- 
ations is  determined  by  the  mobility  of  the  ultimate 
objective  plane. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Whenever  the  net  value  of  the  kindred  radii  of  offence 
is  equal  to  the  mobility  of  the  ultimate  objective  plane, 
the  projected  strategic  line  of  operation  is  valid. 


LINES   OF  OPERATION. 


319 


STRATEGIC  LINES  OF  OPERATION. 
FIG.  228. 

MR.  YOUNG. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
MR.  KELSEY. 
Black  to  move. 
THE  PLAY. 


WHITE. 
Resigns. 


BLACK. 
1.    Q  — KR5. 


320 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FIG.  229. 
MR.  PANIN. 

(Black.) 


i  H 


(White.) 

MR.  YOUNG. 

White  to  move. 

THE   PLAY. 


WHITE. 

BLACK. 

1. 

BxKt. 

1. 

BXB. 

2. 

RxB. 

2. 

QxR. 

8. 

P-B6. 

3. 

Q-B1. 

4. 

Q-KtS(ck). 

4. 

K-R1. 

5. 

BxR. 

5. 

KxB. 

(;. 

QxP(ck). 

6. 

Q-R3. 

7. 

QxP(ck). 

7. 

K-R1. 

8. 

R-KR1. 

8. 

QxR. 

9. 

Q-KKt7(ck). 

Checkmate. 


LINES  OF  OPERATION. 


321 


FIG.  230. 
MR.  HILL. 

(Black.} 


(White.) 

MR.  YOUNG. 

White  to  move. 


THE  PLAY. 


WHITE. 
B  -  K  B  6. 
Q-Kt4. 
Kt-B5. 
Kt  —  R6(ck). 
Q-Kt5. 
BxKtP(ck). 
Kt-KB6. 
Kt-Ro(ck). 
Q-KB6  (ck) 


BLACK. 
BXB. 
Kt  — Kt3. 
B  -  K  3. 
K-R1. 
Kt(B3)-K2. 
KxB. 
Q-Q1. 
K-R1. 


Checkmate. 


322 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 


FIG.  231. 
HERR  KAUFMANN. 

(Slack. ) 


m 


( White. ) 

MR.  YOUNG. 

White  to  move. 

THE  PLAY. 


WHITE. 

BLACK. 

1. 

P-Kto. 

1. 

PxP. 

2. 

PxP. 

2. 

Kt  X  P. 

3. 

Q  —  Kt3. 

3. 

B  —  R5. 

4. 

Kt  —  Kt6. 

4. 

Kt-R2 

5. 

QxB. 

5. 

QxQ. 

6. 

Kt-K7(ck). 

6. 

K-R1. 

7. 

RxKt(ck). 

7. 

KxR. 

8. 

R-KR2(ck). 

Checkmate. 


LINES   OF  OPERATION. 


323 


FIG.  232. 
MR.  HARLOW. 

(Hack.) 


(White.} 
MR.  YOUNG. 
•  White  to  move. 


THE   PLAY. 


WHITE. 

1.  Q-Qo(ck). 

2.  P-Kt6. 

3.  PxR(ck). 

4.  BxP(ck). 

5.  Kt  — K4  (clisck). 

6.  P  — B8  (Qck). 

7.  Q-Q2(ck). 

8.  Q  — Kt5  (ck). 


BLACK. 

1.  R  — KB2. 

2.  B-B3. 

3.  K  —  Bio 

4.  KxB. 

5.  K  — R3. 

6.  QxQ(B8), 

7.  K  — R4. 


Checkmate. 


324  THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 

A  Tactical  Line  of  Operation  is  composed  of  those 
processes  whereby  an  opposing  force  is  reduced  to  the 
lesser  force  by  the  destruction  of  one  or  more  of  its 
integers. 

A  tactical  line  of  operation  always  originates  in  a 
compound  line  of  manoeuvre. 

A  tactical  line  of  operation  always  is  directed  against 
those  strategetic  weaknesses  which  are  contained  in 
Classes  III.,  V.,  or  VI.,  and  its  value  is  determined  by 
the  excess  of  radii  of  offence  over  the  adverse  radii  of 
defence. 

The  processes  which  appertain  to  tactical  lines  of 
operation  are  dominated  by  the  principles  of  major 
tactics.  These  evolutions  are  treated  of  in  extenso  in 
"The  Major  Tactics  of  Chess." 

The  validity  of  any  projected  tactical  line  of  opera- 
tions is  determined  by  the  excess  of  kindred  radii  of 
offence  over  the  adverse  radii  of  defence. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Whenever  the  sum  total  of  kindred  radii  of  offence  is 
greater  than  the  sum  total  of  adverse  radii  of  defence, 
the  projected  tactical  line  of  operations  is  valid. 


LINES   OF  OPERATION. 


325 


FIG.  233. 

MR.  YOUXG. 

(Black.) 


i 

lf!% 


MR.  WARE. 

White  to  move. 


THE  PLAY. 

In   this   situation  White   played  Kt  X  Q  P,  and  the 
game  continued :  — 

WHITE.  BLACK. 

1.  KtXKt. 

2.  Q-K4(ck).                     2.  Kt-K2. 

3.  Q  x  R.                               3.  B  -  Q  B  3. 

4.  QxRP.                           4.  Kt-QBl. 

And  Black  won. 


3'2t> 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FIG.  234. 
MESSRS.  STONE  AND  SAULSEN. 

(Black.) 


(ITJMfe.) 

MR.  YOUNG. 
White  to  move. 
THE  PLAY. 

Ill  this  situation  White  played  P  -  Q  5,  to  which  Black 
replied  with  Q  -  K  B  3.  White  then  played  Q  -  Q  B  2, 
and  Black  took  the  white  Q  R.  The  game  continued  :  — 

WHITE.  BLACK. 

1.  Kt-QB3.  1.    B-Q5. 

2.  B-QKtl.  2.    P-KB4. 

3.  B-QKt2. 

And  White  won. 


LINES  OF  OPERATION. 


327 


FIG.  235. 
MR.  YOUNG. 

(mack.) 


(White.) 

Mn.  WARE. 

Black  to  move. 


THE  PLAY. 


WHITE. 


2.  RxP. 

3.  RxB. 

4.  B-KR3(ck). 

5.  Q  — KB1. 


BLACK. 

1.  P-KR5. 

2.  P  X  P. 

3.  Q  x  R. 

4.  K-Ktl. 

5.  Q-KR5. 


And  Black  won. 


328 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


FIG.  236. 

MR.  YOUNG. 

(Black.) 


(TFMe.) 

MR.  HARLOW. 
Black  to  move. 

THE  PLAY. 
W»ITE-  BLACK. 

\.  R-QKtl, 

2-    Q-QB1.  2.  Q-K7. 

3.    RXP.  3.  BxKt. 

4-  Q-K1.  4.  Qx  Q. 

5-  RX  Q.  5.  BxBP. 

And  Black  won. 


LINES   OF  OPERATION. 


329 


FIG.  237. 
MR.  YOUNG. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 

MR.  SARGENT. 
Black  to  move. 


WHITE. 

2.  Q-Q1. 

3.  B  — QB2. 

4.  B-QB1. 

5.  Q-Q3. 

6.  R  x  R. 

7.  B  — K3. 

8.  K-Ktl. 


THE  PLAY. 


BLACK. 

1.  Q-K6. 

2.  Kt(R4)-B5. 

3.  KtxKtP. 

4.  Q-Kt3. 

5.  R  X  Kt. 

6.  Kt-K8. 

7.  BxR(ck). 

8.  Kt  x  Q. 


And  Black  won. 


330  THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 

A  Logistic  Line  of  Operation  is  composed  of  those 
processes  whereby  a  given  hypothetical  force  is  united 
to  the  kindred  determinate  force. 

A  logistic  line  of  operation  always  originates  in  a 
compound  line  of  manoeuvre,  and  always  is  directed 
against  a  strategetic  weakness  contained  either  in  Class 
IV.,  V.,  or  VII. 

A  logistic  line  of  operation  always  is  directed  against 
those  strategetic  weaknesses  which  are  contained  in 
Classes  IV.,  V.,  or  VII.,  and  its  value  is  determined  by 
the  freedom  of  the  pawn  altitudes  from  adverse  points 
of  resistance. 

The  processes  incident  to  logistic  lines  of  operation 
are  treated  in  extenso  in  "  The  Major  Tactics  of  Chess." 

The  validity  of  any  projected  logistic  line  of  opera- 
tions is  determined  by  the  absence  of  adverse  points  of 
resistance  from  the  kindred  pawn  altitude. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Whenever  all  adverse  points  of  resistance  are  or  can 
be  eliminated  from  one  or  more  kindred  pawn  altitudes, 
then  the  projected  logistic  line  of  operations  is  valid. 


LINES   OF  OPERATION. 


331 


LOGISTIC  LINES  OF  OPERATION. 

FIG.  238. 
MR.  YOUNG. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 

MR.  WARE. 

Black  to  move. 


THE   PLAY. 


WHITE. 

2.  B-KKt4. 

3.  B  — QB8. 

4.  B  x  P. 

5.  K-B2. 

6.  KxP. 


BLACK. 

1.  B~Kt3. 

2.  P-  KR4. 

3.  P-R5. 

4.  P  — R6. 

5.  P  — K6  (ck), 

6.  B-K5. 


And  Black  won. 


332 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FIG.  239. 

MR.  YOUNG. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
CAPTAIN  MACKENZIE. 

Black  to  move. 
THE   PLAY. 

In  this  situation  the  game  obviously  is  drawn.  Black 
having  to  move,  played  B  —  Q  2,  leaving  his  Q  P  ap- 
parently inadequately  supported.  The  game  continued  : 


WHITE. 

1.  QxQP. 

2.  KtxQP(ck). 

3.  Kt  x  Q  (ck). 

4.  Kt  x  B  P. 
o.  Kt  x  K  R. 


BLACK. 

1.  PxQ. 

2.  K  — B3. 

3.  KtxKt. 

4.  B-K3. 

5.  R  X  Kt. 


LINES   OF  OPERATION.  333 

White  now  did  not  see  fit  to  sacrifice  the  Q  P  by 
P  —  Q  5  (ck),  but  moved  R  —  Q  2,  whereupon  Black 
won  by  blocking  the  position  by  K  —  Q  4  and  R  via 
K  Kt  1  to  K  Kt  5  ;  then  playing  Kt  to  K  R  4,  withdraw- 
ing the  R  to  K  Kt  2,  and  occupying  K  Kt  5  with  the  Kt*; 
then  bringing  the  R  to  Q  2,  withdrawing  the  K  to  B  3 
and  posting  Q  B  at  K  5  via  Q  4,  followed  by  K  —  Q  4 
again  ;  then  by  returning  R  to  K  Kt  5,  withdrawing  the 
Kt  to  K  R  4,  and  from  thence  moving  it  to  Q  Kt  4,  after 
which  the  R»was  brought  in  two  moves  via  K  Kt  2  to 
Q  Kt  2,  whereupon  Black  won  at  once  by  Kt  X  Q  R  P. 


334 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


FIG.  240. 
MR.  ORDE. 

(Black.) 


(While.) 
MR.  YOUNG. 

THE   PLAY. 


WHITE. 

BLACK. 

1. 

P-K8(Q). 

1. 

R-KB8. 

2. 

Q-K2. 

2. 

R-QKt8. 

3. 

Q-QKt2  (ck). 

3. 

RxQ. 

4. 

QXQ. 

4. 

B-Q5. 

5. 

Q  X  Kt  (ck). 

o. 

KxQ. 

6. 

P-Q8(Qck). 

6. 

K  —  B2. 

7. 

QxB. 

7. 

R-Kt8(ck) 

8. 

Q-KKtl. 

8. 

RxQ  (ck). 

9. 

KxR. 

9. 

K-K3. 

10. 

K-B2. 

10. 

K-K4. 

11. 

K-K3. 

And  Wflite  won. 


LINES  OF  OPERATION. 


335 


FIG.  241. 

MR.  YOUNG. 

(Slack.) 


MR.  WARE. 
Black  to  move. 


THE  PLAY. 


WHITE. 


2.  PxP. 

3.  Q  — K3. 

4.  QR  — QB1. 

5.  R  — QB2. 

6.  KR-QB1. 

7.  B-Q1. 


BLACK. 

1.  PXP. 

2.  Q-R6. 

3.  B  — R4. 

4.  R-Q2. 

5.  R  — QKtl. 

6.  R  — Kt7. 

7.  R(Q2)-Kt2. 


336  THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


8. 

Kt-B3.                           8. 

RX 

R. 

9. 

R 

X 

R. 

9. 

R 

-Kt8. 

10. 

Q 

— 

K2. 

10. 

Q 

— 

R8. 

11. 

K 

-Kt2. 

11. 

B 

X 

BP. 

12. 

B 

— 

QR2. 

12. 

Q 

X 

R. 

13. 

Q 

x 

Q. 

13. 

R 

— 

Kt7 

(ck). 

14. 

Q 

X 

R. 

14. 

B 

X 

Q. 

15. 

B 

— 

B2. 

15. 

P- 

KB 

3. 

16. 

K 

-B2. 

16. 

P 

X 

P. 

17. 

B 

P 

XP. 

17. 

P 

— 

KB 

5. 

18. 

P 

X 

P. 

18. 

Q 

B 

XP. 

19. 

K 

— 

Kt3. 

19. 

B 

-  Kt  5. 

20. 

Kt  -  R  4. 

20. 

P 

-Kt4. 

21. 

P 

X 

P. 

21. 

B 

X 

QP. 

22. 

K 

— 

B4. 

22. 

B 

— 

Kt7 

. 

23. 

B 

— 

B5. 

23. 

B 

-  B  8  (ck). 

24. 

K 

— 

Kt3. 

24. 

B 

X 

P. 

25. 

B 

X 

B. 

25. 

B 

X 

Kt  (ck). 

26. 

K 

X 

B. 

26. 

P 

X 

B. 

27. 

K 

X 

P. 

27. 

P 

— 

B6. 

And  Black  won. 


LINES   OF  OPERATION. 


337 


FIG.  242. 

MR.  SAULSEN. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 

MR.  YOUNG. 

White  to  move. 


THE  PLAY. 
WHITE. 

1.  K-B1. 

2.  K-B2. 

3.  P-R5. 

4.  P-R6. 

5.  P  —  R7. 

6.  P  Queens  (ck). 

7.  Q-QR1  (ck). 

And  Black 


BLACK. 

1.  P-QR4. 

2.  PXP. 

3.  P-Kt6. 

4.  P-Kt7. 

5.  P  Queens. 

6.  Q  —  K  5. 


GKEATEE  LOGISTICS. 


Greater  Logistics  treats  of  those  movements  of  forces 
which  are  contained  in  lines  of  Mano3uvre  and  in  lines 
of  Operation. 


LOGISTICS   OF  WHITE'S   FIRST   MOVE. 

If,  in  a  tournament  or  in  a  match  at  chess,  and  having 
the  white  pieces,  you  should  open  the  deciding  game 
with  1  P  —  K  R  3,  to  say  that  you  thereby  would  create 
u  sensation  among  the  onlookers  would  be  putting  it 
mildly. 

As  a  matter  of  fact  your  friends  would  look  at  you  in 
blank  dismay,  so  to  speak,  whilst  your  opponents  would 
hug  themselves  and  murmur  gleefully  to  each  other, 
"  Whom  the  gods  seek  to  destroy,  they  first  make  mad," 
and  other  like  trite  and  equally  applicable  quotations. 

If,  however,  you  should  blandly  ask  them  to  point  out 
the  incongruity  attaching  to  your  initial  play,  they  all, 
with  one  voice,  would  tell  you  that  "It  is  a  wasted 
move  !  "  or  worse,  "It  weakens  the  King's  side,  and  be- 
comes a  mark  for  attack  after  castling;"  or  "  You  should 
have  opened  your  game  on  the  centre,  of  course." 

If  now  you  should  ask  them  how  can  they  tell  but 
that  you  will  be  more  benefited  later  in  the  game  by 
this  posting  of  the  pawn,  than  you  will  be  hurt  by  the 
immediate  loss  of  time ;  and  if  you  should  ask  them 
how  they  know  whether  you  intend  to  castle  or  not, 
and  if  you  have  not  still  the  option  of  castling  Q  R ;  and 
if  you  should  suggest  that  you  could  even  now  proceed 
as  second  player,  with  the  advantage  of  having  the 
K  R  P  at  its  third  to  prevent  the  posting  of  the  adverse 
Q  B  or  K  Kt  at  your  K  Kt  4,  —  you  wouid  find  that  a 
number  would  applaud  and  express  admiration  for  the 


342  TEE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 

soundness  and  ingenuity  of  your  statement,  and  that 
players  of  the  highest  rank,  and  men  of  good  judgment, 
while  far  from  accepting  your  fallacy,  yet  by  it  are 
reduced  to  silence,  or  to  mere  vociferation. 

For  these  people  have  never  heard  nor  read  what  you 
yourself  here  read  for  the  first  time :  — 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  Never  form  the  right  appui  by  posting  the  K  R  P 
at  K  R  3  until  the  objective  plane  has  been,  or  must  be- 
come, located  on  the  King's  wing,  and  the  major  right 
oblique  has  been,  or  can  be,  established. 

II.  Never  form  the  right  minor  crochet  by  posting 
the  K  R  P  at  K  R  3,  until  the  opponent  has  established 
the  major  right  oblique  refused  and  echeloned. 

Thus  you  see  it  obviously  is  wrong  and  unscientific 
for  either  White  or  Black  to  deploy  P  —  K  R  3  on  the 
first  move ;  and  so  clear  and  positive  is  the  principle 
which  governs  the  play  of  this  integer  of  chess  force 
throughout  the  game,  that  with  the  exercise  of  ordinary 
common  sense  you  should  never  be  at  loss  as  to  when 
and  when  not  to  play  P  —  K  R  3. 

Again,  suppose  that  you  had  on  your  initial  move  as 
White  played  IP  — KKt4.  In  like  fashion  you  would 
have  brought  down  about  your  ears  a  storm  of  contumely, 
and,  as  before,  this  from  people  utterly  unable  to  give 
a  logical  and  conclusive  reason  for  the  faith  that  is  in 
them.  This  is  no  more  difficult  to  formulate  than  is  the 
preceding. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  Never  form  the  right  echelon  by  P  —  K  Kt  4  until 
the  major  right  oblique  is  established  and  the  objective 


LOGISTICS   OF   WHITE'S  FIRST  MOVE.          343 

plane  permanently  located  on  the  King's  wing.  Prefer- 
ably form  the  right  appui  with  K  at  K  R  2  and  K  R  at 
K  Kt  1,  previous  to  forming  the  right  echelon  by  P  — 
KKt4. 

II.  Never  form  the  right  major  crochet  by  P  —  K  Kt  4 
until  the  left  oblique  is  established  and  the  objective 
plane  permanently  located  on  the  King's  wing. 

This  statement  seems  so  .clear  and  direct,  that  plain 
common  sense  would  ensure  the  correct  play  of  the 
K  Kt  P  in  all  situations. 

There  are  many  fine  chess  players  who  have  a  fond- 
ness for  the  initial  move  for  White  of  1  P  —  K  B  4. 

By  this  move  White  commits  himself  to  the  right 
oblique,  and  imposes  upon  himself  the  obligation  to  es- 
tablish sooner  or  later  the  open  game  by  P  —  K  4.  He 
can  have  no  hope  of  developing  by  the  left  in  case  Black 
should  castle  Q  R,  for  his  point  K  B  3  is  devoid  of  its 
pawn.  Furthermore,  his  king  is  exposed,  and  he  has 
notified  the  opponent  on  the  first  move  that  he  will  castle 
on  the  King's  wing.  This,  of  course,  does  not  lose  the 
game  offhand  for  White,  but  according  to  this  theory 
these  disadvantages  make  1  P  —  K  B  4  an  inferior  ini- 
tial move,  for  the  reasons  above  clearly  and  decidedly 
stated,  added  to  which  is  the  fact  that,  taken  together, 
they  give  Black  more  security  than  he  by  right  is  en- 
titled to,  and  more  than  he  possesses  if  White  adopts 
any  one  of  several  other  initial  moves. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Never  form  the  right  en  potence  by  1  P  —  K  B  4  until 
the  objective  plane  is  or  must  become  permanently  lo- 
cated on  the  King's  wing,  and  until  the  right  oblique  is, 
or  can  be,  established. 


344  THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 

Before  treating  of  the  K  P  and  the  Q  P  as  an  initial 
move  for  White,  let  us,  as  a  matter  of  simplicity,  proceed 
with  the  consideration  of  the  pawns  on  the  Queen's 
wing. 

The  Queen's  rook's  pawn  is  readily  disposed  of,  viz. :  — 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  Never  form  the  left  appui  by  P  —  Q  R  3  until  the 
prime  strategetic  point  and  the  objective  plane  have  both 
been  permanently  located  on  the  Queen's  wing,  and  until 
the  major  left  oblique  is,  or  can  be,  established. 

II.  Never  form  the  left  minor  crochet  by  P  —  Q  R  3 
until  the  opponent  has  established  the  major  left  oblique 
refused  and  echeloned. 

The  initial  move  of  1  P  —  Q  Kt  4  is  no  less  unscien- 
tific than  the  preceding,  as  will  readily  be  seen  from  the 
following :  — 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  Never  form  the  left  major  crochet  by  P  —  Q  Kt  4 
until  the  objective  plane  is  permanently  located  on  the 
Queen's  wing,  and  the  right  oblique  is  established. 

II.  Never  form  the  left  echelon  by  P  —  Q  Kt  4  until 
the  prime  strategetic  point  and  the  objective  plane  have 
both  become  permanently  located  on  the  Queen's  wing, 
and  the  major  left  oblique  is  established.      Preferably 
form  the  left  appui  with  K  at  Q  R  2  and  Q  R  at  Q  Kt  1, 
previous  to  forming  the  left  echelon  by  P  —  Q  Kt  4. 

The  initial  move  of  1  P  —  Q  B  4,  while  not  so  objec- 
tionable as  1  P  —  K  B  4,  inasmuch  as  the  King  is  not 
thereby  so  greatly  exposed,  is,  however,  open  to  similar 


LOGISTICS  OF    WHITE'S  FIRST  MOVE.          345 

« 

criticism.  The  strategic  front  is  compelled  to  take  di- 
rection to  the  left  or  to  the  left  refused,  for  the  point 
Q  B  3  is  now  denuded  of  its  pawn,  and  in  case  White 
attempts  to  establish  the  open  game  by  P  —  K  4,  his  king 
must  castle  Q  R.  Of  course  White  can  continue  with 
the  close  game  when  his  king  may  properly  castle  K  R, 
but  in  this  case  he  adopts  what  this  theory  considers  an 
inferior  strategic  front,  and  gives  Black  more  security 
than  he  is  entitled  to,  and  more  than  he  will  possess  if 
the  proper  initial  move  is  made  by  White. 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  Never  form  the  left  en  potence  until  the  objective 
plane  is  permanently  located  on  the  left,  and  until  the 
left  oblique  is  established. 

II.  Never  form  the  left  alignment  until  the  left  oblique 
refused  is  established. 

The  initial  move  of  1  P  —  Q  4  for  White  is  regarded 
as  a  sound  opening  by  all  authorities.  This  theory 
plainly  declares  that  "while  the  situation  resulting  equally 
from  1  P  —  Q  4  and  1  K  Kt  —  B  3  is  so  strong  and  valid 
when  reinforced  by  the  advantage  of  the  first  move, 
that  it  is  properly  to  be  regarded  as  a  legitimate 
line  of  mobilization,  yet  it  is  far  inferior  to  1  P  —  K  4, 
for  the  strategic  front  thus  obtained  is  not  established 
upon  the  strategetic  centre.  In  most  instances  it  does 
not  take  the  direction  of  the  objective  plane;  in  no 
case  does  it  permit  of  the  formation  of  the  crochet 
aligned ;  and  in  all  cases  the  prime  strategetic  point  is 
permanently  located  on  the  refused  wing,  —  all  of  which 
is  in  direct  opposition  to  this  theory. 


346  THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Never  form  the  left  oblique  refused  by  P  —  Q  4  when 
it  is  possible  to  establish  either  the  right  oblique  or  the 
left  oblique  by  the  initial  move  of  1  P  —  K  4. 

The  initial  move  of  1  P  —  Q  Kt  3  is  very  bad,  and 
should  never  be  adopted  by  White. 

PRINCIPLE, 

Never  form  the  fianchetto  except  as  an  accessory  to 
the  oblique  refused,  and  then  only  when  the  objective 
plane  is,  or  must  become,  permanently  located  on  the 
opposite  wing. 

The  best  initial  move  for  White  is  1  P  -  K  4 

PRINCIPLE. 

Always  deploy  so  that  the  right  oblique  may  be  readily 
established  in  case  the  objective  plajie  remains  upon,  or 
becomes  permanently  located  on,  the  centre  qr  on  the 
King's  wing,  or  that  the  left  oblique  may  be  readily  es- 
tablished if  the  objective  plane  becomes  permanently 
located  on  the  Queen's  wing,  or  that  the  crochet  aligned 
may  readily  be  established  if  the  objective  plane  becomes 
permanently  located  otherwise  than  at  the  extremity  of 
the  strategic  front. 


LOGISTICS   OF   BLACK'S   FIRST   MOVE. 

The  principles  which  govern  the  White  pieces  apply 
equally  to  those  of  Black,  and  for  exactly  the  same 
reasons  that  it  is  best  for  the  first  player,  so  is  the  move 
1  P  —  K  4  best  for  the  second  player. 

The  second  player  labors  under  a  great  disadvantage 
from  the  outset.  This  disadvantage  is  not  that  White 
is  one  move  ahead,  but  it  is  that  while  White,  from  the 
advantage  of  the  initiative,  can  establish  his  strategic 
front  on  the  strategetic  centre,  Black,  from  the  lack  of 
the  initiative,  cannot  establish  his  strategic  front  on  the 
strategetic  centre,  but  must  be  satisfied  with  the  oblique 
refused,  i.  e.  with  the  inferior  position. 

Thus 'is  imposed  upon  Black  the  onus  of  equalizing 
matters  before  White  can  render  his  advantage  decisive. 

Now,  if  you  read  the  great  authorities  on  chess  play 
or  on  warfare,  you  will  find  that  none  of  them  have 
any  word  of  advice,  or  even  of  cheer,  for  Black,  i.  e. 
for  the  second  or  defending  player.  Everything  is 
devoted  to  the  attack,  and  to  making  the  attack  suc- 
cessful—the other  fellow  must  take  care  of  himself. 

The  writer,  therefore,  since  nobody  else  seems  to  have 
taken  the  trouble  to  do  it,  has  deduced  the  principles 
of  defence,  and  formulated  them  for  the  benefit  of  the 
under  dog,  viz. :  — 


348  THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 

PRINCIPLE. 

All  else  being  equal,  the  strategetic  defensive  always 
loses. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Things  being  unequal,  the  strategetic  defensive  may 
draw. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Whether  things  be  equal  or  unequal,  the  strategetic 
defensive  never  can  win. 

Thus  you  see  that,  these  principles  being  true,  Black 
is  in  bad  shape.  All  writers  heretofore  have  left  him  in 
that  condition,  and  have  failed  to  notice  that  there  is  one 
ray  of  light  for  the  poor  fellow  in  all  this,  viz. :  — 


PRINCIPLE. 

It  is  much  easier  to  operate  offensively  than  to  ma- 
noeuvre defensively,  but  it  is  much  more  difficult  to  ma- 
noeuvre offensively  than  to  manoeuvre  defensively. 

All  this  means  that  against  a  weaker  force  it  is  easy 
to  attack  and  to  win,  even  by  crude  and  bungling  pro- 
cesses, and  that  for  the  weaker  force  to  defend  success- 
fully, even  against  such  processes,  requires  the  greatest 
skill  and  accuracy.  But  when  the  forces  are  equal,  things 
are  different.  True,  it  is  easy  to  attack ;  but  to  attack 
scientifically  is  extremely  difficult,  while  to  neutralize 
an>  unscientific  attack  is  matter  of  comparative  ease. 

Hence  the  following:  — 


LOGISTICS  OF  BLACK'S  FIRST  MOVE.  349 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  nature  of  the  offensive  is  constructive,  and  the 
nature  of  the  defensive  is  destructive,  and  the  prime 
energies  of  the  defence  always  must  be  devoted  to  de- 
stroying those  formations  which  the  attack  labors  to 
erect. 

This  principle  is  the  polar  star  of  the  defending  player 
in  all  situations. 

But  this  is  not  all.  It  is  evident  that  if  Black  remains 
Black,  that  he  cannot  win,  and  that  if  Black  wants  to 
win,  he  must  become  White,  Thus  we  have :  — 

PRINCIPLE. 

Having  originally  the  strategetic  defensive,  acquire 
the  strategetic  offensive  as  early  as  possible,  and  having 
acquired  the  strategetic  offensive,  mobilize,  develop,  ma- 
noeuvre, and  operate  as  though  having  the  strategetic 
offensive  originally. 

The  following  table  shows  the  possible  opening  moves 
by  White,  and  the  proper  responses  by  Black :  — 

WHITE.  BLACK. 

1P-K4  (Best).  1P-K4. 

1  P  —  K  3  (Inferior).  1  P  —  K  4. 

1  P  — KB4  (Inferior).  IP  — Q4. 

1  P-KB3(Bad).  1P-K4. 

!P-KKt4  (Bad).  1P-K4. 

!P-KKt3  (Bad).  1P-K4. 

lP-KR4(Bad).  1P-K4. 

1  P  -  K  R  3  (Bad).  1  P  -  K  4. 

1P-Q4  (Inferior).  1P-Q4.0T/P  '  ->«- 

lP-Q3(Bad).  1P-K4. 


350  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 

1  P  -  Q  B  4  (Inferior).  1  P  -  K  4. 

1  P  -  Q  B  3  (Inferior) .  1  P  -  K  4. 

1  P  -  Q  Kt  4  (Bad).  1  P  -  K  4. 

1  P  -  Q  Kt  3  (Bad).  1  P  -  K  4. 

1  P  -  Q  R  4  (Bad).  1  P  -  K  4. 

lP-QR3(Bad).  1P-K4. 

IKKt- KB 3  (Inferior).  1P-Q4.  0T  JF 

lKKt-KR3  (Bad).  1P-K4. 

1  Q  Kt  -  Q  B  3  (Bad).  1  P  -  K  4. 

1P-K, 

-,,,      ;     * 


LOGISTICS   OF   WHITE'S   SECOND   MOVE. 

The  line  of  defence  adopted  by  Black,  of  course,  mate- 
rially affects  White's  second  move.  But  in  all  cases  the 
latter  is  governed  by  the  following :  — 

PRINCIPLE. 

I.  After  1  P  —  K  4  always  establish  the  first  support- 
ing parallel  at  the  earliest  possible  moment,  but,  all  else 
being  equal,  never  offer  the  exchange  of  the  Q  P  for  the 
adverse  K  P  unless  the  objective  plane  can  thereby  be 
permanently  located  on  the  centre,  or  unless  the  major 
front  can  thereby  be  established  and  the  objective  plane 
permanently  located  on  the  King's  side ;  nor  for  the  ad- 
verse Q  B  P,  unless  the  attack  can  be  directed  by  the  left 
against  a  compromised  adverse  left  centre,  or  unless  the 
Q  P  can  be  replaced  by  the  Q  B  P  and  the  attack  eventu- 
ally directed,  either  by  the  right  or  by  the  left,  along  a 
major  strategic  front. 

II.  Whenever   the    first   supporting    parallel   cannot 
be    established    on   the    second    move,  always    deploy 
2  K  Kt  -  B  3. 

White  having  opened  with  1  P  —  K  4,  the  following 
table  shows  the  correct  responses  by  White  to  all  the 
lines  of  defence  possible  to  be  adopted  by  Black :  — 


352 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


BLACK. 

IP  — K 4  (Best). 
IP  — K  3  (Inferior). 
lP-KB3(Bad). 
IP  — KKt4(Bad). 
IP  — KKt3  (Bad). 
lP-KR4(Bad). 
lP-KR3(Bad). 
IP  — QB4  (Inferior). 
1P-QB3  (Bad). 
IP-QKU(Bad). 
1  P  —  Q  Kt  3  (Inferior). 
lP-QR4(Bad). 
lP-QR3(Bad). 
1  Kt  -  K  B  3  (Bad). 

lKt-KR3(Bad). 
IKt-QB  8  (Inferior). 
lKt-QR3(Bad). 


WHITE. 
2  Kt  -  K  B  3. 

2P-Q4. 

2P-Q4. 

2P-Q4. 

2P-  Q4. 

2  P  -  Q  4. 

2P-Q4. 

2P-Q4. 

2P-Q4. 

2P-Q4. 

2P-Q4. 

2P-Q4. 

2P-Q4. 

2  P-K  5,  folio  wed  by 

3P-Q4. 

2P-Q4. 

2P-Q4. 

2P-Q4. 


If,  after  1  P-K4, 1  P-K 4,  White  plays  2  Kt-Q  B  3, 
he  thereby  is  guilty  of  a  strategic  error,  inasmuch  as  he 
commits  himself  prematurely  to  the  attack  by  the  left,  and 
permits  Black  to  manoeuvre  as  White  by  2  Kt  —  K  B  3. 

If  White  plays  2  P  —  K  B  4,  he  is  guilty  of  a  strategic 
error  in  prematurely  forming  the  en  potence  and  per- 
mitting Black  to  manoeuvre  as  White  by  2  P  —  Q  4. 

If  White  plays  2  P  -  Q  B  3,  he  is  guilty  of  a  strategic 
"error  in  committing  himself  prematurely  to  the  attack 
by  the  left,  and  permitting  Black  to  manoeuvre  as  White 
by  2  P  -  Q  4. 

If  White  plays  2  B  —  Q  B  4,  he  is  guilty  of  a  strate- 
gic error  in  permitting  Black  to  operate  as  White  by 
2Kt-KB3. 


LOGISTICS   OF   WHITE'S  SECOND  MOVE.        353 
Hence  we  have  :  — 

PRINCIPLE. 

Never  permit  Black  to  establish  those  formations 
which,  by  the  advantage  of  the  initiative,  properly  be- 
long to  White. 


LOGISTICS   OF  BLACK'S   SECOND   MOVE. 

After  1  P  -  K  4, 1  P  -  K  4,  and  2  Kt  -  K  B  3,  the  line 
of  manoeuvre  becomes  complicated  by  the  entry  of  the 
element  of  major  tactics,  i.  e.  the  black  K  P  is  menaced 
with  capture  by  the  white  K  Kt.  All  situations  of  this 
kind  are  dominated  by  the  following :  — 

PRINCIPLE. 

Loss  of  material,  all  else  being  equal,  always  leads  to 
loss  of  position,  and  eventuates  in  decisive  loss  in  both. 

Consequently,  unless  there  be  a  corresponding  gain, 
Black  cannot  permit  the  capture  of  his  K  P,  and  he  ob- 
viously is  restricted  in  his  selection  of  a  second  move  to 
one  which  prevents  the  threatened  loss  of  material. 

The  following  table  shows  the  various  responses  pos- 
sible to  Black  after  White's  move  2  Kt  —  K  B  3. 

WHITE.  BLACK. 

2Kt-KB3.  2Kt-KB3  (Inferior). 

2Kt-KB3.  2Kt-QB3(Best). 

2  Kt  —  K  B  3.  2  P—  Q  4  (Inferior). 

2Kt-KB3.  2P-Q3  (Inferior) . 

2Kt-KB3.  2P-KB4  (Inferior). 

2Kt-KB3.  2P-KB3  (Bad). 

2Kt-KB3.  2Q-K2  (Bad). 

2Kt-KB3.  2Q-KB3  (Bad). 


LOGISTICS   OF  BLACK'S  SECOND  MOVE.  *      355 

Obviously  no  other  move  by  Black  will  maintain  the 
attacked  K  P,  and  the  consideration  of  these  moves  in 
detail  shows :  — 

The  sortie  of  the  Q  is  bad.  At  K  2  she  is  posted,  not 
in  accordance  with  the  right  oblique  refused,  which  is 
the  strategic  front  available  to  Black,  and  she  impedes 
the  deployment  of  the  K  B  in  violation  of  the  laws  of 
lesser  logistics.  At  K  B  8  she  likewise  is  herself  im- 
properly posted  with  regard  to  the  strategic  front,  and 
she  also  impedes  the  deployment  of  the  K  Kt  at  K  B  3. 
This  also  opens  to  White  a  simple  line  of  manoeuvre 
by  3  P  —  Q  4,  and  the  time  gained  for  White  by  the 
forced  retreat  of  the  black  Q  would  permit  the  black 
K  P  to  be  overwhelmed  by  the  united  white  Q  P  and 
KKt. 

The  advance  of  the  black  K  B  P  manifestly  is  in  vio- 
lation of  the  laws  both  of  strategy  and  of  logistics,  and 
whether  the  P  is  played  to  K  B  3  or  to  K  B  4,  the  result- 
ant exposure  of  the  black  prime  strategetic  point  will 
seriously  compromise  his  game. 

The  advance  of  the  black  Q  P  to  Q  3  is  very  inferior, 
from  the  fact  that  it  impedes  the  deployment  of  the  black 
KB  at  Q  B  4,  and  permits  of*  the  establishment  of  the 
first  supporting  parallel  by  White. 

The  deployment  of  the  Q  P  at  Q  4  by  Black  is  prema- 
ture, as  the  supporting  parallel  thus  formed  is  inade- 
quately supported,  and  White's  advantage  of  the  move 
will  gain  for  him  the  superior  position. 

2  Kt  —  Q  B  3  is  the  best  second  move  for  Black.  This 
deployment  is  entirely  consistent  with  strategic  princi- 
ple as  laid  down  in  this  theory,  and  is  the  only  second 
move  for  Black  which  fulfils  all  requirements. 

2  Kt  —  K  B  3  is  not  free  from  flaws.  It  is,  however, 
better  play  than  any  second  move  for  Black  other  than 


356     .         THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 

2  Q  Kt  -  B  3.  But  like  2  P  -  Q  4,  this  attempt  on  the 
part  of  Black  to  assume  the  offensive  and  to  play  as 
White  will  fail  against  the  best  play  and  result  in  the 
inferior  game  for  Black.  The  reason  of  this  is  that 
White  always,  by  the  advantage  of  the  move,  will  be 
able  to  denude  the  black  King's  wing  of  the  K  Kt,  and 
compel  Black  to  castle  on  that  side,  or  else  to  secure  a 
great  advantage  in  deployment  resulting  from  Black's 
loss  of  time  on  the  centre. 

PRINCIPLE. 

With  the  prime  strategetic  point  located  on  the  centre 
or  the  King's  wing,  and  the  strategic  front  being  refused 
either  by  the  right  or  by  the  left,  the  King's  knight  and 
the  communications  of  the  King's  knight  with  the  kin- 
dred point  K  B  3  must  be  preserved  until  such  time  as 
the  front  by  the  right  refused  can  be  aligned,  or  the 
K  Kt  can  be  replaced  at  K  B  3  by  the  Q  Kt. 


LOGISTICS   OF  WHITE'S   THIRD   MOVE. 

After  1P-K4,  1P-K4;  2Kt-KB3,  2Kt- 
Q  B  3,  the  subsequent  play  of  White  throughout  the 
opening  is  dominated  by  the  following :  — 

PRINCIPLE. 

Never  permit  Black,  after  he  has  played  1  P  —  K  4,  to 
establish  the  first  supporting  parallel,  or  to  deploy  his 
K  B  at  Q  B  4,  or  to  transform  his  front  by  the  right  re- 
fused into  the  minor  right  oblique,  until  by  so  doing  he 
permits  White  to  establish  the  major  right  oblique  and 
to  dislodge  the  Black  Kt  from  the  Black  point  K  B  3 ; 
and  always,  when  possible,  compel  the  deployment  of  the 
Black  Q  P  at  Q  3  previous  to  the  deployment  of  the 
Black  KB. 

The  following  table  shows  the  feasible  responses  of 
White  to  Black's  deployment  of  2  Q  Kt  -  B  3  :  - 

BLACK.  WHITE. 

2  Q  Kt  —  B  3.  3  B  —  Q  Kt  5  (Best). 

2  Q  Kt  —  B  3.  3B-QB4  (Inferior). 

2QKt-B3.  3QKt-B3  (Bad). 

2  Q  Kt  —  B  3.  3  P  —  Q  4  (Inferior). 

2QKt-B3.  3P-QB3  (Bad) . 


358  .  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 

3  P  -  Q  B  3,  by  White,  is  bad,  because  it  permits  Black 
to  establish  at  once  the  first  supporting  parallel  by  3  P  — 
Q  4  and  subsequently  to  deploy  as  White. 

3  Q  Kt  —  B  3,  by  White,  is  bad,  because  White  is  thus 
committed  to  the  attack  by  the  left,  and  also  permits 
Black  to  deploy  the  K  B  either  at  Q  B  4  or  at  Q  Kt  5. 

3  P  —  Q  4,  by  White,  is  inferior,  because  it  subse- 
quently permits  the  deployment  of  the  Black  K  B  at 
QB4. 

3  B  —  Q  B  4  is  inferior,  because  it  permits  Black  at 
once  to  establish  his  K  B  at  Q  B  4. 

White's  best  third  move  is  3  B  —  Q  Kt  5,  because  it 
prevents  the  deployment  of  the  Black  K  B  at  Q  B  4  or 
at  Q  Kt  5,  or  of  the  Q  P  at  Q  4,  and  limits  Black  to  a 
deployment  on  the  right  oblique  refused. 


„ 


LOGISTICS   OF  BLACK'S   THIRD   MOVE. 


After  1P-K4,  1P-K4;  2Kt-KB3,  2  Kt  - 
QB3;  3B-QKt5,  Black  cannot  attempt  to  deploy 
his  K  B,  nor  to  establish  the  first  supporting  parallel. 

The  following  table  shows  the  feasible  responses  of 
Black  to  White's  play  of  3  B  -  Q  Kt  5  :  — 


WHITE. 

3  B  -  Q  Kt  5. 
3B-QKt5. 
3B-QKt5. 
3B-QKt5. 
3B  — QKt5. 
3  B  —  Q  Kt  5. 


BLACK. 

3Kt-KB3(Best). 
3  B  -  Q  B  4  (Bad). 
3P-Q4(Bad). 
3P  — Q3  (Inferior). 
3P  — QR3(Bad). 
3Kt  — Q5  (Inferior). 


3  Kt  —  Q  5,  for  Black,  is  inferior,  as  by  the  advantage 
of  the  move  White  will  establish  the  major  right  oblique 
aligned,  and  Black  will  be  obliged  to  castle  on  the 
King's  wing  in  a  position  wherein  he  is  entirely  on  the 
defensive. 

3  P  —  Q  R  3,  for  Black,  is  bad,  inasmuch  as  the  left 
minor  crochet  is  of  no  utility  in  a  minor  right  oblique 
refused,  nor  in  a  full  front  unopposed  by  the  major 
oblique  echeloned. 

3  P  —  Q  3,  for  Black,  is  bad,  as  the  K  B  is  thus  pre- 
vented from  deploying  at  Q  B  4. 

3  P  —  Q  4,  for  Black  in  this  situation,  would  be  a  vio- 


360 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


lation  of  the  principles  of  major  tactics,  i.  e.  a  tactical 
blunder,  which  in  this  case  wouM  lose  him  his  K  P. 

3  B  —  Q  B  4,  for  Black,  is  bad,  as  White  thereby  would 
be  enabled  to  eventually  establish  the  first  supporting 
parallel  by  the  advantage  of  the  move.  » 

Black's  best  move  is  3  Kt  —  K  B  3.  This  deployment 
is  entirely  in  harmony  with  strategic  principle,  and 
Black's  position  at  this  point  is  the  best  that  he  can 
attain  against  correct  play  on  the  part  of  White. 

Black's  subsequent  play  in  the  opening  is  governed  by 
the  following :  — 

PRINCIPLE. 

Never  permit  White  to  establish  the  first  supporting 
parallel,  nor  to  convert  his  minor  strategic  front  into  a 
major  or  a  grand  strategic  front  having  the  direction  of 
the  objective  plane. 

Should  White  succeed  in  establishing  a  major  or  a 
grand  strategic  front,  never  permanently  locate  the  prime 
strategic  point  at  the  extremity  of  such  adverse  strate- 
gic front,  and  in  the  latter  case  never  permit  a  white  Kt 
to  become  posted  at  B  5  on  that  wing  upon  which  the 
prime  strategetic  point  is  or  must  become  permanently 
located. 


LOGISTICS   OP  WHITE'S  FOURTH  MOVE. 


White's  best  fourth  move  in  the  opening  formed  by 
the  foregoing  is  4P  —  Q4,  as  played  by  Morphy.  Sf 

White  by  this  move  deploys  the  proper  pawn,  forms 
the  first  supporting  parallel,  prevents  Black  from  playing 
4KB-B4,oi-4:P-Q4,  or  even  4  P  -  Q  3.  That  is, 
Black  cannot  deploy,  as  the  situation  is  one  of  major 
tactics  and  he  is  menaced  with  the  loss  of  material. 

Black's  proper  reply,  and  the  further  treatment  of  this'-S*'* 
and  of  all  other  chess  openings,  will  be  found  in   the 
fourth  volume  of  this  series,  entitled  Chess  Strategetics, 
Illustrated. 


(***»•  o  '"r 


LOGISTICS   OF  THE   PRIME  STRATEGETIC 
POINT. 

The  situation  of  the  prime  strategetic  point  with  re- 
gard to  the  objective  plane  is  the  very  essence  of  this 
system  of  chess  play,  and  under  all  circumstances  the 
movement  termed  "  castling  "  is  dominated  by  the  fol- 
lowing principles :  — 

PRINCIPLE. 

Whenever  the  objective  plane  is  permanently  located 
on  the  centre,  with  all  speed  castle  K  R,  open  the  King's 
file,  and  occupy  it  with  the  King's  rook. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Whenever  the  objective  plane  is  or  must  become  per- 
manently located  on  the  King's  wing,  and  the  right 
oblique  is  or  can  be  established,  and  the  King's  file  is 
open,  with  all  speed  castle  K  R  and  occupy  the  King's 
file  with  the  K  R  if  the  black  King's  wing  is  denuded  of 
a  Kt;  but  if  the  K  file  is  closed,  or  if  a  black  Kt  is 
posted  at  Black's  K  B  3,  occupy  the  King's  file  with  the 
QR, 

PRINCIPLE. 

If  the  strategic  front  is  directed  by  the  right  refused 
or  by  the  left  refused,  and  the  opponent  has  not,  and 
cannot  establish  a  major  strategic  front,  castle  K  R. 


LOGISTICS  OF  PRIME  STRATEGETIC  POINT,       363 
PRINCIPLE. 

If  the  strategic  front  is  established  by  the  left,  and 
the  objective  plane  is  or  must  become  permanently 
located  on  the  right,  castle  QR;  and  if  the  strategic 
front  is  directed  by  the  right,  arid  the  objective  plane  is 
or  must  become  permanently  located  on  the  left,  castle 
KR. 

If  the  objective  plane  is  or  must  become  permanently 
located  on  the  left,  and  the  left  oblique  is  or  may  be 
established,  castle  Q  R. 

In  all  cases  wherein  the  opponent  has  or  can  establish 
a  major  or  a  grand  strategic  front  by  the  right,  castle 
Q  R ;  and  in  all  cases  where  the  opponent  has  or  can 
establish  a  major  or  a  grand  strategic  front  by  the  left, 
castle  K  R ;  but  in  either  case  do  not  castle  until  the 
direction  of  the  adverse  major  or  grand  strategic  front 
is  determined. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Ill  all  situations  never  castle  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
locate  the  prime  strategetic  point  at  the  extremity  of  an 
adverse  major  or  grand  strategic  front,  or  on  the  same 
side  with  an  adverse  crochet  aligned  if  an  adverse  Kt  is 
or  can  be  posted  at  the  adverse  strategetic  objective. 


LOGISTICS   OF   OBJECTIVE  PLANES. 

The  location  of  the  King,  when  regarded  as  the  centre 
of    the   objective    plane,  always   is  dominated    by  the 


following :  — 


PRINCIPLE. 


When  the  strategic  front  is  a  minor  front,  and  is 
directed  by  the  right,  the  opponent  may  locate  the  objec- 
tive plane  on  the  right,  provided  he  can  prevent  the 
development  of  the  adverse  front  into  a  major  or  a 
grand  front. 

PRINCIPLE. 

When  the  strategic  front  is  a  minor  front,  and  is  not 
directed  either  by  the  right  or  by  the  left,  the  opponent 
should  locate  the  objective  plane  on  the  side  which  is 
not  the  extremity  of  an  adverse  major  or  grand  front, 
nor  exposed  to  the  attack  of  the  crochet  aligned. 

PRINCIPLE. 

When  the  strategic  front  is  a  minor  front,  and  is 
directed  by  the  left,  the  opponent  may  locate  the  objec- 
tive plane  on  the  left,  provided  he  can  prevent  the 
development  of  the  adverse  front  into  the  major  or 
grand  front. 


LOGISTICS  OF  OBJECTIVE  PLANES.  365 

PRINCIPLE. 

When  the  strategic  front  is  a  major  front,  and  is 
directed  by  the  right,  the  opponent  must  locate  the 
objective  plane  on  the  left. 

PRINCIPLE. 

When  the  strategic  front  is  a  major  front,  and  is 
directed  by  the  left,  the  opponent  must  locate  the 
objective  plane  on  the  right. 

PRINCIPLE. 

When  the  strategic  front  is  a  major  front,  and  is 
directed  by  the  right  refused,  the  opponent  should  locate 
the  objective  plane  on  the  left. 

PRINCIPLE. 

When  the  strategic  front  is  a  major  front,  and  is 
directed  by  the  left  refused,  the  opponent  should  locate 
the  objective  plane  on  the  right. 

PRINCIPLE. 

To  prevent  the  development  of  a  minor  front  by  the 
right  with  a  major  front,  the  objective  plane  being 
located  on  the  right,  the  adverse  Q  P  should  remain  at 
Q  3.  If,  however,  the  Q  P  is  at  Q  4,  the  K  B  P  may  be 
utilized  for  that  purpose. 

PRINCIPLE. 

To  prevent  the  development  of  a  minor  front  by  the 
left  into  a  major  front,  the  objective  plane  should  be 
located  at  Q  Kt  1,  and  the  Q  B  P  posted  at  Q  B  3. 


366  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


PRINCIPLE. 

To  prevent  the  development  of  a  minor  front  by  the 
right  refused  into  a  major  front  refused,  the  objective 
plane  being  located  on  the  right,  align  the  strategic 
front  by  P  -  K  B  4. 

•  PRINCIPLE. 

To  prevent  the  development  of  a  minor  front  by  the 
left  refused  into  a  major  front  refused,  the  objective 
plane  being  located  on  the  left,  align  the  strategic  front 
by  P  -  Q  B  4. 

PRINCIPLE. 

To  prevent  the  development  of  a  single  front  directed 
by  the  right  into  a  double  front  by  the  formation  of  the 
crochet  aligned,  the  objective  plane  being  located  on  the 
left,  maintain  the  Q  P  at  Q  3,  and  exchange  the  adverse 
knights. 

PRINCIPLE. 

To  prevent  the  development  of  a  single  front  directed 
by  the  left  into  a  double  front  by  the  formation  of  the 
crochet  aligned,  the  objective  plane  being  located  on  the 
right,  exchange  the  adverse  knights. 


LOGISTICS   OF   STRATEGIC   FRONTS. 

The  value  of  a  strategic  front  is  determined  by  the 
position  of  the  prime  strategetic  point,  the  location  of 
the  objective  plane,  and  the  validity  of  the  opposing 
pawn  line. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  minor  right  oblique  is  a  superior  strategic  front 
to  the  minor  right  oblique  refused  or  the  minor  left 
oblique  refused,  and  is  properly  opposed  only  by  the 
minor  right  oblique. 

i 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  minor  left  oblique  is  a  superior  strategic  front 
to  the  minor  right  oblique  refused  or  to  the  minor  left 
oblique  refused,  and  is  properly  opposed  only  by  the 
minor  left  oblique. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  minor  right  oblique  refused  is  inferior  as  a 
strategic  front  either  to  the  minor  right  oblique  or  to 
the  minor  left  oblique,  but  it  is  superior  to  the  minor 
left  oblique  refused. 

It  properly  appertains  to  Black ;  it  never  should  be 
adopted  by  White ;  and  whenever  adopted  either  by 
White  or  by  Black,  it  should  be  aligned  at  the  earliest 
possible  moment. 


368  THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


PRINCIPLE. 

The  minor  left  oblique  refused  is  inferior  to  all 
strategic  fronts  directed  either  by  the  right  or  by  the 
left,  or  by  the  right  refused. 

It  properly  should  be  opposed  by  the  minor  centre 
enceinte. 

PRINCIPLE. 

A  major  front  established  is  superior  to  a  minor  front 
directed  either  by  the  right  or  by  the  left,  or  by  the 
right  refused  or  by  the  left  refused. 

PRINCIPLE. 

A  major  front  established  by  the  right  is  best  opposed  • 
by  a  major  or  grand  front  directed  by  the  left  refused  ; 
but  a  tentative  front  of  this  kind  usually  is  readily 
demolished  by  a  minor  front  directed  by  the  left  refused 
and  aligned. 

PRINCIPLE. 

A  major  front  established  by  the  left  is  best  opposed 
by  a  major  or  grand  front  directed  by  the  right  refused ; 
but  a  tentative  front  of  this  kind  usually  is  readily 
demolished  by  a  minor  front  directed  by  the  right 
refused  and  aligned. 

PRINCIPLE. 

A  major  front  established  by  the  right  refused  is 
properly  opposed  by  the  right  oblique,  if  the  objective 
plane  appertaining  to  the  latter  is  located  on  the  right. 
Otherwise  it  properly  should  be  opposed  by  the  major  or 
grand  left  oblique. 


LOGISTICS   OF  STRATEGIC  FRONTS.  369 

PRINCIPLE. 

A  major  front  established  by  the  left  refused  is  best 
opposed  by  the  major  or  grand  right  oblique.  This 
front  should  never  be  met  with  the  left  oblique  refused. 

PRINCIPLE. 

All  else  being  equal,  a  grand  front  established  either 
by  the  right  or  by  the  left  is  superior  to  all  other  fronts. 

PRINCIPLE. 

All  else  being  equal,  a  grand  front  established  by  the 
right  refused  is  superior  to  all  other  fronts  except  the 
grand  right  oblique  and  the  grand  left  oblique. 

PRINCIPLE. 

All  else  being  equal,  a  grand  front  established  by  the 
left  refused  is  superior  to  any  major  or  minor  strategic 
front. 


LOGISTICS   OF   THE   STRATEGETIC 
OBJECTIVE. 

The  strategetic  objective  is  determined  by  the  location 
of  the  objective  plane  and  the  direction  of  the  strategic 
front. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  strategetic  objective  of  a  single  front  directed  by 
the  right  is  K  B  6.  This  point  is  properly  occupied  by 
any  kindred  piece. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  strategetic  objective  of   a  single  front  directed 
eft  is  Q  B  6.     This  point  is  properly  occupied  by 


_•_  X±V-/          O  UJ.  €JL\>\J  ^  \s  \JL  \J          \ 

by  the  left  is  Q  B  6. 
any  kindred  piece 


PRINCIPLE. 


The  strategetic  objective  of  a  single  front  directed 
by  the  right  refused  is  K  B  5.  This  point  may  be 
occupied  by  any  kindred  piece. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  strategetic  objective  of  a  single  front  directed 
by  the  left  refused  is  Q  B  5.  This  point  may  be 
occupied  by  any  kindred  piece. 


LOGISTICS   OF  STRATEGETIC  OBJECTIVE.        371 


PRINCIPLE. 

The  strategetic  objective  of  a  double  front  directed 
by  the  right  is  Q  B  5.  This  point  should  be  occupied 
by  a  kindred  knight. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  strategetic  objective  of  a  double  front  directed  by 
the  left  is  K  B  5.  This  point  should  be  occupied  by  a 
kindred  knight. 


LOGISTICS   OF   SUPPLEMENTARY 
FORMATIONS. 


PRINCIPLE. 

The  front  aligned  is  common  to  all  strategic  fronts. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  double  alignment 'appertains  only  to  minor  and 
to  major  fronts. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  minor  centre  enceinte  may  be  established  at  any 
time,  and  applies  to  all  minor  fronts  except  the  minor 
left  oblique  refused. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  minor  left  enceinte  refused  belongs  exclusively 
to  the  minor  left  oblique  refused. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  major  right  enceinte  belongs  exclusively  to  the 
major  right  oblique.  It  should  be  established  only  when 
the  objective  plane  is  located  at  the  extremity  of  the 
strategic  front  directed  by  the  right. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  major  left  enceinte  refused  belongs  exclusively  to 
the  major  left  oblique  refused.  It  should  be  established 
as  early  as  possible  whenever  this  front  is  adopted. 


SUPPLEMENTARY  FORMATIONS.  373 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  en  potence  belongs  to  the  major  and  the  grand 
fronts,  and  should  be  formed  as  speedily  as  possible, 
whether  the  front  is  directed  by  the  right  or  by  the  left, 
or  whatever  may  be  the  location  of  the  objective  plane. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  echelon  belongs  exclusively  to  the  major  front. 
It  should  be  formed  only  when  the  objective  plane  is 
located  at  the  extremity  of  the  strategic  front. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  appui  never  should  be  formed  except  for  the  pur- 
pose of  supporting  the  formation  of  the  echelon. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  minor  crochet  never  should  be  formed  except  for 
the  purpose  of  opposing  the  adverse  major  froiit  directed 
either  by  the  right  or  the  left,  both  being  refused  and 
echeloned. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  major  crochet  never  should  be  formed  except  on 
that  side  of  the  board  on  which  the  objective  plane  is 
located,  and  then  only  for  the  purpose  of  being  converted 
into  the  crochet  aligned. 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  crochet  aligned  never  should  be  formed  except  on 
that  side  of  the  board  on  which  the  objective  plane  is 
located,  and  it  always  should  be  formed  at  once  when- 
ever the  strategic  front  has  not  the  direction  of  the 
objective  plane. 


LOGISTICS   OF  OPEN   FILES,   OF   OPEN  DIAGO- 
NALS,  AND   OF   POINTS   OFFENSIVE. 


PRINCIPLE. 


Never  fail  to  seize  the  open  files  of 'the  centre  or  of 
that  side  on  which  the  objective  plane  is  or  must  become 
located,  and  never  fail  to  oppose  with  the  rooks  the 
command  of  such  files  by  the  adverse  rooks  or  queens. 


PRINCIPLE. 


If  the  objective  plane  is  located  permanently  on  the 
centre,  seize  the  open  K  file  with  the  K  R. 


PRINCIPLE. 


If  the  objective  plane  is  located  on  the  right,  seize 
the  open  K  file  with  the  Q  R. 


PRINCIPLE. 


If  both  the  K  file  and  the  Q  file  are  open,  and  what- 
ever the  location  of  the  objective  plane,  seize  the  Q  file 
with  Q  R  and  the  K  file  with  K  R. 


PRINCIPLE. 


If  the  Q  file  is  open,  and  the  objective  plane  is  located 
on  the  centre  or  on  the  King's  side,  seize  the  Q  file  with 
the  Q  R. 


LOGISTICS  OF  OPEN  FILES,  ETC.  875 

PRINCIPLE. 

If  the  Q  file  is  open  and  the  objective  plane  is  located 
on  the  left,  seize  the  Q  file  with  K  R. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Whenever  the  K  Kt  file  or  the  Q  Kt  is  open,  or  is  about 
to  be  opened,  the  objective  plane  being  located  at  the 
extremity  of  a  major  strategic  front,  form  the  en  appui, 
establish  the  K  at  R  2,  occupy  the  point  Kt  1  with  R, 
and  construct  the  echelon. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Never  fail  to  seize  the  central  diagonals  which  extend* 
toward  the  objective  plane,  and  to  oppose  a  bishop  to  any 
adverse  bishop  or  queen  which  attempts  to  command 
such  diagonals. 

PRINCIPLE. 

If  the  objective  plane  is  located  permanently  on  the 
centre,  the  proper  post  for  the  K  B  is  on  the  diagonal 
R  2.  If  the  objective  plane  is  located  on  the  right  or 
the  left,  the  best  post  for  the  K  B  is  Q  3. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Never  permit  any  adverse  piece  to  penetrate  into  the 
primary  base,  nor  to  occupy  a  point  offensive  either 
within  or  upon  the  perimeter  of  the  primary  base. 


PRINCIPLE. 


In  mobilizing  the  forces,  so  deploy  that  all  adverse 
radii  of  offence  are  intercepted  by  the  pawns,  and  that 


376  THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 

all  portions  of  the  kindred  side  of  the  chess-board  are 
covered  by  the  defensive  force  radiated  by  the  kindred 
pieces. 


PRINCIPLE. 

In  developing  the  strategic  front,  never  leave  an  open 
point  on  the  perimeter,  wherefrom  the  opponent  may 
operate  radii  of  offence  into  the  interior  of  the  primary 
base  of  operations. 

PRINCIPLE. 

Never  permit  any  intervals  to  be  created  in  the  stra- 
tegic front  through  which  adverse  pieces  may  enter. 

Whenever   such   intervals   are   created    and    can   be 
t  availed  of  by  the  opponent,  always  occupy  or  command 
them  by  the  superior  pieces. 


LOGISTICS   OF   LINES   OF   MOVEMENT. 

In  a  game  of  chess,  whenever  you  are  not  doing  some- 
thing, you  should  be  trying  to  do  something.  That  is  to 
say,  whenever  you  are  not  checkmating  the  adverse  king, 
or  queening  a  pawn,  or  winning  a  piece,  you  should  be 
trying  to  do  one  of  these  things  with  all  vigor,  and 
incidentally  you  should  be  perfecting  your  strategic  front 
at  the  same  time.  In  other  words  :  — 

PRINCIPLE. 

Always  move  on  a  line  of  operation  whenever  a  line 
of  operations  exists ;  otherwise,  always  move  on  a  line 
of  manoeuvre,  and  combine  with  such  line  of  manoeuvre 
the  proper  line  of  development  or  of  mobilization. 

So  in  any  given  situation,  the  first  question  you  ask 
yourself  is :  "  Can  I  mathematically  demonstrate  the 
checkmate  of  the  adverse  king  ?  " 

If  you  can  answer  this  question  in  the  affirmative,  then 
go  ahead  and  do  it,  i.  e.  move  on  a  strategic  line  of 
operations.  If  you  are  compelled  to  answer  this  ques- 
tion in  the  negative,  then  always  abandon  any  attempt 
to  move  on  a  strategic  line  of  operations ;  for  remember 
that  although  such  line  of  movement  may  exist,  yet 
unless  you  yourself  can  mathematically  demonstrate  the 
process,  that  line  of  movement  does  not  exist, — for  you. 


378  THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 

Now,  then,  ask  yourself  the  second  question  :  "  Can  I 
queen  a  pawn  without  losing  more  than  the  equivalent 
of  the  queen  thus  gained  ? "  If  you  can  mathematically 
demonstrate  the  process,  go  ahead  and  do  it,  i.  e.  move 
on  a  logistic  line  of  operations ;  but  if  you  cannot  answer 
in  the  affirmative,  then  always  abandon  any  attempt  to 
move  in  that  direction  at  that  time. 

But  you  still  have  one  chance  left,  and  you  must  ask 
yourself  the  final  question :  "  Can  1  capture  an  adverse 
piece  or  pawn  without  losing  more  than  the  equivalent 
of  the  piece  or  pawn  gained  ?  "  If  you  can  answer  this 
question  in  the  affirmative  and  can  mathematically 
demonstrate  the  process,  then  go  ahead  and  do  it,  i.  e. 
move  on  a  tactical  line  of  operations. 

But  in  all  cases  wherein  you  are  obliged  to  answer 
these  questions  in  the  negative,  abandon  the  attempt 
to  move  on  a  line  of  operation ;  and  make  no  sacrifice  of 
material,  take  no  risks,  alter  none  of  your  formations, 
but  limit  your  action  to  a  movement  on  a  line  of  manoeu- 
vre in  accordance  with  the  following :  — 

PRINCIPLE. 

Given  a  chess  player  and  a  situation  of  chess  pieces  on 
the  chess-board ;  then,  in  the  given  situation,  a  line  of 
operation  does  not  exist  for  the  given  player  unless  he 
can  accurately  calculate  a  process,  as  the  result  of 
which  the  winning  of  the  game  can  be  mathematically 
demonstrated. 

A  line  of  manoeuvre  always  combines  with  itself 
either  a  line  of  mobilization  or  a  line  of  development. 
As  to  which  of  these  should  be  combined  with  the  line 
of  manoeuvre  in  any  given  position  is  determined  by 
the  following :  — 


LOGISTICS  OF  LINES  OF  MOVEMENT.          379 


PRINCIPLE. 

Whenever  tlie  permanent  location  of  the  objective 
plane  is  indeterminate,  the  line  of  manoeuvre  always 
should  combine  with  itself  a  line  of  mobilization ;  but 
whenever  the  permanent  location  of  the  objective  plane 
is  determinate,  the  line  of  manoeuvre  always  should 
combine  with  itself  a  line  of  development. 

Thus  you  see  that  a  movement  on  a  line  of  manoeuvre 
is  a  dual  process.  For  the  line  of  manoeuvre  has  a 
specific  purpose,  which  always  is  the  compromising  of 
the  adverse  position ;  and  the  line  of  mobilization  has  a 
specific  purpose,  which  always  is  the  deployment  of  the 
proper  piece  at  its  proper  post  in  the  strategic  front. 

Consequently  a  movement  on  a  line  of  manoeuvre 
must  harmonize  and  simultaneously  execute  these  two 
purposes.  Hence  the  following :  — 

PRINCIPLE. 

The  objective  of  a  movement  on  a  line  of  manoeuvre 
combined  with  a  line  of  mobilization,  always  is  that 
point  whose  occupation  by  a  given  piece  at  the  given 
time  deploys  the  given  piece  at  its  proper  post  in  the 
strategic  front,  and  compromises  the  adverse  position  as 
much  as  is  possible  at  the  given  time. 

The  combination  of  a  line  of  manoeuvre  and  a  line  of 
development  is  equally  a  dual  process ;  for,  in  addition 
to  the  purpose  of  the  line  of  manoeuvre,  there  always 
exists  the  purpose  of  the  line  of  development,  which 
always  is  the  proper  augmentation  of  the  strategic 
front.  Hence :  — 


380  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


PRINCIPLE. 

The  objective  of  a  movement  on  a  line  of  manoeuvre 
combined  with  a  line  of  development,  always  is  that 
point  whose  occupation  by  a  given  piece  at  the  given 
time  properly  develops  the  strategic  front,  and  com- 
promises the  adverse  position  as  much  as  is  possible  at 
the  given  tima 

You  thus  readily  see  that  both  lines  of  mobilization 
and  lines  of  development  are  absolutely  subordinate  to 
lines  of  manoeuvre ;  that  neither  is  intended  to  stand 
separate  and  alone,  but  it  is  as  an  accessory  to  the 
line  of  manoeuvre  that  each  derives  its  full  power  and 
its  value  as  an  integral  part  of  the  science  of  chess 
strategetics. 

It  was  on  account  of  your  trying  to  play  the  game  on 
a  line  of  mobilization  alone,  —  for,  of  course,  you  then 
had  no  knowledge  of  lines  of  development,  manoeuvre, 
and  operation,  —  that,  after  mastering  "The  Minor  Tac- 
tics of  Chess,"  you  found  difficulty  in  establishing  the 
"  primary  bases  "  therein  laid  down.  But,  nevertheless, 
if  your  experience  was  like  that  of  many,  you  soon  found 
that,  by  means  of  the  approximations  which  you  were 
able  to  obtain,  you  were  winning  more  games  than  you 
previously  had  been  able  to  do  by  means  of  the  "  give- 
and-take  openings  in  the  books." 

A  striking  case  in  point  is  the  following.  The  article 
from  which  it  is  taken  can  be  found  in  the  London 
(Eng.)  Spectator  of  June,  1895.  It  is  entitled  "The 
Theory  of  Chess,"  and  constitutes  a  page  and  a  half  re- 
view, at  once  able  and  complimentary,  of  "  The  Minor 
Tactics  of  Chess." 


LOGISTICS   OF  LINES  OF  MOVEMENT.  381 

"  The  reviewer  played  for  many  years  with  a  friend, 
from  whom  he  usually  received  odds  and  a  beating. 
After  acquiring  the  new  theory  he  (the  reviewer)  has 
played  a  series  of  games  with  the  same  friend  (to  whom 
this  theory  was  unknown)  without  taking  odds,  and  has 
not  only  won  the  majority  of  the  games,  but  made  a 
much  better  fight  in  those  he  lost  than  he  had  usually 
been  able  to  make  before  becoming  acquainted  with  the 
theory." 

All  this  is  very  easy  to  explain.  For  the  first  time 
you  and  the  gentleman  quoted  were  playing  chess  in 
accordance  with  a  system.  True,  the  system  was  rudi- 
mentary, but  it  gave  you  a  chance  to  use  your  brains. 
Consequently  you  had  a  decided  advantage  over  the 
poor  fellow  struggling  to  recall  long  columns  of  figures, 
compiled  by  an  analyst  whose  sole  criterion  as  to  the 
value  of  a  move  lay  in  the  fact  that  somebody,  some- 
where and  at  some  time,  had  played  it  in  a  game  and 
won. 

Prejudice,  force  of  habit,  and  the  influences  of  long 
associations  will  cause  much  discussion  before  this 
theory,  in  spite  of  its  clearness,  uproots  the  analytical 
method. 

One  player  will  triumphantly  show  you  how,  by  break- 
ing up  a  formation  pi-escribed  in  this  theory,  you  obvi- 
ously can  win  the  game  ;  another  will  tell  you  that  genius 
scorns  rule  and  precept,  and  wins  by  beautiful  and  bril- 
liant sacrifices  of  material ;  and  another  will  call  to  your 
notice  Loewenthal's  well-known  dictum :  "  The  judi- 
cious violation  of  general  principles  especially  marks 
the  master-mind." 

It  is  useless  to  tell  these  people  that  this  theory  also 
approves  of  breaking  up  its  own  formations  when,  by  so 


382  THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 

doing,  you  can  win  the  game ;  that  genius,  so  far  from 
scorning  rule  and  precept,  is  the  ability  to  comprehend 
the  laws  upon  which  rules  and  precepts  are  founded; 
that  a  "beautiful,  brilliant,  and  sound  sacrifice  of  ma- 
terial" always  is  the  best  possible  move,  and  is  abso- 
lutely devoid  of  risk ;  and  that  Herr  Loewenthal  would 
have  said  something  worth  remembering  had  he  but  told 
us  when  and  when  not  to  violate  general  principles. 

The  only  thing  you  can  do  is  to  call  their  attention  to 
the  following.  If,  after  reading  it,  their  vision  is  no 
clearer,  it  is  no  fault  of  yours,  nor  of  the  theory,  viz. :  — 

When  tempted  to  violate  a  principle  laid  down  in  this 
theory,  or  to  break  up  a  formation  dictated  by  "  Grand 
Tactics,"  or  whenever  you  are  in  doubt  as  to  whether 
or  not  you  are  justified  in  a  sacrifice  of  material,  recall 
to  your  mind  the  following :  - 

PRINCIPLE. 

When  acting  on  a  line  of  operations,  all  material  may 
be  sacrificed,  all  formations  disintegrated,  and  all  the 
principles  of  chess  strategetics  violated,  that  are  not 
contained  in  the  immediate  calculation.  But,  when 
acting  on  a  line  of  manoeuvre,  never  sacrifice  material, 
never  disintegrate  a  formation,  and  never  violate  a 
principle  of  chess  strategetics. 


LOGISTICS   OF  THE   STRATEGETIC 
HORIZON. 

Whenever  in  a  leisure  moment  on  the  train,  at  the 
caf£,  or  elsewhere,  you  take  up  a  periodical  and  inter- 
estedly scrutinize  a  neat  and  jaunty  proposition  that 
White  play  and  force  mate  in  a  couple  of  moves  or  so  ; 
or  when  at  the  club  you  regard  complacently  the,  to  you, 
seeming  mismanagement  of  a  most  artisti'c  situation 
by  a  pair  of  your  fellow-members ;  or  when  in  a  little 
game  of  your  own  you  glower  at  the  board  and  the 
pieces  with  but  a  single  thought,  "  How  can  I  kill 
him  ?  "  —  you  are  doing  what,  in  the  technical  language 
of  this  theory,  is  termed  taking  a  survey  of  the  strate- 
getic  horizon. 

The  Strategetic  Horizon  is  composed  of  all  the  origins, 
i.  e.  points  occupied  by  pieces,  and  of  all  the  points  not 
occupied,  but  whose  possible  occupation  will  establish  a 
given  force  as  the  greater  force  when  compared  to  the 
opposing  force. 

There  are  three  great  divisions  of  the  strategetic 
horizon :  - 

I.   TACTICAL   PLANES. 
II.   LOGISTIC  PLANES. 
III.    STRATEGIC   PLANES. 

Tactical  Planes  are  composed  of  a  geometric  figure,  or 
of  the  combination  of  two  or  more  geometric  figures ;  of 
the  pieces  appertaining  to  such  geometric  figures ;  and  of 


384  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 

the  adverse  origins  situated  upon  the  peripheries  of  these 
geometric  figures. 

Logistic  Planes  are  composed  of  a  given  logistic 
horizon ;  the  adverse  pawns ;  the  adverse  pawn  alti- 
tudes, i.  e.  the  points  over  which  the  adverse  pawns 
must  pass  to  queen  ;  and  the  points  of  resistance,  i.  e. 
the  origins  from  whence  adverse  radii  of  defence  are 
operated  against  any  point  contained  in  a  given  pawn 
altitude. 

Strategic  Planes  are  composed  of  a  given  objective 
plane,  and  of  the  origins  occupied  by  both  the  attacking 
and  defending  pieces. 

Whenever  a  given  determinate  force  has  acquired,  or 
is  about  to  acquire,  a  superior  strategic  front,  as  com- 
pared with  an  opposing  force,  the  given  force  is  said,  in 
this  theory,  to  be  acting  on  the  strategetic  offensive  ;  and 
the  opposing  determinate  force  is  said  to  be  acting  on 
the  strategetic  defensive. 

Whenever  a  piece  directly  operates  a  radius  of  offence 
against  any  adverse  piece,  the  former  is  said,  in  this 
theory,  to  be  acting  on  the  tactical  offensive  ;  and  when- 
ever a  piece  directly  operates  a  radius  of  defence  for  the 
support  of  any  kindred  piece,  the  latter  is  said,  in  this 
theory,  to  be  acting  on  the  tactical  defensive. 

Whenever  the  piece  or  the  pieces  acting  on  either  a 
line  of  ^  mobilization,  a  line  of  development,  a  line  of 
manoeuvre,  or  a  line  of  operation,  constitute  a  force 
competent  to  perform  the  action  which  is  contemplated 
by  the  given  line  of  movement,  such  a  force  is  termed, 
in  this  theory,  a  strategetic  mass. 

In  order  that  the  application  of  this  may  be  clear  to 
the  student,  his  attention  is  now  called  to  the  pieces 
aligned  in  the  normal  position  on  the  surface  of  the 
chess-board  in  readiness  to  begin  a  game. 


LOGISTICS   OF   THE  STRATEGETIC  HORIZON.       385 

White,  having  the  initiative,  i.  e.  the  right  to  move, 
opensg  with  1  P  —  K  4,  thereby  assuming  the  strategetic 
offensive  by  threatening  to  establish  the  minor  right 
oblique  aligned,  and,  if  permitted,  the  major  right  oblique, 
against  the  objective  plane  located  on  the  centre. 

In  reply,  Black  is  compelled  to  play  1  P  —  K  4,  for  by 
any  other  move  he  will  allow  the  opponent  to  establish 
the  superior  strategic  front. 

It  also  will  be  observed  that  no  piece  is  directly 
attacked  by  any  adverse  piece,  so  neither  White  nor 
Black  is  at  any  point  acting  on  the  tactical  offensive. 

The  tactical  offensive  may  be  assumed  by  any  piece, 
and  is  governed  by  the  following :  — 

PRINCIPLE. 

Never  assume  the  tactical  offensive  except  with  the 
superior  force. 

The  strategetic  offensive  and  the  strategetic  defensive 
are  conditions  which  contemplate  the  action  of  all  the 
pieces  contained  in  a  determinate  force  at  a  given  time, 
and  the  actions  of  the  determinate  force  are  governed  by 
the  following :  - 

PRINCIPLE. 

Never  act  on  the  strategetic  defensive.  « 

Furthermore,  it  is  obvious  that  each  of  the  pawns  thus^ 
deployed  is  properly  posted,  and  is  competent  to  fulfil  its 
duties  in  the  strategic  fronts  projected  by  the  opposing 
players ;  and  consequently  each  of  these  pawns,  being 
competent  to  perform  the  duties  devolving  upon  it,  is,  in 
this  situation,  a  strategetic  mass. 

The  proper  treatment  of  tactical  planes  and  of  logistic 


386  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 

planes  is  described  in  extenso  in  "  The  Major  Tactics  of 
Chess,"  and  the  treatment  of  strategic  planes  is  found 
in  this  volume  under  the  head  of  Strategic  Lines  of 
Operation. 

The  art  of  surveying  the  strategetic  horizon ;  i.  e.,  of 
contemplating  the  various  strategic,  tactical,  and  logistic 
planes  which  are  contained  in  any  given  situation ;  of 
deducing  from  the  comparison  of  these  the  true  rela- 
tive strength  and  position  of  the  opposing  forces ;  of 
designating  the  correct  line  of  movement  and  of  deter- 
mining the  process  which  should  be  initiated  by  the 
player  whose  turn  it  is  to  move,  —  is  the  sum  and  sub- 
stance of  this  theory  of  chess  play. 

So  whenever,  in  a  leisure  moment  on  the  train  or  at 
the  cafe*,  you  undertake  the  solution  of  a  two  mover ;  or 
when  at  the  club  you  are  asked  to  give  an  opinion  on 
some  intricate  situation ;  or  if  in  a  game  of  your  own 
you  feel  called  upon  to  play  at  least  as  well  as  you  know 
how,  —  it  may  be  of  moment  that  in  other  leisure 
moments  you  have  properly  memorized  the  chapter 
following. 


THE   CHESS   PLAYER'S   EPITOME. 

I.  Having  the  initiative,  always  assume  the  strategetic 

offensive. 

II.  To  assume  the  strategetic  offensive,  always   act 
on  a  line  of  operation  when  it  exists. 

III.  A  line  of  operation  exists  only  when  the  kindred 
tactical  units  are  so  disposed  upon  the  origins  of  the 
given  strategetic  horizon  as  to  constitute  a  strategetic 
mass. 

IV.  A  strategic   line  of  operation  exists  only  when 
the   net   value    of  the  radii  of  offence  exerted  by  the 
kindred  strategetic  mass  is  equal  to  the  mobility  of  the 
objective  plane.  « 

V.  A  tactical  line  of  operation  exists  only  when  the 
number   of   radii    of   offence    operated   by  the  kindred 
strategetic  mass  exceeds  the  net  value  of  the  adverse 
radii  of  defence. 

VI.  A  logistic  line  of  operation  exists  only  when  the 
number   of    pawn    altitudes  operated    by   the     kindred 
strategetic  mass  exceeds  the  number  of  adverse  points 
of  resistance. 

VII.  Whenever  two  or  more  lines  of  operation  exist, 
the  strategic  line  of  operation  always  is  to  be  preferred. 

VIII.  Whenever  no  line  of  operation  exists,  always 
act  on  a  line  of  manoeuvre. 

IX.  The  aim  of  a  line   of    manoeuvre  always  is  to 
establish  the  kindred  force  as  a  strategetic  mass  upon 


388  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 

the  origins  contained  in  the  given  strategic,  tactical,  or 
logistic  planes. 

X.  A  complex    line    of  manoeuvre    always    is   based 
upon  one    of   the  strategetic  weaknesses    contained  in 
Classes  I.,  II. ,  III.,  IV.,  and  its  aim  is  to  construct  a 
strategetic  horizon   consisting   of  a  strategic    plane   in 
combination  with  a  tactical  plane  or  with  a  logistic  plane, 
or  with  both. 

XI.  A  compound  line  of  manoeuvre  always  is  based 
upon  one    of   the  strategetic  weaknesses   contained    in 
Classes  V.,   VI.,  VII.,  and  its  aim  is   to  construct   a 
strategetic  horizon  consisting  of  a  tactical  plane  or  of 
a  logistic  plane,  in  combination  with  like  planes  or  with 
each  other. 

XII.  A  simple  line  of  manoeuvre  always  is  based  upon 
the   initiative,  i.  e.  the   right  to  move.      Its   aim    is  to 
unite  in  the  movement  of  a  given  piece  the  deployment 
or  the  development  next  in  sequence,  together  with  an 
evolution  that  assumes  the  tactical   offensive  at  a  point 
which  prevents  the  opponent  from  adopting  the  proper 
strategic  front,  or  from  properly  constructing  the  stra- 
tegic front  adopted. 

XIII.  The  evolutions   first   in    sequence   always   are 
those  which  appertain  to  a  strategic  line  of  operation. 

XIV.  The  evolutions  second  in  sequence  always  are 
those  which  appertain  to  that  tactical  or  to  that  logistic 
line  of  operations  which  is  most  quickly  executed. 

XV.  The  evolutions  third    in    sequence    always  are 
those    which    assume   the   tactical  offensive  in  such   a 
manner  as  to  prevent  the  opponent  from  establishing  the 
first  supporting  parallel,  from    adopting    any    strategic 
front  other  than  a  minor  front  refused,  and  from  properly 
constructing  the  bishop  and  knight  units  which  belong- 
to  the  latter. 


THE    CHESS  PLAYER'S  EPITOME.  389 

XVI.  The    developments    first    in    sequence    always 
are   those   which  establish  in  the  quickest   and   surest 
manner  the  grand   strategic    front  when    the  objective 
plane  is  located  on  the  centre  or  at  the  extremity  of  the 
kindred    strategic  front,  or  the   crochet  aligned  if  the 
objective   plane  is   situated  otherwise. 

XVII.  The  developments  second  in  sequence  always 
are  those  which  establish  the  major  strategic  front  on  the 
strategetic  centre  in  the  quickest  and  surest  manner. 

XVIII.  The  developments  third   in  sequence  always 
are  those  which  construct  the  supplementary  formations 
appertaining  to  the  major  front    in  the   quickest   and 
surest  manner. 

XIX.  The  deployments  first  in  sequence  always  are 
those  which  establish  the  first  supporting  parallel  in  the 
quickest  and  surest  manner. 

XX.  The  deployments  second  in  sequence  always  are 
those  which  complete  the  primary  base  in  the  quickest 
and  surest  manner. 

The  player  having  the  move  should  apply  these  rules 
in  order  to  the  given  situation,  beginning  with  Rule  I. ; 
and  should  continue  down  the  list  until  he  reaches  that 
rule  upon  which,  in  his  judgment,  the  situation  before 
him  is  based. 

If  the  process  indicated  by  this  rule  is  one  of  mobiliza- 
tion, development,  manoeuvre,  or  operation,  he  will  be 
governed  in  his  play  by  the  principles  laid  down  in  this 
volume. 

If  the  process  is  of  the  lower  order,  termed  an 
evolution,  he. will  be  governed  by  the  demonstrations 
laid  down  in  "  The  Major  Tactics  of  Chess." 

If  the  process  is  of  the  lowest  order,  i.  e.  appertaining 
to  the  construction  of  primary  bases,  he  will  be  governed 


390  THE  GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 

by  the  instructions  laid  down  in  "  The  Minor  Tactics  of 
Chess." 

In  every  situation  the  student,  by  means  of  these 
rules,  will  be  able  to  apply  to  the  best  advantage  all  the 
chess  capacity  that  he  possesses  ;  and  he  should  never 
forget  that  at  all  times  the  ideal  move  is :  — 

To  create  a  Strategetic  Mass,  having  the  Strategetic 
Offensive,  and  to  direct  it  along  a  Strategic  Line  of  Opera- 
tions against  the  Objective  Plane. 


APPENDIX. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


GAME   1. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Press  Club,  Jan.  13,  1893. 

• 

This  game  illustrates  the  major  right  oblique  eche- 
loned, opposed  by  the  grand  left  oblique  refused  and 
aligned. 

White  fails  to  establish  the  minor  crochet  and  also  to 
support  the  echelon  by  the  en  appui. 


FRENCH  DEFENCE. 


F.  K.  YOUNG. 


1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 


WHITE. 
P-K4. 

P-Q4. 
Q  Kt  -  B  3. 
B  -  K  Kt  5. 
P-K5. 
B  X  B. 
Q-Q2. 
P-KB4. 
Kt  —  B  3. 
Kt  -  K  2. 
P-QB3. 
Kt  -  Kt  3. 
B  — Q3. 
Castles  (K  R). 
B-B2. 
Kt  —  K  2. 
K-R1. 
R  —  K  Kt  1. 


HARRY  N.  PILLSBURY. 


1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 


BLACK. 
P-K3. 

P-Q4. 

K  Kt  -  B  3. 

B-K2. 

KKt-Q2. 

QxB. 

P  -  Q  R  3. 

P-QB4. 

Kt-B3. 

P  -  Q  Kt  4. 

B  —  Kt  2. 

P-KB4. 

Castles  (K  R). 

P-QB5. 

Kt  -  Kt  3. 

P-QR4. 

K-R1. 

R-^KKtl. 


394 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 
27. 
28. 
29. 


P-KKt4. 
R  —  Kt  3. 
QR-KKtl. 
R  — R3. 
B  —  Kt  1. 
Kt  -  Kt  5. 
P  X  K  B  P. 
Kt  —  Kt  3. 
RPxP. 
BxP. 
Kt  x  B  P. 


19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 
27. 
28. 
29. 


P  —  K  Kt  3. 
P  —  Kt  5. 
P  — R5. 
P  -  Kt  6. 
P-R6. 
R  —  Kt  2. 
KPxP. 
Px  QKtP. 
PxP. 
PXB. 
RxKt. 


Position  after  Black's  23d  move. 
FIG.  243. 

PlLLSBURY. 

(Black.-) 


(White.) 
YOUNG. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES.  395 


30. 

PxR. 

30. 

R-R8. 

31. 

QxP. 

31. 

Rx  R(ck). 

32. 

KxR. 

32. 

Qx  P(ck). 

33. 

Kt  -  Kt  3. 

33. 

Q-K6(ck). 

34. 

K-Kt2. 

34. 

Kt-B5. 

35. 

Q  —  Ktl. 

35. 

Q-Q7(ck). 

36. 

K-R1. 

36. 

Q-QB7. 

37. 

Q-KB1. 

37. 

K  —  Ktl. 

38. 

Kt  -  R  5. 

38. 

Kt  (B  3)  x  K  P. 

39. 

P  X  Kt. 

39. 

P  —  Q5  (disck). 

40. 

K-Ktl. 

40. 

Q  -  K  Kt  7  (ck). 

41. 

QxQ. 

41. 

BxQ. 

42. 

R  -  Kt  3  (ck). 

42. 

K-B1. 

43. 

RxB. 

43. 

PxP. 

44. 

R-KB2(ck). 

44. 

K  —  K  2. 

45. 

Kt  -B  4. 

45. 

P-B7. 

46. 

RXP. 

46. 

PXR. 

47. 

Kt  -  Q  3. 

47. 

Kt  X  P. 

48. 

Kt-Bl. 

48. 

K  —  Q3. 

49. 

K  -  B  2. 

49. 

K-Q4. 

50. 

K-K2. 

50. 

K  -  Q  5. 

51. 

K-Q2. 

51. 

Kt-B6(ck). 

52, 

KxP. 

52. 

Kt  x  P. 

53. 

K-Q2. 

53. 

K  —  K5. 

54. 

Kt  —  Q3. 

54. 

K-B6. 

55. 

K-K1. 

55. 

P  -  K  R  4. 

56. 

Kt-K5  (ck). 

56. 

K-B5. 

57. 

Kt  -  Kt  6  (ck). 

57. 

K  -  Kt  4. 

58. 

Kt-K5. 

58. 

P  -  R  5. 

59. 

Kt  —  Q  3. 

59. 

K  -  Kt  5. 

60. 

K-B2. 

60. 

P-R6. 

61. 

K-Ktl. 

61. 

K  -  Kt  6. 

62. 

K-R1. 

62. 

Kt  -  B  6. 

63. 

Kt-Bl. 

63. 

Kt  -  Q  5. 

64. 

Kt  —  K  2  (ck). 

64. 

Kt  X  Kt. 

Drawn. 


396 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


GAME   2. 

Played  at  the  Deschapelles  Club,  Oct.  8,  1889.     Match  Game. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of  manoeuvre 
against  an  improperly  covered  objective  plane,  all  of 
which  is  opposed  by  Black  with  a  compound  line  of 
manosuvre  by  the  left. 


EVANS'   GAMBIT. 


F.  K.  YOUNG. 


P.  WARE  AND  H.  N.  STONE. 


WHITK. 

BLACK. 

1.    P-K4. 

1. 

P-K4. 

2.   Kt-KB3. 

2. 

Kt-QB3. 

3.    B-B4. 

3. 

B-B4. 

4.    P-QKt4. 

4. 

B  x  Kt  P.  if 

5.    P-QB3. 

5. 

B  —  Q3. 

6.    Castles. 

6. 

Kt  -  K  B  3. 

7.    Kt-Kto. 

7. 

Castles. 

8.    P-KB4. 

8. 

Q-K1. 

9.    P-Q4. 

9. 

PxQP. 

10.    PxP. 

10. 

B  -  Kt  5. 

11.    P  —  K5. 

11. 

P-Q4. 

12.    PxKt. 

12. 

PxB. 

13.    PxP. 

13. 

KxP. 

14.    P-Q5. 

14. 

B  -  B  4  (ck). 

15.    K-R1. 

15. 

B  -  Q  5. 

16.   Q-B2. 

16. 

P-KB4. 

17.    B-Kt2. 

17. 

B-B3. 

18.    PxKt. 

18. 

QxP. 

19.    Kt  —  QB3. 

19. 

P-QKt4. 

20.    QR-K1. 

20. 

P-Kt5. 

21.    Kt(B3)-K4. 

21. 

P  —  B6. 

22.   Kt  —  Kt3. 

22. 

Q-Q4. 

23.    Kt-Ro(ck). 

23. 

K  -  Kt  3. 

24.    KtxB. 

24. 

R  x  Kt. 

25.    R-K7. 

25. 

P  -  K  R  3. 

ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


397 


26. 

R- 

B3. 

26. 

R-Q3. 

27. 

P- 

KR4. 

27. 

Q 

-  Q  8  (ck). 

28. 

K- 

R2. 

28. 

Q 

XQ. 

21). 

P- 

R  5  (ck). 

29. 

K 

XP. 

30. 

R- 

R  3  (ck). 

30. 

K 

-Kt3. 

31. 

R- 

R7. 

31. 

Q 

X  P  (ck). 

32. 

Kx 

Q- 

32. 

B 

—  Kt  2  (ck). 

33. 

K- 

Bl. 

33. 

R 

-Q8(ck). 

34. 

K- 

B2. 

34. 

R 

—  Q7  (ck). 

35. 

K- 

Ktl. 

35. 

R 

-  Q  8  (ck). 

36. 

K- 

B2. 

36. 

R 

-  Q  7  (ck). 

37. 

K- 

Ktl. 

37. 

R 

-  Q  8  (ck). 

38. 

K- 

B2. 

38. 

R 

-  Q  7  (ck). 

Drawn. 

Position  after  White's  28th  move. 
FIG.  244. 

WARE  AND  STOXE. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
YOUNG. 


398 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


GAME   3. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Press  Club,  Feb.  12,  1895. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of  manoeuvre, 
whereby  the  black  K  Kt  is  dislodged  from  Black's  K  B  3, 
the  advance  of  the  black  right  wing  pawns  compelled, 
and  the  command  of  the  objective  plane  obtained. 

KING'S   GAMBIT  EVADED. 


F.  K.  YOUNG. 


H.  L.  LOWE. 


WHITE. 

BLACK. 

1. 

P-K4. 

1. 

P-K4. 

2. 

P-KB4. 

2. 

B  —  B4. 

3. 
4. 

Kt  —  KB  3. 
B-B4. 

3. 
4. 

P-Q3. 
Kt-KB3. 

5. 
6. 

7. 
8. 

P-QKt4. 
Castles. 
P-Q4. 
Kt  —  Kt5. 

5. 
6. 
7. 

8. 

B  X  Kt  P. 
B-B4(ck). 
PxP. 

Castles. 

9. 
10. 

P-K5. 
K-R1. 

9. 
10. 

P-Q6(disck) 
Kt-Kt5. 

11. 
12. 

QxQP. 
P-KB5. 

11. 
12. 

P-KKt3. 
Kt  X  K  P. 

13. 
14. 

Q  -  K  R  3. 
Kt-K4. 

13. 
14. 

P-KR4. 

KtxB. 

15. 
16. 
17. 

Q-KKt3. 
Q  -  K  R  3. 
B-KKt5. 

15. 
16. 
17. 

P  -  K  R  5. 
B-Q5. 
P  —  KB3. 

18. 
19. 
20. 

QxP. 
KtxP. 
Kt-QB3. 

18. 
19. 
20. 

PxB. 
Q-K2. 
RxP. 

ILLUSTRATIVE    GAMES. 


399 


21.  Kt-Q5.  21.  RxQKt. 

22.  QR  —  Kl.  '  22.  Kt—  Q  6. 

23.  RxKt.  23.  BxR. 

24.  R-KB8(ck).       24.  K  X  R. 

25.  Q-R8(ck). 

Mate. 

Position  after  White's  21st  move. 
FIG.  245. 

(Black.) 


( White.) 


400 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


GAME   4, 

Played  at  the  Royal  Pagoda  Ostuli  Tserte,  in  the  fifth  moon  of  the 
first  cycle  of  the  reign  of  Awer,  Senior  Mandarin  of  the  Order 
of  the  Yellow  Button* 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization,  combined 
with  a  complex  line  of  manoeuvre  by  the  right  refused, 
against  an  objective  plane  located,  in  violation  of  strate- 
gic principle,  on  the  refused  wing  of  a  minor  left  oblique 
aligned.  .  |LU\/' 

EVANS'   GAMBIT.    ^(V   V*  K 

MANDARIN  Nswo.  MANDARIN  OYNUG. 
WHITE.  BLACK. 

1.  P-K4.  1.    P-K4. 

2.  Kt  —  KB  3.  2.    Kt-QB3. 

3.  B-B4.  3.    B-B4. 

4.  P-QKt4.  4.    BxKtP. 

5.  P-QB3.  5.    B-Q3. 

6.  Castles.  6.    P  — KR3. 

7.  P-Q4.  7.    Q-KB3. 

8.  R-K1.  8.    P-KKt4. 

9.  Kt-R3.  9.    P-QKt3. 

10.  Kt-QKt5.  10.  B-Kt2. 

11.  B-Q5.  11.  KKt-K2. 

12.  P-KKt3.  12.  Castles  (QR). 

13.  P-QR4.  13.  QR-KKtl. 

14.  P-R5.  14.  P-KR4. 

15.  PXP.  15.  RPXP. 

16.  Kt  xB(ck).  16.  Px  Kt. 

17.  B  — R3.  17.  P  — Ro. 

*  The  Order  of  Mandarins  of  the  Yellow  Button  was  a  chess  coterie  of 
Boston.  It  consisted  of  Messrs.  C  F.  Burille,  F.  H.  Harlow,  Dr.  E.  M. 
Harris,  C.  F.  Howard,  Major  O.  E.  Michaelis,  Gen.  W.  C.  Paine,  Dr.  H. 
Richardson,  C.  B.  Snow,  H.  N.  Stone,  P.  Ware,  Jr.,  and  F.  K.  Young. 

These  men  were  amateurs  who  had  won  their  game  on  even  terms 
against  a  professional  international  champion. 

The  members  of  this  coterie  made  it  a  practice  to  meet  for  play  011 
Saturday  afternoons,  and  to  dihe  together  in  the  evening.  This  coterie 
was  the  nucleus  of  the  famous  Deschapelles  Club. 


ILLUSTRATIVE    GAMES. 


401 


18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 
27. 
28. 
29. 


P  -  Kt  4. 

R-K3. 

PxP. 

KtxR. 

P-KB3. 

R-Q3. 

P  x  Kt. 

RxKt. 

PxR. 

K-R1. 

RxB. 

K-Ktl. 


18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 
27. 
28. 
29. 


Mate. 


P-R6. 
PxQP. 
R-R5. 

PX  Kt. 
Q-KB5. 
KtxB. 
Kt  x  Q  P. 

R  X  P  (ck). 
Q-K6(ck). 
B  x  Q  P  (ck). 
Q-Ko(ck). 
Q-Kt7(ck). 


Position  after  White's  23d  move. 

FIG.  246. 
MANDARIN  OYNUG. 

(Slack.) 


(White.) 
MANDARIN  Nswo. 


402 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


GAME   5. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Chess  Club,  June  13,  1888. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of  rnanreuvre 
against  a  prematurely  formed  right  oblique  aligned,  with 
the  objective  plane  located  on  the  centre,  and  lacking  the 
K  Kt  at  K  B  3. 


VIENNA  OPENING. 


F.  K.  YOUNG  AND  C.  F.  BURILLE.        P.  WARE  AND  C.  B.  SNOW. 


WHITE. 

BLACK. 

1. 

P-K4. 

1. 

P-K4. 

2. 

Kt  -  Q  B  3. 

2. 

Kt-KB3r 

3. 

P  -  K  B  4. 

3. 

B-Kto. 

4. 

B-B4. 

4. 

P-Q3. 

5. 

P-KB5. 

5. 

P-QB3. 

6. 

Kt  -  K  B  3. 

6. 

B  x  Kt. 

7. 

QPXB. 

7. 

KtxP. 

8. 

Castles. 

8. 

Q-Kt3  (ck). 

9. 

K-R1. 

9. 

P-Q4. 

10. 

BxQP. 

10. 

Kt  -  B  7  (ck). 

11. 

RxKt. 

11. 

QxR. 

12. 

B  X  K  B  P  (ck). 

12. 

KxB. 

13. 

Kt  x  P  (ck). 

13. 

K-K1. 

14. 

B  -  Kt  5. 

14. 

Kt-Q2. 

15. 

Q-Q6. 

15. 

Kt  —  B  3, 

16. 

R-Q1. 

16. 

BxP. 

17. 

Q-B7. 

17. 

R  -  K  B  1. 

ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


403 


18.  Kt-QB4. 

19.  QxB(ck). 

20.  Kt-QG(ck). 


18.  B-Q2. 

19.  Kt  X  Q. 


Mate. 


Position  after  Black's  llth  move. 

FIG.  247. 
WARE  AND  SNOW. 

(Black.) 


•  i 


BURILLE    AND   YOUNG. 


404 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 


GAME    6. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Chess  Club,  May  14,  1885. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of  manoeuvre 
against  an.  objective  plane  located  on  the  centre  and  not 
covered  by  a  salient  nor  by  a  Kt  at  K  B  3. 


.    MUZIO   GAMBIT. 


1. 
2. 

3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 


F.  K.  YOUNG. 

WHITE. 

P-K4. 
P  —  KB  4. 
Kt  —  KB  3. 


G.  W.  SANFORD. 


Castles. 
B  x  P  (ck). 
Q  X  P. 
Kt-QB3. 
P-Q4. 
B-K3. 
Q-R5  (ck). 
RxP(ck). 

13.  R  X  Kt  (ck). 

14.  Q-R4  (ck). 

15.  R-KB1  (ck) 

16.  Kt-Q5. 

17.  R-B6. 

18.  RxB  (ck). 

19.  QxQ(ck). 


1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 


BLACK. 

P-K4. 

PxP. 

P-KKt4. 

P  -  Kt  5. 

PxKt 

KxB. 

Q-B3. 

P-Q3. 

Q  x  P  (ck). 

Q-B3. 

Q  -  Kt  3. 

Kt  -  K  B  3. 

KxE. 

K-B2. 

K-K1. 

Kt  -  Q  R  3. 

Q-Kt5. 

K-Q2. 

K-B3. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


405 


20.  Kt  — K7(ck).  20.    K  — Kt4. 

21.  Q-K2(ck).  21.    K-R4. 

22.  RxR. 

And  Black  resigns. 

Position  after  Black's  17th  move. 

FIG.  248. 

SANFOKD. 

(Black.) 


JL 


(White.) 
YOUNG. 


406 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


GAME   7. 
Played  at  the  Boston  Chess  Club,  June  11,  1886. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of  manoeuvre 
against  an  objective  plane  located  on  the  centre  and 
lacking  a  strategic  front. 


EVANS'  GAMBIT. 


F.  K.  YOUNG. 

WHITE. 

1.  P-K4. 

2.  Kt-KB3. 

3.  KB-B4. 

4.  P-QKt4. 

5.  P-QB3. 

6.  P-Q4. 

7.  Castles. 

8.  Q-Kt3. 

9.  P-K5. 

10.  KtxP. 

11.  B-R3. 

12.  KtxP. 

13.  Q-R4. 

14.  Kt-QG(ck). 

15.  PXP. 

16.  KR-Kl(ck). 

17.  RxB(ck). 

18.  Q  X  Kt. 

19.  PxKt(ck). 

20.  Q-B7. 

21.  Kt-K5. 


CHARLES  B.  SNOW. 


1. 
2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 


BLACK. 
P-K4. 
Kt— QB3. 
KB-B4. 
B  X  Kt  P. 
B-R4. 
PxP. 
PXP. 
Q-B3. 
Q-Kt3. 
KKt  — K2. 
P-QKt4. 
R  —  Q  Kt  1. 
P-QR3 
PX  Kt. 
Kt  —  K  B  i. 
B  X  R. 
K-B1. 
Kt-K2. 
K-K1. 
Q  -  Kt  3. 
P-Q4. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


407 


.22.   BxP. 

23.  Q-Q7(ck). 

24.  BxBP(ck). 


22.  B-K3. 

23.  BxQ. 


Mate. 


Position  after  Black's  13th  move. 
FIG.  249. 

SNOW. 
(Black.) 


(White.} 
YOUNG. 


408  THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 

• 

GAME   8. 
Played  at  the  Boston  Chess  Club,  July  12,  1877. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of  manoeuvre 
against  an  objective  plane  located  on  the  centre  and 
improperly  covered  and  supported  by  an  unmobilized 
kindred  force. 

KING'S  GAMBIT. 
F.  K.  YOUNG.  D.  RICHARDSON. 

Remove  White's  Q  Kt. 
WHITE.  BLACK 

1.  P-K4.  1.  P-K4. 

2.  P  —  KB 4.  2.  Px  P. 

3.  Kt  — KB3.  3.  P  — KKt4. 

4.  B-B4.  4.  B-Kt2. 

5.  P  — Q4.  5.  P-KR3. 

6.  P-KR4.  6.  P-Kt5. 

7.  QBxP.  7.  PxKt. 

8.  QxP.  8.  KBxP. 

9.  R-Q1.  9.  P-QB4. 

10.  P-QB3.  10.  B-Kt2. 

11.  P-K5.  11.  Kt-K2. 

12.  P  — K6.  12.  BPx  P. 

13.  Q  — R5(ck).  13.  K  —  B  1. 

14.  B-QB7.  14.  QxB. 

15.  Castles  (ck).  15.  K  —  Kt  1. 

16.  Q-B7(ck).  16.  K-R2. 

17.  B-Q3(ck).  17.  Kt-B4. 

18.  RxKt  18.  R-KKtl. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


409 


19.  R-KR5(disck).         19.   K-R1. 

20.  RxP(ck).  20.   BxR. 

21.  Q-R7(ck). 

Mate. 


Position  after  Black's  llth  move. 
FIG.  250. 

KlCHARDSON. 
(Black.) 


(White.) 

YOUNG. 


410 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


GAME   9. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Chess  Club,  Aug.  2,  1885. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of  manoeuvre  against 
an  objective  plane  located  on  the  centre,  and  exposed  to 
attack  via  open  files  and  diagonals  not  guarded  by  proper 
deployments. 


EVANS'  GAMBIT. 

F.  K.  YOUNG. 

CHARLES  B.  SNOW. 

WHITE. 

BLACK. 

1.    P-K4. 

1. 

P-K4. 

2.   Kt-KB3. 

2. 

Kt  —  QB3. 

3.    KB-B4. 

3. 

KB-B4. 

4.    P-QKt4. 

4. 

B  x  Kt  P. 

5.   P-QB3. 

5. 

B-R4. 

6.   P-Q4. 

6. 

PxP. 

7.    Castles. 

7. 

Kt  —  K  B  3. 

8.    B-R3. 

8. 

Kt  X  K  P. 

9.    Q-Kt3. 

9. 

Q-B3. 

10.    R-K1. 

10. 

Q  -  K  B  5. 

11.    RxKt(ck). 

11. 

QXR. 

12.    BxP(ck). 

12. 

K-Q1. 

13.    QKt-Q2. 

13. 

Q-Q6. 

14.    B-KR5. 

14. 

PxP. 

15.   Kt-Kt5. 

15. 

Kt-K4. 

16.   Kt-QB4. 

16. 

P-Q3. 

17.   KtxKt. 

17. 

Q-B4. 

18.   Kt  (K  5)  -  B  7  (ck). 

18. 

K-Q2. 

19.    B-KKt4. 

19. 

QXB. 

20.   Kt-K5(ck). 

20. 

PxKt. 

ILLUSTRATIVE    GAMES. 


411 


21.  Q-Q5(ck). 

22.  Q-B7(ck). 

23.  Q-K7(ck). 


21.  K-K1. 

22.  K  —  Ql. 


Mate. 


Position  after  Black's  15th  move. 

FIG.  251. 

SNOW. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
YOUNG. 


412 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


GAME    10. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Press  Club,  Nov.  8,  1892. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of  manoeuvre  against 
an  objective  plane  located  on  the  centre  and  compromised 
by  the  formation  of  the  minor  left  oblique. 


DANISH  GAMBIT. 

F.  K.  YOUNG.    .  L.  DORIJ. 

WHITE.  BLACK. 

1.  P-K4.  1.  P-K4. 

2.  P-Q4.  2.  PxP. 

3.  P-QB3.  3.  PxP. 

4.  KB  — B4.  4.  Kt  —  KB  3. 

5.  Kt-KB3.  5.  KtxP. 

6.  Castles.  6.  Kt-Q3. 

7.  KtxP.  7.  KtxB. 

8.  R-K1  (ck).  8.  B-K2. 

9.  Kt-Q5.  9.  Kt  — QB3. 

10.  B  — Kt5.  10.  P  — KB  3. 

11.  R-QB1.  11.  P-QKt4. 

12.  R  X  Kt.  12.  P  x  R. 

13.  Kt-K5.  13.  PXB. 

14.  Q  — R5(ck).  14.  P  — Kt3. 

15.  Kt  —  B  6  (ck).  15.  B  X  Kt. 

16.  Kt  X  Kt  P  (dis  ck).  16.  Q  -  K  2. 

17.  RxQ(ck).  17.  BxR. 

18.  Kt-K5fdisck).  18.  K-Q1. 

19.  Kt-B7(ck).  19.  K-K1. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


413 


20.  Kt-QG(dleck). 

21.  Q  —  K8(ck). 

22.  Kt  -  B  7  (ck). 

Mate. 


20.  K-Q1. 

21.  R  X  Q. 


Position  after  White's  13th  move. 

FIG.  252. 

DORK. 

(Black.) 


• 

li 


(White.) 
YOUNG. 


414 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 


GAME    11. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Chess  Club,  June  15,  1893. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the  right 
oblique  refused,  by  White ;  opposed  by  a  complex  line  of 
manoeuvre  by  Black,  against  an  objective  plane  located 
on  the  right  and  not  properly  covered  nor  supported. 


CUNNINGHAM   COUNTER  GAMBIT. 


CHARLES  B.  SNOW. 

WHITE. 

1.  P-K4. 

2.  P-KB4. 

3.  Kt-KB3. 

4.  B-B4.  " 

5.  B-Kt3. 

6.  P-Kt3. 

7.  Castles. 

8.  K-R1. 

9.  B  X  P(ck). 

10.  KtxB(disck). 

11.  Q-Ro(ck). 

12.  Q  — B3, 

13.  P-Q3. 

14.  B-Kt5. 

15.  Kt-QB3. 
,16.  Q-B2. 

17.  BxKt. 

18.  QxQ. 

19.  RxR. 

20.  KtxQKtP. 


E.  K.  YOUNG. 

BLACK. 

1. 

P-K4. 

2. 

PxP. 

3. 

B-K2. 

4. 
5. 
6. 

P  —  QKt4. 
B  -  R  5  (ck) 
PxP. 

7. 

8. 

PxP(ck). 
B  -  Kt  2. 

9. 

KxB. 

10. 

Kt  —  K  B  3. 

11. 

P-Kt3. 

12. 
13. 

Kt  —  Q  B  3. 
K  -  Kt  2. 

14. 

R-KB1. 

15. 
16. 

Kt  -  Q  5. 
Kt  -  K  3. 

17. 
18. 
19. 

QxB. 
RxQ. 
KxR. 

20. 

P-Q4. 

ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


415 


21.  R-KB1  (ck). 

22.  Kt-B3(ck). 

23.  KKt-Q4(disck). 

24.  KtxKt. 

25.  Kt  — Bo. 

26.  Kt  X  B. 

27.  K-K1. 


21.  K-K4. 

22.  K  — B5. 

23.  K-Kt6. 

24.  PxP. 

25.  P-KG(disck). 

26.  P-K7. 

27.  R-KB1. 


And  White  resigns. 


Position  after  Black's  20th  move. 

FIG.  253. 

YOUNG. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
SNOW. 


416  THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 

GAME    12. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Chess  Club,  Sept.  9,  1877. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  combined  with  a  compound  line  of  manoeuvre 
against  a  premature  counter  attack  by  the  right  refused, 
by  Black. 

KING'S   GAMBIT  EVADED. 
F.  K.  YOUNG.  PRENTISS  CUMMINGS. 


10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 


WHITE. 

BLACK. 

P-K4. 

1. 

P-K4. 

P-KB4. 

2. 

B-B4. 

Kt  -  Q  B  3. 

3. 

Kt  -  K  B  3. 

Kt  -  K  B  3. 

4. 

P-Q3. 

B-B4. 

5. 

Kt-Kt5. 

P-Q4. 

6. 

PxP. 

Kt  x  Q  P. 

7. 

Q-R5  (ck) 

P-Kt3. 

8. 

Q-R6. 

B-B1. 

9. 

Q-R3. 

Kt-Q5. 

10. 

B  -  Kt  3. 

P-KB5. 

11. 

Q-R4. 

P-KR3. 

12. 

B  X  Kt. 

QxB.' 

13. 

Castles. 

B-K2. 

14. 

Kt-QB3. 

Kt  —  K7  (ck). 

15. 

K-R1. 

Kt  X  Kt. 

16. 

P-KB3. 

BxKt. 

17. 

Q-K1. 

Kt-QR5. 

And  White 

wins. 

ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


417 


Position  after  Black's  14th  move. 
FIG.  254. 

CUMMINGS. 
(Black.) 


m      iffli 


il 


M 


(White.) 
YOUNG. 


418 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


GAME    13. 

Played  at  the  Deschapelles  Club,  Oct.  8,  1889. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of  manoauvre  against 
an  objective  plane  located  on  the  right,  the  black  K  Kt 
being  dislodged  from  the  point  black  K  B  3. 


RUY  LOPEZ. 


F.  K.  YOUNG. 


1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 


WHITE. 
P-K4. 
Kt-KB3. 
B  -  Kt  5. 
P-Q4. 
PX  P. 
Castles. 
Kt  -  Q  B  3. 
Kt  -  Q  5. 
P-QB3. 
B-Q3. 
P  -  Q  Kt  4 
P-QB4. 
P  -  Kt  5. 
B  -  Kt  2. 
Q-Q2. 
QR-K1. 
B-R1. 
Kt-QB3. 
Kt-K4. 
Kt-Q6. 
Kt-Q4. 
PxB. 
Kt-B5. 
P-KB4. 
Kt-R6(ck). 


C.   F.   BURILLE. 
BLACK: 

P  — K4. 

2.  Kt-QB3. 

3.  Kt-B3. 
Kt  X  K  P. 
Kt-QB4. 
Kt  -  K  3. 
B-K2. 
Castles. 

P  -  Q  R  3. 

B-B4. 

B-R2. 

P-QR4. 

Kt  -  K  2. 

Kt  -  Kt  3. 

P-R5. 

P-R6. 

P  -  Q  B  3. 

B-B4. 

B-K2. 

P-QKt3. 

BxKt. 

P-QB4. 

P  -  K  B  3. 

R-B2. 

PxKt. 


1. 


4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


419 


26.  P- 

27.  PX 

28.  Qx 

29.  Rx 

30.  RX 

31.  Bx 

32.  Q- 

33.  Bx 

34.  Q- 

35.  B- 

36.  B- 

37.  Q- 


B5. 
Kt 

P. 

KP. 
R. 
KP. 

R  5  (ck). 
P  (ck). 
Kt6(ck). 
Kt  7  (ck). 
R  6  (dis  ck). 
Kt  7  (ck). 

Mate. 

Position  after  Black's  28th  move. 
FIG.  255. 

BUKILLE. 

(Black.) 


26.    Kt(Kt3)  — Bl. 


27. 

PxP. 

28. 

P-K4. 

29. 

PxR. 

30. 

KxR. 

31. 

B-K3. 

32. 

K  Kt  1. 

33. 

KtxB. 

34. 

K-B1. 

35. 

K-Ktl. 

36. 

K-R1. 

(White.) 
YOUNG. 


420  THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 

GAME    14. 

Played  at  the  Deschapelles  Club,  March  14,  1889. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of  manoeuvre  against 
an  objective  plane  located  on  the  centre  and  improperly 
covered  and  supported. 

EVANS'  GAMBIT. 


F.  K.  YOUNG. 

MAJOR  0.  E.  MICHAELIS. 

WHITE. 

BLACK. 

1.    P-K4. 

1.    P-K4. 

2.    Kt-KB3. 

2.    Kt-QB3. 

3.   KB-B4. 

3.    KB-B4. 

4.    p_QKt4. 

4.    BxKtP. 

5.    P-QB3. 

5.    B-B4. 

6.    Castles. 

6.    P-Q3. 

7.   P-Q4. 

7.    PxP. 

8.    PxP. 

8.    B-Kt3. 

9.    Kt  —  QB3. 

9.    B-Kt5. 

10.    Q-R4. 

10.    B-Q2. 

11.    Q  —  Kt3. 

11.    Kt-QR4. 

12.    B  x  P  (ok). 

12.    K-B1. 

13.    Q-B2. 

13.    K  x  B. 

14.    P-K5. 

14.    P  —  KR3. 

15.    P-Q5. 

15.    Kt—  KB  3. 

16.    P-K6(ck). 

16.    BxKP. 

17.    P  X  B  (ck). 

17.    KxP. 

18.    Q-KKt6. 

18.    Q-KB1. 

19.    B-R3. 

19.    R-K1. 

20.    Kt-K5. 

20.    B  —  Q5. 

21.    QR-K1. 

21.    BxQKt. 

22.    Kt-B7(disck). 

22.    K-Q2. 

23.    Q  —  B5(ck). 

23.    K-B3. 

24.    Kt-K5(ck). 

24.    R  x  Kt. 

25.    R  x  R. 

25.    Kt-Kl. 

ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


421 


26. 

27, 


Q-B2. 
QxB. 


29. 
30. 
31. 


28.    Q  -  K  R  3  (ck). 
R-K6. 
KR-K1. 
P-KB4. 

32.  'R  (K  1)  x  Kt. 

33.  B  — K7(ck). 

34.  R  x  P  (dis  ck). 

35.  R-QB5(ck). 

36.  Q-QKt3(ck). 


26. 

27. 

K-Q2. 
Kt-B3. 

28. 
29. 
30. 

K-Q1. 
Q-B2. 
Kt-K4. 

31. 
32. 

QxP. 
PxR. 

33. 
34. 

K-Q2. 
K-B3. 

35. 

K  -  Kt  3. 

And  Black  resigns. 

Position  after  White's  21st  move. 
FIG.  256. 

MlCHAELIS. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
YOUNG. 


422 


THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


GAME    15. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Chess  Club,  Dec.  25,  1877. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of  manoeuvre 
against  an  objective  plane  not  covered  by  a  Kt  at  K  B  3, 
and  weakened  by  the  premature  formation  of  the  en 
appui. 

PHILIDOR'S  DEFENCE. 
F.  K.  YOUNG.  Kurus  SAWYER. 


WHITE. 

BLACK. 

1. 

P-K4. 

1. 

P-K4. 

'2. 

Kt  -  K  B  3. 

2. 

P-Q3. 

3. 

P-Q4. 

3. 

PxP. 

4. 

QxR 

4. 

B-Q2. 

5. 

B  -  K  3. 

5. 

Kt-QB3. 

6. 

Q-Q2. 

6. 

B-K2. 

7. 

B  -  Q  B  4. 

7. 

Kt  -  K  B  3. 

8. 

Kt-QB3. 

8. 

Castles. 

9. 

Castles  (K  R). 

9. 

P-KR3. 

10. 

P  -  K  R  3. 

10. 

P-QR3. 

11. 

Kt  -  R  2. 

11. 

R-QKtl. 

12. 

P  -  K  B  4. 

12. 

P-QKt4. 

13. 

B-Q3. 

13. 

Kt  -  Q  Kt  5. 

14. 

R  -  K  B  3. 

14. 

P-QB4. 

15. 

P-K5. 

15. 

PxP. 

16. 

PxP. 

16. 

Kt  (B3)-Q4. 

17. 

Kt  X  Kt. 

17. 

Kt  X  Kt. 

18. 

B  X  K  R  P.      - 

18. 

P-QB5. 

19. 

B  x  Kt  P. 

19. 

B  -  K  Kt  4. 

20. 

R  -  Kt^3. 

20. 

Q-Kt3(ck). 

21. 

K-R1. 

21. 

P-KB3. 

22. 

Rx  B. 

22. 

PXKB. 

23. 

B  X  P  (dis  ck). 

23. 

K-B2. 

ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


423 


24. 

25. 
26. 

27. 
28. 
29. 
30. 


R-KtT(ck). 

Q  X  P. 

Q  -  Kt  6  (ck). 

RxB. 

Q-KtS(ck). 

Q  X  Kt. 

P-K6. 


24. 
25. 

26. 
27. 
28. 
29. 
30. 


31.  Q-Q7(ck). 

32.  P-K7  (ck). 


K-K1. 
B-K3. 
B-B2. 
RX  R. 
R  — KB1, 
R-QB1. 
RxB. 
K-B1. 


And  Black  resigns. 

Position  after  Black's  16th  move. 

FIG.  257. 

SAWYER. 

(Black.) 


^ 

• 


.  i 

/V///X//,'///.  '/* 


(ITMe.) 
YOUNG. 


424  THE  GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 

GAME   16. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Chess  Club,  Sept.  7,  1885.    Match  Game. 

This  game  illustrates,  first,  a  line  of  mobilization  by 
the  left  refused,  afterwards  converted  into  a  line  of  de- 
velopment by  the  right,  and  combined  with  a  compound 
line  of  mano3uvre  against  a  strategetic  weakness  on 
Black's  left  flank.  Secondly,  the  combining  of  the  de- 
velopment by  the  right  with  a  complex  line  of  mano3u- 
vre  against  an  objective  plane  not  covered  by  a  Kt 
at  K  B  3,  and  weakened  by  the  improper  establishment 
of  the  right  major  crochet  and  the  en  appui. 

ENGLISH  OPENING. 

F.  K.  YOUNG.  P.  WARE. 

WHITE.  BLACK. 

1.  P-QB4.  1.   P-QB3. 

2.  Kt  — QB3.  2.   P  — K3. 

3.  P  — K3.  3.   P  — Q4. 

4.  P-Q4.  4.   PxP. 

5.  B  XP.  5.   B  — Q3. 

6.  Kt  — B3.  6.   Kt  — B3. 

7.  P-K4.  7.    B-Kt5. 

8.  Q-Q3.  8.   P-KR3. 

9.  P-QR3.  9.    B-K2. 

10.  Castles.  10.  P  — QKt4. 

11.  B  — R2.  11.  P  — Kt5. 

12.  P-K5.  12.  Kt-Q4. 

13.  KtxKt.  13.  KPxKt. 

14.  R-K1.  14.  B-K3. 

15.  B-Q2.  15.  P-QR4. 

16.  B  — Kt3.  16.  PxP. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


425 


17.  P  x  P. 

18.  B-R4. 

19.  QR-QB1. 

20.  Q  — B3. 

21.  P-K6. 

22.  R-K3. 

23.  B-Kt5. 

24.  Q  x  R  P. 

25.  B-R4. 

26.  Q-B3. 


17.  P-KKt3, 

18.  Q-B1. 

19.  QB  — B4. 

20.  P  — KKt4. 

21.  P-KB3. 

22.  R-R3. 

23.  R-Kt3. 

24.  Q-Kt2. 

25.  Castles. 

26.  R  — R3. 


Position  after  Black's  26th  move. 

FIG.  258. 

WARE. 

(Black.) 


( White.) 
YOUNG. 


426  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


27. 

B  —  B2. 

27.   R  X  P. 

28. 

BxB. 

28.   R.x  Q. 

29. 

R  (K  3)  x  R. 

29.    R-QB1. 

30. 

P-KR4. 

30.   B-Q3. 

31. 

P-KKt3. 

31.    Q-K2. 

32. 

K  -  Kt  2. 

32.   P-B4. 

33. 

QPxP. 

33.    R$xP. 

34. 

PxP. 

34.   R*Px  P. 

35. 

R-KR1. 

35.    R  X  R. 

36. 

BxR. 

36.    Kt-QB3. 

37. 

KtxP. 

37.   P-Q5. 

38. 

Kt  -  B  7. 

38.    Q-B2. 

39. 

R-R8  (ck). 

39.   K-Kt2. 

40. 

B-Q2. 

40.   Q  x  Kt. 

41. 

R-R7(ck). 

41.   K  —  Ktl. 

42. 

P  x  Q  (ck). 

42.    K-B1. 

43. 

B-R6(ck). 

43.   K-K2. 

44. 

P-B8(Qdleck). 

Mate. 

ILL USTRA TI VE   GAMES.  427 

GAME    17. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Press  Club,  Aug.  19,  1895. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the  left 
refused,  afterwa'rds  converted  into  a  line  of  development 
by  the  right  refused,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of 
mano3uvre  against  an  objective  plane  located  on  the  re- 
fused wing  of  a  minor  left  oblique  refused. 

Black  opposes  this,  first,  by  the  minor  left  oblique, 
then  by  the  major  left  oblique  aligned,  combined  with  a 
complex  line  of  manoeuvre  against  the  logistic  horizon 
and  an  objective  plane  not  properly  covered  nor  sup- 
ported. 

QUEEN'S  OPENING. 

C.  F.  BUKILLE.  F.  K.  YOUNG. 

WHITE.  BLACK. 

1.  P-Q4.  1.  P-Q4. 

2.  Kt-KB3.  2.  P-QB4. 

3.  P-K3.  3.  Kt-QB3. 

4.  P-QKt3.  4.  P-K3. 

5.  B-Kt2.  5.  Kt-KB3. 

6.  QKt-Q2.  6.  P-QKt3. 

7.  B-Kt5.  7.  B-Kt2. 

8.  Kt-K5.  8.  R-QB1. 

9.  Kt  X  Kt.  9.  B  X  Kt. 

10.  B  — Q3.  10.   B  — K2. 

11.  Castles.  11.    Castles. 

12.  Q-K2.  12.   Q-Q2. 

13.  P-KB3.  13.   KR  —  Ql. 

14.  QR-Q1.  14.   Kt-KR4. 

15.  P  —  KB  4.  15.   Kt  —  KB  3. 


428  THE   GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 

16.  P-KB5.  16.   Kt-K5. 

17.  B  X  Kt.  17.   P  X  B. 

18.  P-Q5.  18.   KPxQP. 

19.  KtxKP.  19.   P  — KB3. 

20.  Q-Kt4.  20.   K-R1. 

21.  R-KB3.  21.    Q  —  K  1. 

22.  Kt  — B2.  22.   P  —  Q  5. 

23.  P  — K4.  23.   B  —  Q  3. 

24.  R  — KR3.  24.   R  — QB2. 

25.  QR-Q3.  25.   R-K2. 

26.  R  — R4.  26.    B  —  Q  2. 

27.  B-QB1.  27.   P-KK14. 

28.  R  — R6.  28.   B  —  K  4. 

29.  QR-R3.-  29.   R-Kt2. 

30.  QR-R5.  30.   Q-B2. 

31.  P  — KR4.  31.    PxP. 

32.  QxP.  32.    QR-KKtl. 

33.  Kt-Kt4.  33.   B-K1. 

34.  B-Kt5.  34.    P  X  B. 

35.  Q  — KR1.  35.    Q  —  K  2. 

36.  R-R3.  36.   P-Q6. 

37.  KtxB.  37.    PxP. 

38.  Kt  — Q3.  38.    P  — Kt5. 

39.  R(R3)-R4.  39.    R-KB1. 

40.  K-B2.  40.   P-QB5. 

41.  PxP.  41.   B  — Kt3. 

42.  P-Kt3.  42.   BXP. 

43.  PxB.  43.   RxP(ck). 

44.  Kt  —  B  4.  44.    R  X  Kt  (c.k). 

45.  PxR.  45.   P-Kt6(ck). 

46.  K-B3.  46.   P-Kt7. 

47.  Q-KKtl.  47.   Q-R6(ck). 

48.  K-K2.  48.   P-B8(Ktck). 

Resigns. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


429 


Position  after  White's  34th  move. 
FIG.  259. 
YOUNG. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
BURILLE. 


430 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 


GAME    18. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Chess  Club,  Sept.  7,  1886.    Exhibition  Game. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  originally 
directed  by  the  left  refused,  converted  into  a  line  of  de- 
velopment by  the  right,  and  combined  with  a  complex 
line  of  manoeuvre  against  a  premature  counter  attack 
by  the  right  refused,  by  Black,  and  an  objective  plane 
weakened  by  the  improper  establishment  of  the  echelon 
and  en  appui. 

QUEEN'S  OPENING. 
F.  K.  YOUNG.  DR.  H.  KICHARDSON. 


WHITE. 

1. 

2. 

P-Q4. 
Kt-KB3. 

3. 

P-K3. 

4. 
5. 

P-QKt3. 
PxP. 

6. 

7. 
8. 
9. 
10. 

B  -  Q  Kt  2. 
B-Q3. 
QKt-Q2. 
Q-K2. 
Castles  K  R. 

11. 

Kt-K5. 

12. 

P-KB4. 

13. 

R-KB3. 

14. 
15. 

QR-KB1. 
R-KR3. 

16. 
17. 

Kt(Q2)-B3. 
Kt-KR4. 

18. 
19. 

R(B1)-KB3. 
PXP. 

BLACK. 
P-Q4. 
Kt-KB3. 
P-K3. 
P-QB4. 
BxP. 

6.  P-QKt3. 

7.  B  — Kt2. 
Castles. 
Kt-K5. 
P-KB4. 
Q  -  K  Kt  4. 
Q-R3. 

Q  —  K  R  5. 


8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 


14.  Q-K2. 

15.  R-KB3. 


20.   R(B3)-Kt3. 


16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 


P-KR3, 
Q-K1. 
P  -  K  Kt  4. 
Kt  X  P. 
K-B1. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


431 


21.  RxKt. 

22.  Kt(R4)-Kt6  (ck). 

23.  Q-KR5. 

24.  Q-R6(ck). 

25.  Q-R7(ck). 

26.  QxB. 

27.  Kfc  X  Kt. 

28.  B-K5(ck). 


21.  PxR. 

22.  RxKt. 

23.  R-KKtl, 

24.  K-K2. 

25.  K-Q3. 

26.  Kt-Q2. 

27.  QxKt. 


And  Black  resigns. 

Position  after  Black's  20th  move. 
FIG.  260. 

KlCHARDSON. 

(Slack.) 


(White.) 
YOUNG. 


432 


THE  GRAND  TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


GAME    19. 
Played  at  the  Boston  Chess  Club,  June  7,  1885.     Match  Game. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
left,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of  manoeuvre  against 
the  logistic  horizon. 

ENGLISH  OPENING. 
F.  K.  YOUNG.  P.  WARE. 


1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15: 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 


WHITE. 
P-QB4. 
P-QR3. 
Kt  -  Q  B  3. 
P-K3. 
P-Q4. 
PxP. 
B-K2. 
Kt  -  K  B  3. 
Castles. 
P  -  Q  Kt  4. 
Kt  -  K  R  4. 
P  -  K  B  4. 
P-QB5. 
Kt  X  Kt. 
P-Q5. 
PxKt. 
,B-QB4. 
P-KB5. 
R-QR3. 
P-KKt4. 
R-K3. 
B  -  Kt  3. 
B-R3. 
BXP. 
Q-K2. 
KxR. 


BLACK. 

1.  P-K4. 

2.  Kt-QB3. 
P-Q3. 
Kt  -  K  B  3. 
PXP. 
B-K2. 

B  -  K  B  4. 

P-KR3. 

Castles, 

P-QR3. 

B  -  K  R  2. 

P-Q4. 

Kt  -  K  5. 

PxKt 

KtxP. 

BxKt. 

K-R1. 

B-B3. 


3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 


19.   Q-Q2. 


20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 


KR-K1. 

P-QKt4. 

P-QR4. 

PXP. 

R-QR8. 

R  X  R  (ck). 

P-Kt3. 


ILLUSTRATIVE    GAMES. 


433 


27. 

28. 
29. 
30. 
31. 
32. 
33. 
34. 
35. 
36. 
37. 


P-B6. 

27.   Q-B1. 

QxP. 

28.    P  x  P. 

P-Q6. 

29.   P  x  Q  P. 

B  x  K  B  P. 

30.    R-B1. 

Q  -  Kt  7. 

31.   B-K4. 

Bx  QP. 

32.   B  —  Kt2. 

Bx  R. 

33.    Q  x  B. 

P-B7. 

34.   QxB. 

P-B8(Qck). 

35.   Q-Ktl. 

R  —  QR3. 

36.   B  —  Bl. 

R-R7. 

And  Black 

resigns. 

Position  after  Black's  26th  move. 

FIG.  261. 

WARE. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
YOUNG. 


434 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


GAME    20. 

Played  at  the  Deschapelles  Club,  Feb.  19,  1889.     Tournament  Game. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  afterwards  converted  into  a  line  of  mobilization 
by  the  left  refused,  combined  with  a  line  of  development 
by  the  right ;  then  a  compound  line  of  manoeuvre  by  the 
left,  afterward  converted  into  a  complex  line  of  manoeu- 
vre against  an  objective  plane  located  on  the  refused 
wing  of  the  minor  left  oblique. 


STONEWALL  OPENING. 


F.  K.  YOUNG  AND  P.  WARE. 


1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
24. 


WHITE. 

P-Q4. 

P-KB4. 

P-K3. 

P-QB3. 

Kt-KB3. 

B-Q3. 

Castles. 

B-Q2. 

B-K1. 

Kt  X  P. 

Kt-Q2. 

B-KR4. 

Kt  X  Kt. 

Q-B2. 

P  — K4. 

P-KB5. 

P-QB4. 

B  X  Kt. 

Kt-B3. 

Q-Q2. 

P-QR3. 

P  -  K  Kt  4. 

QR-QB1. 

R-QB2. 


C.   F.   BURILLE. 

BLACK. 

1.  P-Q4. 

2.  P-K3. 

3.  P  — QB4. 

4.  Kt-KB3. 

5.  Kt-QB3. 

6.  B  — Q3, 

7.  Castles. 

8.  P-QKt3. 

9.  P  x  P. 

10.  B-Kt2. 

11.  R-QB1. 

12.  R-K1. 

13.  B  X  Kt. 

14.  P— KR3. 

15.  P-K4. 

16.  P-Q5. 

17.  B-K2. 

18.  B  X  B. 

19.  Q  — Q3. 

20.  B  — K2. 

21.  B  — Kt2. 

22.  R-B2. 

23.  B-R3. 

24.  KR-QB1. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


435 


25. 
26. 
27. 
28. 
29. 
30. 
31. 
32. 
33. 
34. 
35. 
36. 
37. 


KR-QB1. 

P-KR4. 

P  —  Kt  5. 

P-QKt4. 

P-QKt5. 

P-QB5. 

P  X  Kt  P. 

R-B6. 

PxP. 

RxR. 

R-B6. 

PXP. 

Kt  X  K  P. 

And  Black  resigns. 


25.  R-B3. 

26.  Q-B2. 

27.  R-K1. 

28.  B-QB1. 

29.  R-Q3. 

30.  R(Q3)-Q1, 

31.  QxP. 

32.  Q-Ktl. 

33.  R-Q3. 

34.  Q  x  R. 

35.  QxQRP. 

36.  P-KB3. 


Position  after  White's  28th  move. 
FIG.  262. 

BURILLE. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
YOUNG  AND  WARE. 


436 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


GAME    21. 

Played  at  the  DescJiapelles  Club,  March  2,  1889.     Tournament  Game. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the  left 
refused,  afterward  converted  into  a  line  of  development 
by  the  major  right  oblique,  combined  with  a  complex 
line  of  manoeuvre  against  an  objective  plane  located  at 
the  extremity  of  a  major  adverse  front. 

QUEEN'S   OPENING. 
F.  K.  YOUNG  AND  H.  N.  STONED.  C.  F.  BURILLE. 


1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 
27. 
28. 


WHITE. 

P-Q4. 

P-K3. 

Kt  -  K  B  3. 

P-QKt3. 

B  -  Kt  2. 

B  -  K  2. 

Castles. 

P-QB4. 

Kt  -  Q  B  3. 

Q-Q2. 

KR-Q1. 

Kt  -  K  Kt  5. 

B-KB3. 

Kt  X  B. 

P-Q5. 

Kt  -  K  Kt  5. 

Kt-K6. 

Q-B2. 

Kt-K2. 

Kt(K2)-B4. 

Kt  X  Kt. 

P-KB3. 

Q-KB2. 

PxP. 

Q-Kt3. 

Q  X  Q  P. 

KtxB. 

Q  —  Kt  3. 


BLACK. 

1.  P-KB4. 

2.  Kt-KB3. 

3.  P-K3. 

4.  B-K2. 

5.  Castles. 

6.  P-QKt3. 

7.  B-Kt2. 

8.  P-QB4. 

9.  P-QR3. 

10.  Q-B2. 

11.  P-Q3. 

12.  Q-B1. 

13.  BxB. 

14.  R-R2. 

15.  P-K4. 

16.  QKt  — Q2. 

17.  R-K1. 

18.  P-K5. 

19.  Kt-Bl. 

20.  Kt-Kt3. 

21.  P  x  Kt. 

22.  B-Q1. 

23.  PxP. 

24.  Kt  — R2. 

25.  P-KKt4. 

26.  Kt-Bl. 

27.  R  x  Kt. 

28.  P-Kt5. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


437 


29. 

P-K4. 

29.    PxBP.    . 

30. 
31. 
32. 
33. 

P-K5. 
R-KB1. 
RXP. 
B-B3. 

30.    QR-Q2. 
31.   Q-Kt2. 
32.   P-QKt4. 
33.   P-Kt5. 

34. 

B  -  Kt  2. 

34.   P-R4. 

35. 
36. 

Q  R  -  K  B  1. 
RXP. 

35.   P-R5. 
36.    P-R6. 

37. 

B-R1. 

37.   Kt-K3. 

38. 
39. 
40. 
41. 

Px  Kt. 
Q-KB3. 
KxR. 
K-K2. 

38.   R-Q8. 

39.   R  x  R  (ck). 
40.   R-Q8(ck). 

,  And 

Black  resigned. 

Position  after  White's  35th  move. 
FIG.  263. 

BURILLE. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
YOUNG  AND  STONE. 


438 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF   CHESS. 


GAME   22. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Chess  Club,  June  16,  1884. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the  left 
refused  and  a  premature  attack  by  White,  followed  by 
the  counter  attack  of  Black  by  a  complex  line  of  manoeu- 
vre against  an  objective  plane  not  covered  by  a  Kt  at 
K  B  3,  and  weakened  by  the  formation  of  the  appui. 


QUEEN'S  OPENING. 
CAPT.  G.  H.  MACKENZIE.  F.  K.  YOUNG. 


1. 
2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 


WHITE. 

P-Q4. 

P-QB4. 

Kt-QB3. 

P-K3. 

Kt  -  K  B  3. 

B-Q3. 

Castles. 

P  -  Q  Kt  3. 

B  -  Kt  2. 

Q-K2. 

P-Q5. 

BxP. 

B-K6(ck). 

Kt  -  K  R  4. 

Q-B2. 

QR-Q1. 

B  x  Kt. 

B  -  K  2. 

BxKt. 

QxP. 

Kt  -  K  4. 

QxB. 

K-R1. 

Q-Q4. 

P-KR3. 


1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 


BLACK. 

P-KB4. 

P-K3. 

Kt  -  K  B  3. 

B  —  K  2. 

Castles. 

P  —  Q  Kt  3. 

B  -  Kt  2. 

P-KR3. 

P-Q3. 

QKt-Q2. 

PXP. 

Px  P. 

K-R1. 

Q-K1. 

Kt  -  K  4. 

Kt(B3)-Kt5. 

BxKt. 

Kt  -  Q  6. 

PXB. 

Q  -  K  R  4. 

B  X  Kt. 

BxP  (ck). 

QR-K1. 

R-K4. 

R  -  K  Kt  4. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


439 


26.  Q-K4. 

27.  Q-K6. 

28.  Q-Q7. 

29.  RxP. 

30.  Q  X  R. 

31.  R  x  B. 

32.  K-R2. 


26.  P-Q4. 

27.  R-K1. 

28.  RxKP. 

29.  R  x  R  P  (ck). 

30.  R  X  R. 

31.  Q-Q8(ck). 

32.  R-KR4. 


And  White  resigns. 

Position  after  White's  16th  move. 

FIG.  264. 

YOUNG. 

(Black.) 


( White.) 
MACKENZIE. 


440 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


GAME    23. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Chess  Club,  Jan.  17,  1884. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of  manosuvre 
against  an  objective  plane  located  on  the  right  and  not 
covered  nor  supported  by  the  improperly  mobilized  kin- 
dred force.  The  miscalling,  by  the  teller,  of  White's 
twentieth  move  gave  Black  a  complex  line  of  manoeuvre, 
and  the  play  that  ensued  led  the  British  Chess  Magazine 
to  say :  "  This  game  is  one  of  the  most  interesting  we 
ever  played  over." 

EVANS'   GAMBIT. 
P.  WARE  AND  F.  K.  YOUNG.        DR.  J.  H.  ZUKERTORT. 


WHITE. 

BLACK. 

1.    P-K4. 

1. 

P-K4. 

2.   Kt-KB3. 

2. 

Kt  -  Q  B  3. 

3.   KB-B4. 

3. 

K  B  -  B  4. 

4.   P-QKt4. 

4. 

B  X  Kt  P. 

5.   P-QB3. 

5. 

B  —  R4. 

6.   P-Q4. 

6. 

PxP. 

7.    Castles. 

7. 

PxP. 

8.   Q-Kt3. 

8. 

Q  -  K  B  3. 

9.   P-K5. 

9. 

Q  -  Kt  3. 

10.   KtxP. 

10. 

KKt-K2. 

11.   B-QR3. 

11. 

Castles. 

12.    QR-Q1. 

12. 

P-QKt4. 

13.    B-Q3. 

13. 

Q  -  K  Kt  5. 

14.   P-K&3. 

14. 

Q-K3. 

15.   BxRP(ck). 

'       15. 

K  —  Rl. 

16.   Kt  —  Q5. 

16. 

P  —  Kt5. 

17.   Kt-Kt5. 

17. 

Kt  X  Kt. 

18.  Kt  x  Q. 

18. 

B  P  X  Kt. 

ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


441 


19.  B-QKtl. 

20.  Q-Q3.* 

21.  P-KKt4. 

22.  Q-K4. 

23.  K-R1. 

24.  Q-Kt2. 

25.  R  X  Kt. 

26.  KR-Q1. 


19.  P  X  B. 

20.  R-KB4. 

21.  KtxKP. 

22.  Kt-BG(ck). 

23.  Kt-Kt4. 

24.  R-KB6. 

25.  PxR. 

26.  RxRP(ck). 


Position  after  White's  17th  move. 

FIG.  265. 
ZUKERTORT. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 

WARE  AND  YOUNG. 
*  Miscalled  by  teller  for  20.  Q  —  B  2. 


442  THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


27. 

K-Ktl. 

27. 

Kt-B6  (ck). 

28. 

K-B1. 

28. 

B  -  R  3  (ck). 

29. 

B-Q3. 

29. 

Kt-R7(ck). 

30. 

K-Ktl. 

30. 

RXB. 

81. 

RxR. 

31. 

B  X  R. 

32. 

QxQP. 

32. 

R-KB1. 

33. 

KxKt. 

33. 

R  X  P  (ck). 

34. 

K  -  Kt  3. 

34. 

B  —  Kt  3. 

35. 

QXB. 

35. 

RxRP. 

36. 

QxQP. 

36. 

R  -  K  B  7. 

37. 

Q-K8(ck). 

37. 

K-R2. 

38. 

Q-KR5  (ck). 

38. 

K  -  Kt  1. 

39. 

P-Kt5. 

39. 

K-B1. 

40. 

P-Kt6. 

40. 

P-R7. 

41. 

Q-R8(ck). 

41. 

K-K2. 

42. 

Q  X  P  (ck). 

42. 

K-Q3. 

43. 

Q-QB3. 

43. 

K-K3. 

44. 

Q  -  R  8. 

44. 

R-KB3. 

45. 

P  -  Kt  7. 

45. 

R  -  K  Kt  3  (ck). 

46. 

K-R3. 

46. 

K-Q2. 

47. 

Q-R7. 

47. 

R  —  KR3  (ck). 

48. 

QxR. 

48. 

P-R8(Q). 

49. 

Q-Q2(ck). 

49. 

K-K2. 

50. 

P-Kt8(Q). 

50. 

Q  -  K  R  8  (ck). 

51. 

Q-KR2. 

51. 

Q-B6(ck). 

52. 

Q  (R  2)  -  Kt  3. 

52. 

Q-R8  (ck). 

53. 

K-Kt4. 

53. 

Q-Q8(ck). 

54. 

K-Kt5. 

54. 

Q-QB8(ck). 

55. 

K-R5. 

55. 

Q-Q8(ck). 

56. 

Q  (Kt  8)  -  Kt  4. 

And  Black 

resigns. 

ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


443 


GAME    24. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Chess  Club,  July  9,  1886. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right  and  the  exposure  of  the  prime  strategetic  point  by 
the  advance  of  the  K  B  P  before  castling,  and  then  leav- 
ing the  point  K  B  3  uncovered  by  a  Kt. 


SALVIO   COUNTER  GAMBIT. 


WILHELM  STEINITZ. 


1. 
2. 
3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 


WHITE. 

P-K4. 
P-KB4. 
Kt  -  K  B  3. 
KB-B4. 
Kt-K5. 
K-B1. 
P-Q4. 
Kt  -  Q  B  3. 
K  x  P. 
K  -  Kt  1. 
KB-B1. 
B  -  K  B  4. 
B-Kt3. 
Kt  -  Q  B  4. 
B-B2. 
Kt  -  Q  5. 
Kt  X  B  P. 
P  -  Q  B  3. 
PxP. 
Q-Q2. 


F.  K.  YOUNG. 

BLACK. 

1.  P-K4. 

2.  PxP. 

3.  P  — KKt4. 

4.  P-Kt5. 

5.  Q-KR5(ck), 

6.  Kt-KR3. 

7.  P-KB6. 

8.  P  X  P  (ck). 

9.  Q-R6(ck). 

10.  Kt-QB3. 

11.  Q-KR5. 

12.  P-Q3. 

13.  Q-KKt4. 

14.  B-Kt2. 

15.  P-KB4. 

16.  Castles. 

17.  R-QKtl. 

18.  P  — Kt6. 

19.  Kt-KKt5. 

20.  P-KB5. 


444 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


21.  P  X  P. 

22.  Kt-Q5. 

23.  B-Kt2. 

24.  R-K1. 

25.  Kt(Q5)-K3. 

26.  B-Kt3. 

27.  PxR. 

28.  R-KR4. 

29.  E  X  Kt. 

30.  B  — B2. 


21.  Q-K2. 

22.  QxP. 

23.  Q-KKt3. 

24.  B-K3. 
RxP. 
RxQP. 
KBxP. 
P-KR4. 


25. 

26. 

27. 
28. 


29.  QxR. 

30.  Q-KB5. 


Position  after  White's  26th  move. 
FIG.  266. 
YOUNG. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
STEINITZ. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES.  445 

31.  Kt  — Q5.  31.  QxB(ck). 

32.  Q  X  Q.  32.  B  X  Q  (ck). 

33.  K  X  B.  33.  R  -  K  B  1  (ck). 

34.  K  — Kt3.  34.  Kt  —  Q  5. 

35.  KtxP.  35.  R-Q1. 

36.  Kt  — K4.  36.  K  — Kt2. 

37.  Kt(K4)-QB3.  37.  P  — QKt3. 

38.  Kt  — B4.  38.  B  —  B  2. 

39.  K  — R4.  39.  K  —  R  3. 

40.  R  —  K5.  40.  R  — KKtl. 

41.  B  — Q5.  41.  R  — Kt5(ck). 

Drawn. 


GAME   25. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Chess  Club,  Sept.  19,  1886.     Match  Game. 

This  game  illustrates  the  overthrow  of  an  improperly 
constructed  major  right  oblique  by  the  minor  left  oblique 
refused  and  aligned,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of 
manoeuvre  against  an  objective  plane  located  on  the 
centre  and  improperly  covered. 

REMOVE   BLACK'S   K  B  P. 
P.  WARE.  F.  K.  YOUNG. 

WHITE.  BLACK. 

1.  P  —  K4.  1.  Kt  — KR3. 

2.  P  —  KB  4.  2.  Kt  — B2. 

3.  P  — Q4.  3.  P  — K3. 

4.  Kt-KB3.  4.  B-K2. 

5.  B  — Q3.  5.  P— Q4. 

6.  P  — K5.  6.  P  — QB4. 

7.  P-QB3.  7.  Kt-QB3. 

8.  P-QKt3.  8.  B-Q2. 


446 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 


9.   B-K3. 

9. 

10.   Q-B2. 
11.   Q-KB2. 
12.   P-KR3. 

10. 
11. 
12. 

13.    QKt  —  Q2. 
14.    PxP. 

13. 
14. 

15.   K-K2. 

15. 

16.   K  x  Kt. 

16. 

17.   Kt-QB4. 
18.   K-Q2. 

17. 

18. 

P-QKt3. 

R-QB1. 

Kt-KR3. 

Castles. 

PxP. 

Kt  — QKt5. 

KtxB. 

16.  B-QKt4(ck). 

17.  PxKt(ck). 


Position  after  White's  13th  move. 

FIG.  267. 

YOUNG. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
WARE. 


ILLUSTRATIVE   GAMES. 


447 


19.    P  X  P. 

19. 

Q-Q4. 

20.    KR  —  QKtl. 

20. 

Q-K5. 

21.   K-Q1. 

21. 

Kt  —  B  4. 

22.    B-Q2. 

22. 

Kt-Kt6. 

23.    Q-K3. 

23. 

Q-B7(ck). 

24.    K-K1. 

24. 

Kt-B8. 

25.    Q-B2. 

25. 

KtxB. 

26.   KtxKt. 

26. 

KR—  Ql. 

27.    Q-K3. 

27. 

RxQP. 

28.    R-QB1. 

28. 

B  -  K  R  5  (ck) 

29.   P-KKt3. 

29. 

BxP(ck). 

And  White  resigns. 


•  GAME   26. 

Played  at  the  Boston  Press  Club,  Jan.  26,  1893. 

This  game  illustrates  a  line  of  mobilization  by  the 
right,  combined  with  a  complex  line  of  manoeuvre  against 
an  objective  plane  located  on  the  right,  not  covered  by 
a  Kt  at  K  B  3,  and  weakened  by  the  false  fianchetto  of 
the  K  B  and  the  premature  formation  of  the  minor  left 
oblique  refused. 


EUY  LOPEZ. 


F.  K.  YOUNG. 

WHITE. 
P-K4. 
Kt  —  K  B  3. 
B  -  Kt  5. 
P-Q4. 
Castles. 
P-QB3. 
Kt-KR4. 
P  -  K  B  4. 


H.  N.  PILLSBURY. 


BLACK. 
P-K4. 
Kt  -  Q  B  3. 
P-Q3. 
B-Q2. 
P  —  KB  3. 
K  Kt  -  K  2. 
P-KKt3. 
B  -  Kt  2. 


448 


THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


9. 

P-KB5 

9. 

PxP. 

10. 

PxP. 

10. 

Castles. 

11. 

Q  -  Kt  4. 

11. 

K-R1. 

12. 

R-KB3. 

12. 

R  -  K  Kt  1 

13. 

R-R3. 

13. 

B-R3. 

14. 

Q-R5. 

14. 

BxB. 

15. 

Kt-Kt6  (ck). 

15. 

K  -  Kt  2. 

16. 

QxP. 

Checkmate. 

Position  after  Black's  8th  move. 
FIG.  268. 

PlLLSBURY. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 

YOUNG. 


THE  MODEL  GAME. 


THE  MODEL   GAME, 

Played  in  the  Second  Round  of  the  First  American  Chess  Congress, 
at  New  York,  1857. 

FRENCH  DEFENCE. 

CHARLES  PAUL  MORPHY,  JUDGE  A.  B.  MEEK, 

New  Orleans,  La.  Mobile,  Ala. 

WHITE.  BLACK. 

1.  P  — 4. 

The  best  opening  deployment  for  White,  combined 
with  the  correct  manoeuvre,  viz.,  to  prevent  P  —  Q  4 
by  Black.  See  "  Grand  Tactics,"  page  341. 

1.  P-K3. 

Inferior  to  1  P  —  K  4,  which  last  is  best  for  Black. 
The  second  player  is  now  committed  to  the  strategic 
front  by  the  left  refused.  A  prime  defect  in  this  de- 
ployment lies  in  the  fact  that  it  permits  White  at  once 
to  establish  the  first  supporting  parallel. 

2.  P-Q4. 

The  best  deployment  for  White,  combined  with  the 
correct  manoeuvre,  viz.,  to  form  the  first  supporting 
parallel.  White  can  now  develop  either  by  the  right 
or  by  the  left,  which  is  the  desideratum  previous  to  the 
locating  of  the  objective  plane. 

2.  P-KKt3. 

Entirely  unscientific,  being  neither  a  deployment  nor 
a  manoeuvre.  The  weakness  thus  created  in  Black's 


452  THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 

right  wing  makes  it  perilous   later  to   properly  castle 
his  king. 

3.  B-Q3. 

White  proceeds  to  establish  the  primary  base 
Q  P  B  1  A  as  laid  down  in  "  Minor  Tactics,"  pages 
125-142,  and  page  139  (j),  and  so  deploys  as  to  retain 
the  option  of  developing  either  by  the  right  or  by  the 
left. 

3.  B— Kt2. 

This  also  is  entirely  unscientific,  being  again  neither 
a  deployment  nor  a  manoeuvre. 

4.  B-K3. 

See  "  Minor  Tactics,"  page  139  (k). 

4.  Kt-K2. 

The  natural  sequence  in  Black's  position,  which 
already  is  far  inferior  to  that  of  White. 

5.  Kt-K2. 

See  "  Minor  Tactics,"  page  138  (h). 

5.  P-QKt3. 

Black  now  commits  himself  irrevocably  to  the  left 
oblique  refused.  This  deployment  is  valid.  See 
"Minor  Tactics,"  page  162  (f). 

6.  Kt-Q2. 

See  "  Minor  Tactics,"  page  138  (i). 

6.  B-QKt2. 

This  also  is  a  valid,  deployment  See  "  Minor 
Tactics,"  page  163  (k). 

7.  Castles. 

By  this  move  White  initiates  the  line  of  development, 
and  announces  his  purpose  of  attacking  by  the  right 
oblique  if  Black  castles  K  R,  and  by  the  crochet  aligned 


THE  MODEL   GAME. 


453 


if  Black  castles  Q  R.  It  will  be  observed  that  the 
advanced  Kt  P's  make  it  equally  hazardous  for  Black 
to  cas-tle  on  either  side. 

7.   P-Q4. 

Black  permits  White  to  establish  the  major  front  by 
the  right. 

8.   P-K5. 

And  then,  in  open  defiance  to  this  theory,  Black 
locates  his  prime  strategetic  point  at  the  extremity  of 
the  adverse  strategic  front. 

Position  after  Black's  6th  move. 

FIG.  269. 
(Black.) 


( White.) 
White  to  move. 


454  THE   GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 

8.  Castles. 
See  "  Grand  Tactics,"  page  362. 

9.   P-KB4. 

White  reinforces  his  major  front  with  the  K  B  P  en 
potence,  and  thus  combines  the  best  deployment  with 
the  correct  manoeuvre,  viz.,  to  develop  the  strategic 
front. 

9.  P-KB4. 

White's  superiority  seems  demonstrated  by  the  fact 
that  Black  voluntarily  creates  a  strategetic  weakness 
in  his  position  by  making  K  3  an  uncovered  point. 
See  "  Minor  Tactics,  page  130  (a). 

10.  P-KR3. 

White  propos^ 3  to  reinforce  his  major  front  en 
potence  by  the  echelon,  and  to  that  end  he  first  estab- 
lishes the  K  R  P  en  appui  to  support  the  advance  of  the 
K  Kt  P.  See  "  Grand  Tactics,"  page  372. 

10.  QKt— Q2. 

An  unscientific  move,  which  is  necessitated  by  the 
general  inferiority  of  Black's  position.  The  Q  Kt,  of 
course,  should  be  deployed  at  Q  B  3,  after  the  deploy- 
ment of  Q  B  P  at  Q  B  4.  See  «  Minor  Tactics,"  page 
160,  and  page  162  (c)  and  (i). 

11.  K-R2. 

The  King  is  deployed  to  make  room  at  K  Kt  1  for  the 
K  R,  and  it  is  placed  at  R  2  in  order  to  be  secure  from 
the  attack  of  the  adverse  Q  B,  and  to  support  the  point 
d'appui. 

11.  P-QB4. 

This  deployment  is  valid.  See  "Minor  Tactics," 
pages  160,  164,  166. 


THE  MODEL   GAME. 


455 


12.    P-QB3. 

See  "  Minor  Tactics,"  pages  106  and  133  (d)  ;  "  Grand 
Tactics,"  page  286,  Formulas  1  to  16. 

12.   P  — QB5. 

See  "  Grand  Tactics,"  page  225,  Formulas  96  to  100. 
Black  has  now  established  the  major  left  oblique  re- 
fused. The  defect  in  this  strategic  front  lies  in  the  fact 
that  it  has  not  the  direction  of  the  objective  plane.  See 
"  Grand  Tactics,"  page  159. 

Position  after  White's  12th  move. 

FIG.  270. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
Black  to  move. 


456  THE    GRAND   TACTICS   OF  CHESS. 

13.  B-QB2.  13.   P-QR3. 

Entirely  wrong.  Black  always  with  all  speed  should 
reinforce  this  front  with  the  echelon  by  P  —  Q  Kt  4 
and  P-QR4. 

14.  QKt  —  KB  3. 

See  "  Minor  Tactics,"  page  138  (i). 

14.   P  — KR3. 

White  menaces  to  avail  of  the  strategetic  weakness  in 
Black's  position  by  attacking  the  unsupported  K  P,  and 
Black,  in  preventing  this,  creates  another  uncovered 
point  at  K  Kt  3.  As  the  result,  his  position  is  now 
fatally  compromised. 

15.  P-KKt4.  15.    K-R2. 

16.  R-KKtl.  16.   R-KKtl. 

The  reader  will  observe  that  every  white  piece  de- 
ployed has  been  posted  in  exact  accordance  with  this 
theory  of  chess  play.  It  also  will  be  observed  that  the 
faults  in  the  Black  position  are  occasioned  by  the  post- 
ing of  pieces  not  in  accordance  with  this  theory  of  chess 
play.  To  rectify  Black's  position,  see  Frontispiece. 

17.  Q-K1. 

Up  to  this  point,  every  move  by  White  has  combined 
either  the  line  of  mobilization  or  the  line  of  develop- 
ment with  the  line  of  manoeuvre.  Black,  very  im- 
properly, has  limited  his  efforts  not  only  to  the 
strategetic  defensive,  but  even  to  the  tactical  defensive. 
Consequently  White's  constructive  processes  incident 
to  the  strategetic  offensive  not  having  been  interrupted, 
the  present  game  stands  a  perfect  model  of  the  art  of 
combining  deployments  and  developments  by  the  right 
oblique  with  a  simple  line  of  manoeuvre  against  an 


THE  MODEL   GAME. 


457 


objective  plane  located  on  the  refused  wing  of  an 
adverse  strategic  front  directed  by  the  left  oblique 
refused. 

The  Black  front  not  being  echeloned,  the  establish- 
ment of  the  minor  crochet  by  White  is  unnecessary. 
The  strategetic  weakness  contained  in  the  Black  posi- 
tion makes  it  possible  for  White  to  mathematically 
demonstrate  a  decisive  loss  to  Black  either  in  position 
or  in  material,  or  in  both.  Therefore  White,  by  the 
move  in  the  text,  initiates  a  strategic  line  of  operations, 
i.  e.  he  forecasts  the  capture  of  the  adverse  king. 

Position  after  Black's  16th  move. 
FIG.  271. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
White  to  move. 


458 


THE    GRAND   TACTICS   OF   CHESS. 


This  move  by  White  is  dictated  by  greater  logistics, 
and  is  based  upon  a  strategetic  weakness  in  the  position 
of  the  opponent.  If  this  weakness  did  not  exist,  White 
would  obey  the  dictates  of  lesser  logistics,  and  deploy 
the  Q  at  Q  2.  See  "  Minor  Tactics,"  page  142  (n),  and 
"  Grand  Tactics,"  page  382,  Formulas  108,  113  to  116. 

17.   Kt-QB3. 
This  leaves  the  weak  K  Kt  P  supported  only  by  the  K. 

18.   Kt  — R4.  18.   Q  — KB1. 

This  position  would  seem  to  show  the  superiority  of 
the  right  oblique  over  the  left  oblique  refused,  i.e.  of 

JPosition  after  Black's  18th  move. 

FIG.  272. 
(Black.) 


( White.) 
White  to  move. 


THE  MODEL   GAME.  459 

the  "  open  "  game  over  the  "  close  "  game.  The  pieces 
on  both  sides  are  equal,  and,  with  the  exception  of  a 
single  pawn,  none  are  .advanced  beyond  the  kindred  half 
of  the  board.  Nevertheless  Black  is  hopelessly  beaten, 
and  all  for  the  simple  reason  that,  whereas  the  bulk  of 
the  White  force  interposes  between  the  bulk  of  the 
Black  force  and  the  white  king,  the  bulk  of  the  Black 
force  does  not  so  interpose  between  the  bulk  of  the  White 
force  and  the  black  king. 

This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  White  strategic  front 
is  established  on  the  strategetic  centre,  and  is  extended 
in  the  direction  of  the  objective  plane,  and  that  the 
Black  strategic  front  is  not  established  on  the  strate- 
getic centre,  nor  extended  in  the  direction  of  the 
objective  plane. 

Thus,  in  any  circumstance  it  seems  that  the  reason 
why  one  player  wins  and  another  loses  may  always,  at 
least,  logically  be  deduced;  in  the  situation  appended 
it  will  hardly  be  denied  that  this  reason  can  be  mathe- 
matically demonstrated. 

19.    Ktx  KtP. 

Many  will  laud  this  as  a  "  stroke  of  genius."  As 
a  matter  of  fact,  it  is  a  simple  manifestation  of  the 
capacity  to  count  beyond  two,  which  is  one  of  the 
things  that  distinguish  mankind  from  monkeys  and 
parrots.  "  Genius "  consists  in  constructing  such  a 
situation  that  a  line  of  operations  not  only  is  possible, 
but  inevitable.  Morphy  and  the  greater  chess  mas- 
ters, like  the  greater  military  captains,  had  no  use  for 
the  supernatural.  All  their  processes  were  worked 
out  by  simple  arithmetic,  and  founded  upon  the  prop- 
osition that  two  and  two  make  four.  The  phrases 
"  intuition "  and  "  inspiration "  are  the  refuge  of  the 


460  THE   GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 

fellow  who  neither  can  do  it,  comprehend  it,  nor  ex- 
plain it. 

19. .  K  x  Kt. 

The  reader  will  observe  that  the  game  was  won  before 
a  piece  had  been  removed  from  the  board.  Whenever 
you  see  a  player  exchanging  his  men  right  and  left,  "  in 
order  to  avoid  complications,"  put  him  down  as  one 
whose  conscience  tells  him  he  is  at  most  but  a  second- 
class  player,  and  who  consequently  is  afraid  of  his 
opponent. 

20.  PxP(dleck).  20.   K-B2. 

21.  PxP(ck).    '  21.   KxP. 

22.  P-B5(ck). 

White  now  forms  the  major  right  oblique  aligned  en 
appui.  See  "  Grand  Tactics,"  page  167. 

22.   K-K2. 

23.  Q-KR4(ck).  23.   K-K1. 

24.  P-KB6. 

White  now  occupies  the  strategetic  objective,  and 
establishes  the  grand  right  oblique  en  appui.  This  is 
the  logical  culmination  of  the  major  and  minor  strategic, 
fronts  directed  by  the  right,  and  it  is  held  by  this  theory 
that  the  grand  front,  all  else  being  equal,  decides,  per 
se,  the  victory. 

24.    B  X  P. 

25.  PxB.  25.    RxR. 

26.  RxR.  26.    Kt  X  B  P. 

The  attention  of  the  reader  is  called  to  White's  pri- 
mary base,  and  the  ease  with  which  the  pieces  that  com- 
pose it,  after  having  mutually  defended  each  other  and 
their  own  king  throughout  the  game,  are  now  precipitated 
in  overwhelming  force  against  the  objective  plane. 


THE  MODEL    GAME. 


461 


27.  B-Kt6  (ck). 

28.  B  — B5(ck). 

29.  B  x  R  P. 

30.  R-Kt7. 


27.  K-Q2. 

28.  K-K1. 

29.  Q-R1. 

30.  Kt  —  KKtl. 


White   now  announced   checkmate   in   three   moves. 
Its  purest  form  is  as  follows :  — 

1.    B-Kt  6(ck),  K-B  1;    2.   R-  K  B  7  (die  ck),  K- 
Kl;    3.   R-QB7(disck).     Mate. 

Position  after  White's  24th  move. 

FIG.  273. 

(Black.) 


(White.) 
Black  to  move. 


462 


THE  GRAND   TACTICS  OF  CHESS. 


The  ultimate  objective  plane  of  Black  will  be  seen  to 
have  as  its  coefficient  of  mobility  the  numeral  which 
expresses  the  net  value  of  the  adverse  force  which  is 
directly  employed  in  effecting  checkmate.  See  "  Grand 
Tactics,"  page  318. 


THE  MINOR  TACTICS  OF  CHESS 

A  Treatise  on  the  Deployment  of  the  Forces 
in  Obedience  to  Strategic  Principle 


FRANKLIN  K.  YOUNG  AND  EDWIN  C  HOWELL 
16mo.    Cloth.    Illustrated.    Price,  $1.OO 


"FHE  student  of  chess  will  find  in  this  book  an  altogether  original  treatment  of  the 
opening  or  "  development "  of  the  game.  Avoiding  the  cumbersome  and  fre- 
quently misleading  analysis  of  which  chess  manuals  have  hitherto  been  composed,  the 
authors  have  elaborated  the  known  principles  of  development,  have  discovered  and 
enunciated  others  of  manifestly  great  value,  and  have  built  upon  this  theoretical  founda- 
tion a  practical  method,  or  series  of  methods,  of  deploying  the  chess  pieces  so  that 
they  shall  individually  and  collectively  exercise  their  normal  functions  in  the  most 
effective  and  consistent  manner.  A  number  of  standard  positions,  of  varying  excel- 
lence, but  all  sound  and  strong,  are  given  as  models ;  and  the  player  is  advised  to 
strive  toward  the  attainment  of  the  best  of  these  positions  which  the  play  of  his 
adversary  will  permit.  The  construction  of  "  primary  bases,"  as  the  standard  posi- 
tions are  called,  is  discussed  and  explained  in  detail ;  and  it  is  believed  that  even  a 
beginner  at  chess  will  be  enabled  by  study  of  this  succinctly  written  book  to  open  a 
game  intelligently  and  with  good  prospects  of  success,  without  having  to  burden  his 
memory  at  the  outlet  with  the  manifold  variations  that  are  worked  out  in  the  ordinary 
treatises.  The  military  idea,  which  is  apparent  in  the  title,  enters  to  a  considerable 
extent  into  the  new  theory,  but  is  not  made  unreasonably  prominent.  The  greater 
part  of  the  volume  is  what  may  be  termed  "interesting  reading;"  the  style  is  clear 
and  forcible,  and  the  system  which  it  teaches  is  put  together  in  a  progressive,  logical 
way  that  is  quite  convincing.  The  technique  of  the  game  is  described,  like  everything 
elsj^from  preface  to  finis,  in  a  novel,  striking  fashion ;  and  the  book  is  adapted  equally 
ise  of  beginners  and  the  study  of  experts.  It  is  hoped,  indeed,  that  it  may 
a  class  of  readers  who  have  thus  far  been  frightened  away  from  chess  books 

Uir  intricate  appearance,  but  who  may  be  curious  to  learn  in  familiar  language  the 
elements  of  chess  strategy  as  it  exists  in  spirit,  apart  from  the  letter  of  analysis^,  "^ 

A  remarkable  book.  —  London  Illustrated  News. 

By  authors  whose  ability,  it  must  be  understood,  is  beyond  question.  —  London  Literary 
World. 

This  little  manual,  however,  is  a  distinct  contribution  to  chess  literature,  and  we  predict 
that  its  pages  and  principles  will  be  studied  with  profit.  —  The  Churchman,  Ne-w  York. 

The  reviewer  played  for  many  years  with  a  friend  from  whom  he  usually  received  odds 
and  a  beating  After  acquiring  the  new  theory  he  (the  reviewer)  has  played  a  series  of  games 
with  the  same  friend  (to  whom  this  theory  was  unknown)  without  taking  odds,  and  has  not 
only  won  the  majority  of  the  games,  but  made  a  much  better  fight  in  those  he  lost  than  he  had 
usually  been  able  to  make  before  becoming  acquainted  with  the  theory.  — London  Spectator. 

Yours  is  the  first  successful  attempt  to  treat  the  royal  game  in  a  truly  scientific  manner, 
and  give  it  a  decent  nomenclature.  In  my  opinion  your  little  book  inaugurates  the  beginning 
of  a  new  epoch  in  chess  literature.  —  WILLIAM  P.  KOCHENOUR,  M.D. 


SOLD    BY   ALL    BOOKSELLERS 

ROBERTS  BROTHERS,  Publishers 

Boston,  Mass.,  U.S*A* 


9  ft*-** 


,  / 


RETURN TO: 


CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 
198  Main  Stacks 


LOAN  PERIOD     1 
Home  Use 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS. 

Renewals  and  Recharges  may  be  made  4  days  prior  to  the  due  date. 
Books  may  be  renewed  by  calling  642-3405. 


DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW. 

1  J  A  I~i       f% 

MAR  3  u  2007 

FORM  NO.  DD6                        UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 
50M    1-05                                                  Berkeley,  California  94720-6000 

LOAN  DEPT. 


GL 

\ 


V4S 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA.  UBRARY 


